Home

Control-M User Guide

Contents

1. 000 388 Examples of xp essions os do irverd bed serene ene 9 ola eee eee DEER eee eee 389 Valid functions Template editor and condition formats 391 Control M User Guide About this book This book contains procedures that you perform with the Control M Enterprise Manager product to automate monitor and intervene in your production environment This book is intended for all users of Control M Enterprise Manager Control M EM The book is organized into parts that reflect the logical progression of high level tasks Each part contains the chapters that organize the individual implementation tasks into related chapters To use the information in this book most effectively read the chapters in the order in which they are presented NOTE m BMC Software recommends that before you use this book you become familiar with the concepts presented in the Control M Concepts Guide m This book assumes that Control M is already installed and initially configured The installation and configuration tasks are described in the Control M Installation Guide m This book does not discuss administrative tasks for example daily maintenance Those tasks are described in the Control M Administrator Guide Like most BMC Software documentation this book is available in printed and online formats Visit the BMC Software Customer Support page at http www bmc com support_home to request additional printed
2. Delete Undelete Force OK Edit Properties Edit JCL Chapter 2 Working with Control M Desktop and Control M EM 55 Tabs in the User and Group Authorizations windows 56 Jobs panel buttons Choose All buttons In the Browse Control or Update pane click the button on your left to select all check boxes Clear All buttons In the Browse Control or Update pane click the button on your right to clear all check boxes NOTE Descriptions of each job action can be found in the Control M User Guide To specify the types of jobs and alerts you can access 1 Click the Filter button in the Displayed Jobs pane The Jobs Filter Definition window is displayed 2 Enter a description for the Jobs filter 3 Define selection criteria for the Jobs filter as described below Selection criteria that are relevant for alerts will also be used by the Alerts filter 4 Click OK to save the Jobs filter and Alerts filter definitions To define selection criteria for the jobs and alerts filters The Edit pane in the Jobs Filter Definition window contains field operator value combinations that define the Jobs filter The field values are compared with the parameter values in job processing definitions to determine if the jobs are included or excluded by the Jobs filter Job parameters are described in the Control M Parameter Guide Table 14 Collection selection criteria Column Description Field Field to b
3. Display links behind nodes When selected displays the connecting lines that represent the conditional links between jobs behind the job nodes Display Out Conditions with minus sign as dotted links Out Conditions that get deleted should be displayed The link is indicated with dotted lines Display Optional In Condition as How optional In conditions for example two In conditions separated by an OR operator will be displayed with solid or dotted lines 354 Control M User Guide Setting options for Control M Desktop Table 71 Flow diagram condition settings Flowdiagram Links panel Part 2 of 2 Field option Add Out condition with minus sign when creating job dependency Default to be set Automatically create Out conditions to delete the In conditions that you automatically create by dragging between nodes in the Control M Desktop flow diagram Condition format Default condition format to be used when you create job dependencies by dragging between job nodes in the Control M Desktop flow diagram Delete only IN cond Delete the In condition when Delete Dependency is selected from a condition line pop up menu Delete IN OUT conds Delete both the In condition and the Out condition when Delete Dependency is selected from a condition line pop up menu Ask what to delete Display the Delete Dependency dialog box Default Automatically inherit job s
4. onana annann enserrer 325 Generating a Tepot coses trees eertetbewy ee Deer a neds eee EA ease tes 326 Displaying and working with reports sssasusisssrurrnnrrrnrrunnnn 327 Defining templates and Ad Hoc reports i veeussdae cde eevee a Ges rnrn 328 5Most fields on most panels are self explanatory For information on using the Report Wizard see Creating templates using the Report Wizard on page 330 330 Generating and exporting reports in batch 0 cece eee 336 Using command line parameters ci isciclevadsntesabeenetieesiae saad eee as 337 Input arguments file deveda eed PESS aarun arrra rruaren arrenar 338 Introduction The Control M Reporting facility enables you to define templates that you can use to generate reports that provide you with important information about your Control M installation The reporting facility uses the Crystal Report application to produce reports Report files and report template files are saved locally as rpt files You can include variables in report templates and then supply the values for the variables when the report is generated The report will then vary depending to the values you supply You supply the dynamic values using pop up dialogs if you are working online or in an Command Line Attributes Arguments File if you are generating the reports in batch Chapter27 Defining and generating reports 319 Available report types NOTE You can customize
5. 1 2 2 0 000 c cece eee eee 279 Workl ad Manages seters oss ors pin eer verse ba ee E EEUN aE peewee aber es 280 Defining or modifying a Workload ciicscedsccevays stern re dhvaddawesa dn 283 Definition tabs of the Workload window 00 000 cc cece eee eens 284 Defining time periods for Workload Policies 00 eee eee 289 Defining prioritization of Workload Policy node mapping enforcement 292 Monit rimg workloads ocsctscs testes aia naas a occ aa a aa n a a iR 293 Introduction to Workload Management Control M s Workload Management and Nodes Management features help you to better control manage and balance the workload on Control M resources and nodes This is done in three primary areas m Limiting resources available to groups of jobs in the active environment Routing groups of jobs to execute on specific resources m Defining a resource s availability in the dynamic environment according to specific times With Control M s Workload Management you can divide any or all of the jobs in the Control M active environment into smaller groups of jobs These groups of jobs are called Workloads Jobs are grouped together according to shared general attributes in their job definitions This is done by defining a job attribute filter for a Workload which associates any job with those attributes in the active environment with that Workload Jobs can be associated with more than one Workload Managing Workloa
6. updates application fields that start with the letter A and replaces every occurrence of the letter with the substring xyz Add Adds a new complex field into a list field For example Add In Condition m Set Name like incondition1 m Set Date like ODAT Add a new in condition to all jobs found according to the rest of the criteria and set the sub fields as defined Remove Removes a complex field from a list field For example Remove Shout m Where To like EM Removes all shouts to destination EM from all jobs found according to the rest of the criteria Chapter 10 Creating and updating many jobs at once 181 Finding and updating jobs and tables Table 47 FIND operators Operator Description like Enhances regular expressions supported For more information see Pattern matching strings on page 387 It is supported by the like operator in all other windows for example viewpoint collection definition and alert filter not like The opposite of like is exactly The field value is equal to the value provided exact match no wildcards or regular expressions is not exactly The field value is not equal to the value provided starts with The field value starts with the value provided Pattern matching rules apply Special characters such as are not processed as literals unless there is a backslash m DESCRIPTION Starts with abc
7. 0 cece ec e eee ee 257 Checking predecessor and successor job flows 000 eee eee eee 258 TAtETVENINE p ra iatri alaei kaaa k pE a g CEA Vander eee R E E EO EE AE RA R 262 Viewing and editing the details of a job in the active environment 262 Performing manual job intervention 2 6 0siscsexs eed save eee sannded nnna 265 Handling errors that occur when you intervene 00s eee nuo 270 Manually indicating satisfied conditions e062 00 hex ev eee weed a vee ees 270 Manually rescheduling jobs in the active environment 04 272 Activating third party applications lt 8 40 s6i6 evews sve srera renarena 279 Control M EM provides you a number of ways to monitor job processing in the active environment and a number of ways to manually intervene in the job processing Monitoring Control M EM provides a number of methods for monitoring job processing For example m The Alerts facility can indicate problems in the Alerts window For details see Chapter 21 Monitoring and handling alerts m Shout statements defined in job processing definitions can notify you for example through the console or through email of job processing statuses or problems Chapter 22 Monitoring and intervening in production 255 Checking job status summaries by Control M application and group SNMP traps defined in DO SNMP statements in job processing definitions can indicate problems to other applicati
8. Applying the criteria The middle section of the Jobs Filter Definition window contains Include in Jobs Filter and Exclude from Jobs Filter lists that are used to specify how the selection criteria are applied Each line in the Include in or Exclude from Jobs Filter list can include multiple criteria There is an AND relationship between all the criteria on a line Only jobs that satisfy all the criteria on a line are included or excluded by the Jobs filter There is an OR relationship between separate lines in the Include in or Exclude from Jobs Filter list Jobs that fulfill the criteria on any one line are included or excluded by the Jobs filter The first example below with single criteria and second example with multiple criteria illustrate how to define a Jobs filter EXAMPLE The Jobs filter definition includes jobs that meet both of the following inclusion criteria m The job Member name must end with e m The job must run ona Control M installation whose name begins with o or that meet the following inclusion criteria m The job is cyclic Even if a job meets the preceding inclusion criteria the filter excludes the job if it runs ona Control M installation whose name is omega ctm3 Chapter 2 Working with Control M Desktop and Control M EM 57 Tabs in the User and Group Authorizations windows 58 B To add a line in the Include in or Exclude from Jobs Filter list 1 Click Add 2 Create criteria for this line a
9. Use the buttons above the areas to add lines delete copy or move resources EXAMPLE Quantitative Resource Usage A job will use 56 of the processing capacity of the CPU and 12 Gb of the hard disk m InControl M EM choose Tools gt Quantitative Resources and define the following quantitative resources and their total quantities in the Control M Server if not already defined CPU Hard Disk Gb m Inthe Resources tab in the job editing form for the job define the following resources and their required usage values A quantitative resource called CPU with a required usage value of 56 A quantitative resource called Hard Disk with a required usage value of 12 EXAMPLE Control Resource Usage A job requires exclusive control of the Employees Weekly Timesheets file m In Control M EM choose Tools gt Control Resources and allocate a control resource called Employees Weekly Timesheets m In the Resources panel of the job editing form specify that the job requires exclusive control over the Employees Weekly Timesheets file While the resource the file is currently in use by another job this job will not be submitted While this job is currently running another job that needs the resource will not be submitted Chapter 4 Defining how jobs should run 111 Defining and using variables that are dynamically resolved at runtime Defining and using variables that are dynamically resolved at ru
10. 1 From the Tools menu select Service Definition Manager The Service Definition Manager window appears 2 Select the service rule that you want to delete Control M User Guide Generating services from a rule 3 Click A confirmation message appears 4 Click Yes The service rule is deleted Generating services from a rule This procedure describes how to manually generate services from a rule that was previously created Before You Begin Successful completion of Starting Control M Desktop on page 26 To generate service from a rule 1 From the Tools menu select Service Definition Manager The Service Definition Manager window appears 2 Select a rule that contains the services you want to generate and from the Actions menu click Generate Services From Rule The Generate Services Service Rule lt serviceRule gt window appears 3 Select the service definitions that you want to generate and click Generate The service definitions are created and appear in the Service Definition Manager Chapter 24 Control M Self Service management 309 Generating services from a rule 310 Control M User Guide Service monitoring Service monitoring OVERVIEW vi 2x84 decid indeed cig des pee boyy Pees aedeeess 312 Monitoring S rvVig S e vse wre ore phee PAE tae ebeg ETE UE pi PEERS eRe IE BES 312 Chapter 25 Service monitoring 311 Service monitoring overview Service monitoring overview The Service Monitor in
11. 80 Control M User Guide Defining job processing definitions and SMART Tables basic procedure B In the Control M field select the Control M that will control the job C If you are creating a table m Select whether the table will be a SMART Table with an extended set of table definition parameters by clicking the SMART check box at the top of the window For more information about SMART Tables see Creating and editing SMART Tables on page 127 If you are creating a job m in the Job type field select the type of job NOTE Starting with Control M EM 6 3 01 Job Type replaces the following parameters Application Node Group but not Node Group or Node ID Group Form Name Application type Application version and CM version The default value is OS Select this value except in the following situations For mission critical jobs if the BMC Batch Impact Manager product is installed select BIM m For external application jobs such as SAP or Oracle E Business Suite select the appropriate job type but first ensure that the relevant Control Module is installed and the appropriate application form has been imported To import Application forms choose Tools gt Import Application Form and browse to and select the form For details see the relevant Control Module administrator guide 3 Edit the definition as appropriate as described in Creating and editing jobs on page 83 NOTE tA If you sel
12. Control M User Guide Using command line parameters Using command line parameters The emreportcli utility can be activated by entering command line parameters as follows emreportcli u lt user gt p lt password gt pf lt password file gt s lt server host name gt template lt templateName gt template_path lt template path gt output_file_type EXCEL EXCEL_DO DOC PDF HTML XML CSV TABBED output_file_path lt output file path gt param lt name gt lt value gt The parameters in this command are described in Table 64 and Table 65 Table 64 emreportcli report generation utility parameters Parameter Description emUser Control M Enterprise Manager user name emPass Control M Enterprise Manager user password passwordFilename Flat file containing an unencrypted username and password in the following format user username password password Note If both U and pf are specified an error message is generated If neither is specified an online prompt is issued for the Control M EM database owner name and password emServer Host name of the Control M EM Server Note To address a GUI Server when multiple GUI Servers exist set this parameter to the logical name of the relevant GUI Server Table 65 emreportcli parameters Element Attribute Description OutputFile The report output file type Specifies the type of the output file such as EXCE
13. Defining periodic statistics definitions Defining periodic statistics definitions A periodic statistics definition determines the periods according to which statistics are collected for a specific job or set of jobs These periods are defined in a Periodic Calendar using the Calendar Manager The periodic statistics definition relates the desired Periodic Calendar to a job or set of jobs To relate a Periodic Calendar to a job or set of jobs do the following m Use the Calendar Manager available in Control M Desktop to find or create an appropriate Periodic Calendar m Use the Periodic Statistics Manager available in Control M Desktop to create a periodic statistics definition To display the Calendar Manager select Tools gt Calendar Manager For details about defining and using Periodic Calendars see Chapter 8 Using predefined calendars to schedule jobs To display the Periodic Statistics Manager select Tools gt Periodic Statistics Manager A list of periodic statistics definitions are displayed in the Periodic Statistics Manager The user must arrange the periodic statistics definitions in order of precedence so that if a job is included in two or more periodic statistics definitions the definition with the greater precedence higher up on the list is applied to the job By default new definitions are added to the bottom of list as they are created Since the order of the definitions is important the list
14. Display Background Display a background edge between the frame and the top of the page of the 366 Control M User Guide Table 80 Setting options for the Control M Reporting facility Viewer Panel Part 2 of 2 Field option Conceal Last Shown Fields if Truncated Upon Generation Default to be set Do not display a truncated rightmost field in the viewer if the rightmost field would appear truncated conceal it Zoom Factor n Fit Page Width Fit Whole Page Default Zoom Level when viewing reports Select any one of the following levels m set a fixed percentage zoom m page width fills the screen it might be necessary to scroll the length of the page m full page is displayed in the screen Confirmation defaults The Confirmations panel determines which confirmation requests and warnings should be displayed for various actions Confirmation options are divided into the following sections m Report Confirmations m Template Confirmations m Other Confirmations The process of setting Control M EM confirmations is the same as the process for Control M Desktop For details see Confirmation defaults on page 358 Appendix A 367 Setting options for the Control M Reporting facility 368 Control M User Guide hme Examples for defining jobs This appendix presents the following topics Accessing ihe sample draft iscsi i eeeels eee ee eet ei eed 369 Organizing the company s
15. To modify the alternative server list Check Automatically Control M EM should try to reconnect automatically without user reconnect intervention This is known as Automatic mode The user can monitor and intervene as necessary while the connection is being reestablished Restore xxx viewpoints If clicked Control M EM should open the selected ViewPoints during reconnect Click and select appropriate value m Last active ViewPoint Only the ViewPoint that was last active should be opened m All open ViewPoints All ViewPoints that were open at the time of the disconnect should be opened Max reconnection retries nn Maximum number of reconnection attempts Control M EM should make Default 5 Wait nn seconds between Number of seconds Control M EM should wait between reconnection reconnection attempts attempts Default 5 seconds 364 Control M User Guide Setting options for Control M EM To modify the alternative server list 1 In the Reconnection panel click Select Servers The Alternative Server Selection dialog box is displayed listing the available servers on the left and the servers already selected as alternate servers on the right 2 Select the desired server s and click m Add to designate them as alternate servers m Remove to remove them from the alternate server list a Add New to add a new server to the list of available servers The Add New Server dialog box appears Enter the name of
16. job completion status processed by the server NOTE The Step Codes grid rows can be displayed in Compact or Expanded format To adjust the format do the following 1 Click Tools gt Options 2 In the General section check the Use compact Step Codes grid box to compact the rows in the grid or uncheck to display in expanded format 2 In the displayed On statement fill in the stmt and code values m To make the processing conditional on a particular completion code fill in the fields as follows In the stmt field specify In the code field specify a string in the COMPSTAT operator completioncode format Chapter 4 Defining how jobs should run 115 Defining postprocessing actions that depend on job processing results Valid values for operator are EQ lt LT gt GT not equal to or NE If you specify EQ LT GT or NE you must place a blank before and after the value Valid values for completioncode are either a literal completion code or the value Even or Odd which are satisfied by any even or odd completion codes m To make the processing conditional on a particular completion status fill in the fields as follows In the stmt field specify In the code field specify one of the following completion statuses OK NOTOK JLOST the Do statements are performed if the job s SYSOUT cannot be found due to disappeared jobs m To make the processing conditional on a par
17. m Matches DESCRIPTION values abcd abc888 and abc m The DESCRIPTION that starts with abc matches only DESCRIPTION values abc 999 abc ddd etc ends with The field value ends with the value provided Pattern matching rules apply contains The field value contains the substring exact or pattern provided Pattern matching rules apply doesn t contain The field value does not contain the substring exact or pattern provided Pattern matching rules apply is empty The field has no value NULL or empty string is not empty The field has ANY value lt or lt or gt or gt Used for numeric or lexicographic comparison Table 48 Update Operators Part 1 of 2 Action Description assign Assigns the value as is no functions place holders or regular expressions If the field contains several values a list field such as scheduling Dates field you can add or modify values in the list by providing comma separated values If only one value is specified only the first value in the list field is updated For example to add three scheduling dates to the list use Update Dates assign 0909 0807 0221 182 Control M User Guide Finding and updating jobs and tables Table 48 Update Operators Part 2 of 2 Action assign function Description Table 83 on page 391 describes special functions that you can use
18. Chapter 2 Working with Control M Desktop and Control M EM 65 Tabs in the User and Group Authorizations windows 66 To set authorization levels for quantitative resources Follow the steps described under To add a row to a User Group Authorizations Prerequisite Conditions panel on page 63 Steps relating to the Condition text box or field should be applied to the quantitative Resource text box or field Table 26 Quantitative Resources access levels Browse Viewing the specified quantitative resources only Update Modifying the specified quantitative resources and adding new ones Full Modifying and deleting the specified resources and adding new ones User Authorizations window Global Conditions tab The Global Conditions tab specifies the global conditions a user can access For information about global conditions see Chapter 16 Establishing job dependencies across Control Ms Table 27 Global Conditions tab fields Prefix Prefix for global conditions the user can access Access Level Authorization level for global conditions To set authorization levels for global conditions Follow the steps described under To add a row to a User Group Authorizations Prerequisite Conditions panel on page 63 Steps relating to the Control M text box and field are omitted because global conditions are relevant to all Control M installations Steps relating to the Condition tex
19. Chapter 9 Setting up templates for standardized job and table definition Defining Templates is epad renee eee Need eee dde ets E EE n ener oE Adding functions to template fields eri eee dees ee ee nein yes Managing templates ss scakete sale tarren nren ce aiid cele raa aE Sees eens Chapter 10 Creating and updating many jobs at once TROGUCHOM eisene a pad ocean eeu EE td ee eed wee da ees Creatine large numbers of jobs nanna nna ede eeeenn eee aateee ewe saws Finding and updating many entities at once 6 eee eee Finding and updating jobs and tables pci cadena bed eee re ean es Managing updated jobs s disci eietenceeedece eed abe Lind edad eeenges ews Chapter 11 Setting up definitions for periodic statistics collection POG ON ies cok ences een toes he tee Meee ene eens o A eee Defining periodic statistics definitions 65 2660 scccvecsseeeeseee enews ee es Changing periodic Statistics CENNINONS 54 444 stars eadred eed dad aad a diy at Managing periodic statistics definitions 00 c eee eee eee Chapter 12 Introduction to moving to production Moving to production siss sisis eos bed eee kakaon Ree in RS CARERS eee 8 Chapter 13 Putting jobs into production Writing tables to the Control M EM database 0 cece eee rrun Uploading tables to the Control M database 2 2 0 0 cece cece cece eens Manually scheduling jobs and tables 65 5 2i 060secuedwi sees end e
20. L Control M Server databases regardless of whether a later version of the table exists in the Control M Server database Local Delete Deletes the table from the Control M EM database only Remote Delete Deletes the table from the Control M Server database only Table Content Displays the list of jobs in the selected table in the Table Content dialog box This dialog box is described in Managing tables on page 144 Forecast Provides a scheduling forecast for the selected table if Control M Forecast is installed Unlock Unlocks the selected table to enable modification by a different user 146 Control M User Guide Managing tables Table 38 Command buttons Table Manager Button Description Refresh Refreshes the status of the tables in the window Select All Unselect Selects or unselects all tables displayed in the window All Table 39 lists table management tasks you can perform with the Table Manager Table 39 Table management tasks Task to perform to refresh the Table Manager display How to perform it Click gy to unlock a locked table Select the table and click p You must be authorized Note When you select an unlocked table clicking the modified icon locks the table to display the list of jobs in a table Double click the table name For additional details see To display the list of jobs in a table on page 151
21. Table 6 Filtering the jobs displayed in a Control M Desktop draft Additional display adjustments Part 2 of 2 Adjustment Control M Desktop only to change the hierarchical arrangement of displayed data between application hierarchy and table hierarchy Step In Control M Desktop choose View gt Hierarchy and then choose either the Application Group Table Job hierarchy or the Data Center Table Job hierarchy Note If you change the hierarchy when displaying data in list format the components that are displayed depend on the node you select in the navigation tree In the List format in Control M Desktop only to alternate views between a hierarchy view and a job list view 1 With the List format displayed in Control M Desktop select Job List or Hierarchy List in the selection field in the Control M Desktop toolbar 2 To display different components in the hierarchy list or the job list select appropriate node in the navigation tree Note For an item selected in the tree view the m hierarchy view shows all Control Ms applications groups number of Sub tables and jobs in hierarchical order m job list view shows all related jobs and Sub tables in no hierarchical order Filtering the jobs displayed in a Control M Desktop draft By default all the jobs in the current draft are displayed but Control M Desktop enables you to filter which job are displayed To filter jobs displayed in th
22. To move a job to a different Control M table application or group on page 153 delete jobs from a table In the flow diagram navigation tree list display or Table Content dialog box select the jobs and click Delete For additional details see To delete jobs from a table on page 153 browse a job In the flow diagram navigation tree list display or Table Content dialog box select the jobs and click Browse copy ajob In the Flow Diagram select the source job and choose Edit gt Copy Job A copy of the job with a unique identification number is added to the Flow Diagram Note This feature is only available in your local workspace to display the list of versions of a job Select the job in the list and click ty Show History From the Job History window you can manage the versions of the deleted jobs as follows viewing the job properties comparing versions restoring previous versions of jobs restoring and editing jobs See Exploring versions of definition entities on page 157 for a description of the job history dialog box Control M User Guide Managing jobs in tables To display the list of jobs in a table 1 Display the Table Manager by choosing Tools gt Table Manager in Control M Desktop 2 In the Table Manager double click the table name The Table Content dialog box is displayed with a list of jobs in the selected table SMART Tables may contain
23. For a complete explanation of the Do statement parameters see the Control M Parameter Guide Chapter 4 Defining how jobs should run 117 Defining postprocessing actions that depend on job processing results 118 C Repeat this process to define as many Do actions as needed The relationship between them is AND if the ON criteria are satisfied all the Do actions in that block are performed You can define as many On Do blocks as needed Use the buttons above the areas to add lines delete copy or move On or Do statements Table 34 DO actions Part 1 of 2 Rerun parameter No subparameters Desired Action Parameter To set the job s completion status to OK regardless of the job s completion Do OK status This statement has no subparameters To set the job s completion status to NOTOK regardless of the job s Do NOTOK completion status No subparameters To cause the job to be rerun according to the parameters specified in the Do Rerun To stop the cyclic job from running Do Stop Cyclic To assign a value to an AutoEdit variable You must specify the name of the variable and the value to which the variable should be set Note This parameter is also called Do AutoEdit or similar in various Control M products and the Control M Parameter Guide Valid values can either be a constant value or a resolvable AutoEdit expression Note Do not specify any application specific job parameters which
24. For details see the Control M Utility Guide If a bulk operation for example writing a table with multiple jobs is being performed the user will be prompted to provide a single annotation which will be applied to each item in the entire operation The subject and description information provided by the user is saved with the audit report and can be viewed using the Reporting facility For more information see Generating a report on page 326 Which activities require annotation is defined by the system administrator using the Control M Configuration Manager For details see the Control M Administrator Guide Creating and editing SMART Tables This section contains the following topics Defining general SMART Table information Defining scheduling criteria for a SMART Table Defining dependencies variables and notifications in the SMART Table Defining actions to be performed after all scheduled jobs in the SMART Table have ended Creating and editing Sub tables Modifying dependencies for jobs within a SMART table When creating a SMART Table in addition to defining the basic set of table definition parameters Control M and table name you must define the extended set of table definition parameters that determine how the table will handle its jobs as a unified unit SMART Tables can also contain nested Sub tables These Sub tables inherit scheduling criteria from their parent tables The highest SMART Table in a nested hi
25. Handling emergency situations 382 NOTE t AAA This condition could have alternatively been defined as Out prerequisite conditions in the Conditions tab Implementing the purpose of the AllUsersLogOut job The purpose of the AllUsersLogOut job is to notify all users to log out and go home It does this by shouting a very urgent notification message to this effect to all users This shout action is defined in the job s PostProc tab Initiating the shut down of all systems The ShutDownAllSystems batch job runs a program that through the setting of an Out prerequisite condition enables another set of jobs to shut down Control M EM components ShutDownAllSystems can only run after its predecessor jobs have ended successfully Defining the job type and other general information about the job The General tab defines the following m The Tasktype is Job m The File Name and Path fields identify the file name and location of the batch job These are required fields for the Job tasktype Because of the potential for harm from this job if inappropriately run the CIO is defined as the Author Only the person named in the Author field can automate this job by having the New Day Procedure run it Defining the job scheduling This jobs is not scheduled Rather it is manually forced if needed Therefore it has no parameters defined in the Scheduling tab Ensuring that the job is treated with the highest priority Becaus
26. In the Sysout Handling field select Release 2 In the displayed Printer Name field specify EWH14 Archiving sysdata z OS only You can archive the job s SYSDATA to a common data set If you do you can optionally specify how many days and for how many job runs to retain the archived SYSDATA To archive the job s sysdata to a common data set 1 In the Archiving area of the PostProc tab click in the SYS DB 2 Optionally specify one or both of the following types of retention criteria number of days 00 99 to retain archived SYSDATA number of job runs 000 999 for which to retain the SYSDATA EXAMPLE Archive the SYSDATA and retain it for 30 days In the PostProc tab do the following 1 Click SYS DB 2 Specify 30 in the Max Days to retain archived SYSdata field Annotating activities When a user performs any action that affects the Control M Enterprise Manager Enterprise Manager environment the Audit Annotation prompt window is displayed prior to saving or completing the action The user must enter a purpose for performing this action in the Subject field and a justification or descriptive note in the Description field Recent activities and descriptions can be selected using the drop down menus in these fields 126 Control M User Guide Creating and editing SMART Tables When using the Command Line Interface utility or the XML utility annotation details can be provided by special command line flags
27. Select the job in the list and click Edit amp Restore The job editing form opens so that you can edit the previous version and replace the current version with the edited version to refresh the job versions list Click es to export the list of job versions Right click in the list area and click Export to File The list is saved as a csv file to print the list of job versions Right click in the list area and click Print to display the number of job versions in the list Right click in the list area and select Item Count The number of job versions in the list is displayed in the status area below the horizontal scroll bar Chapter 7 Exploring and tracking versions of definition entities 161 Viewing a job s history 162 Control M User Guide me Using predefined calendars to schedule jobs This section presents the following topics Creating and modifying calendats i s avexcesurereeee been eurebed vebwbedees 165 To define Regular and Relative calendars 0 0 00 cece eee eee 165 To define Periodic calendars 0 ccc eee n eens 166 To define Rule Based calendars 0 0 0c cece cee nen eens 167 Managing calendars 10423 scxuses gene teee ese ieee eee eee ere eee eee REE BEERS 168 Uploading and downloading calendars nnna annaa den esedeeracices 168 Copying Calendars sc2vecincte iat Ci oe ie tend Pex Keone ter eee Coan b eee es 169 Deleting calendar
28. Starting the Control M Reporting Facility Starting the Control M Reporting Facility Though you can generate reports in batch it is much more common to work online in the Control M Reporting Facility window To start the Control M Reporting Facility 1 Do one of the following m From Control M Desktop or Control M EM GUL select Tools gt Control M Reporting Facility and go to step 2 m From the Start menu navigate to BMC Control M gt Control M Enterprise Manager gt Control M Reporting Facility 2 Enter your user name and password and click Login The Control M Reporting facility window opens displaying the Reporting Facility Start Page See Figure 18 on page 326 TIP In the left pane of the Reporting Facility Start Page you can filter the reports which are listed by the following criteria Favorite report types Recently used report types All defined report types Filter by reports category type Chapter 27 Defining and generating reports 325 Generating a report Figure 18 Reporting Facility Start Page window Scie ssa Pade pene reniri ra ao mm ra Moia i 2s ihe Df eee eed ee ii rm fs aye Lara Ga B ese cbc i gente entered Tee ie Se Be ose eear eeaceceeacea oa f hh amp amp HE The Reporting Facility automatically connects to the same database that the Control M EM server is using and to different Control M EM installations However if there are connectivity
29. The information provided in this part of the book deals with the task of analyzing and optimizing the system Where to go from here Several tools are available to help you analyze your production environment m To generate reports about various aspects of the production environment see Chapter 27 Defining and generating reports a To archive each day s processing events and then review them as needed see Chapter 28 Viewing and playing back archived data m To determine the likely impact of potential changes to the system for example adding or deleting applications or resources see Chapter 19 Planning production with Control M Forecast Chapter 26 Introduction to analyzing and optimizing production 317 Analyzing and optimizing the system 318 Control M User Guide cme J Defining and generating reports This chapter presents the following topics TithOMUCHOR riesi 34 338 4 hee ed Se eh E EEN Sek EEE Pe LG bbe Snes ees 319 Available report ty pes biseri rele eaet elven EEn E EEEa ue eer kere 320 Active report types eiser coe sea e aE aA RAEE beg E O eeetan ds 320 Definition report types sce i scksdw Pedi Peesdes keeles Ven pede rence es 321 Gener l report types sse sisii nimiset eevee iE AA ia EAI AE E 322 BMC Batch Impact Manager report types occas isc k eden r arrn rrr 323 Control M Forecast report types n uasna sansun s nren srann rreren 323 Starting the Control M Reporting Facility
30. To view the job list for a resource 1 If the Control Resources window is not displayed choose Tools gt Control Resources in the Control M EM GUL and set the filtering criteria in the Control Resources window see To allocate or release a control resource for details 2 In the Control Resources window select the resource and click View Jobs which displays the View Jobs dialog box 3 To edit a job or SMART Table in the list optional double click the job which displays the job editing form or table editing form for the selected item NOTE If you do not have authorization to view job details the job or table editing form is not displayed only the RBA value is displayed Defining quantitative resources You create delete and view quantitative resources in your production environment by using the Quantitative Resources window NOTE You can filter resources on startup before they are loaded from the database This is recommended when working with a large amount of resources For more information on filtering resources on startup see Filtering resources on startup on page 207 Chapter15 Identifying data center resources available for Control M use 209 Defining quantitative resources To create or delete a quantitative resource 1 In the Control M EM GUI choose Tools gt Quantitative Resources which displays the Quantitative Resources window 2 In the Quantitative Resources window do the f
31. amp Restore The job or table editing form opens so that you can edit and restore its version to export the list of definition entities Right click in the list area and click Export to File The list is saved as a csv file to print the list of definition entities Right click in the list area and click Print to display the number of definition entities in the list Right click in the list area and select Item Count The number of definition entities in the list is displayed in the status area below the horizontal scroll bar to compare currently monitored version of a definition entity with its current active version Select a definition entity and click Compare to current The Versions Comparisons dialog box is displayed side by side Chapter 7 Exploring and tracking versions of definition entities 159 Viewing a job s history Viewing a job s history 160 The Job History dialog box enables you to view previous versions of the selected job that were written to saved in the Definition file in the Control M EM database Table 45 lists common job version management tasks To display the list of versions of a job 1 Select a job in Control M Desktop 2 Choose Actions gt Show History The Job History dialog box opens The tasks that can be performed with Job History dialog box are described in Table 45 Table 45 Job version management tasks Part 1 of 2 Task to perform How t
32. conditions if deleted By default when you delete a job from the flow diagram you effectively sever the connection between the deleted job s predecessor and successor jobs because the In condition required by the successor job is no longer created by the deleted job However by checking this option you can ensure that Control M Desktop maintains the connection In this case Control M Desktop automatically m removes the dependency between the deleted job and its successor by removing the Out condition of the deleted job and the In condition of the successor job that created the dependency m creates a dependency between the predecessor and successor jobs of the deleted job by adding as an In condition in the successor the Out condition of the predecessor This option works only when you are working in a Local workspace and only if you delete one job at a time If you delete multiple jobs in a single delete action the connection is lost regardless of the setting Appendix A 355 Setting options for Control M Desktop Flowdiagram Colors panel Table 72 Flow diagram color settings Flowdiagram Colors panel Field option Default to be set background Background color settings are found in the General Workspace panel Group Application Color for all level nodes in the hierarchy Connector Color for In Out condition triangles Frames Color for frames of nodes in Flow
33. initial capitals distinguish the second and subsequent words serverHostName Brackets indicate a group of optional items tableName columnName field Do not type the brackets when you enter the option A comma means that you can choose full incremental level one or more of the listed options You must Unix use a comma to separate the options if you choose more than one option Braces indicate that at least one of the DBDName tableName enclosed items is required Do not type the braces when you enter the item UNLOAD device disk tape fileName deviceName a c Unix 18 Control M User Guide A vertical bar means that you can choose only one of the listed items In the example you would choose either commit or cancel Syntax statements commit cancel commit cancel Unix An ellipsis indicates that you can repeat the previous item or items as many times as necessary columnName 19 Syntax statements 20 Control M User Guide Getting started This part presents the following topics Chapter 2 Working with Control M Desktop and Control M EM Part 1 21 22 Control M User Guide me 1 Introduction to Control M Enterprise Manager This chapter presents the following topic Automating your production jobs with Control M EM 00 0008 23 Automating your production jobs with Control M EM With Control M Enterprise
34. intervals until the maximum number of allowed retries has been attempted If a connection still cannot be established Control M EM displays a message notifying you that it is about to shut down Manually intervening in the reconnection process When the Control M Enterprise Manager GUI Reconnect dialog box is displayed you can m stop the reconnection process for example if you are terminating Control M EM by clicking Stop m close the dialog box and terminate Control M EM by clicking Exit Application m display more reconnection process details and options by clicking Advanced In the advanced display that is if you clicked Advanced to redefine the customization options first click Stop then click Settings This displays the appropriate Options panel for redefining the settings NOTE This information is intended for the typical Control M EM user If more complicated communication issues arise contact your Control M EM administrator Communicating with Control M Servers 230 Control M Enterprise Manager Control M EM depends on a constant flow of information from Control M Servers to present you with an up to date picture of the status of jobs Operator requests and global conditions are transmitted back and forth between Control M EM and the Control M server The Communication Status dialog box displays the status of communication between each Control M Server and the Control M EM workstation Control M Us
35. lt Parameter na lt Parameter na lt Parameters gt lt ReportDefinition gt lt ReportDefinitions gt emreportcli dtd gt eName alerts3 gt DF filepath D MyAlerts3 pdf gt e MY_PARAM value job gt e Application value a gt Chapter 27 Defining and generating reports 339 Input arguments file 340 With the input arguments file in the above example the emreportcli generates a PDF report based on the alerts3 report template and saves it in the D folder with the filename called MyAlerts3 pdf If the report template filter is defined as shown in Figure 19 the output of the report will contain all alerts with a m Control M name of ctm640 or that starts with mvs m Job Name that starts with job m Application name that starts with a Figure 19 Report template filter definition ek here Operater amn Wales Pacer Mere Fit COMTRIL Hare LEE amiin B ai hare LEE R ur Funaw 5 ipsa BE ff ipin a si B The last two field filter values are set dynamically from the XML arguments file To use the emreportcli report generation utility 1 Open a command prompt window 2 Enter the following command and press Enter emreportcli U emUser P emPass pf passwordFilename s emServer arg xmlArgumentsFile The xmlArgumentsFile is the full path name of the input arguments file NOTE You can specify the user name and password on the command line in a password file
36. plus 1 2 To rename the SYSOUT in the PostProc tab do the following A In the Sysout Handling field select Copy B In the displayed File Name field specify JOBNAME SYSOUT counter Defining postprocessing actions that depend on job processing results To define postprocessing actions that are conditional upon the job processing results you use the Steps tab to define On statements and accompanying Do statements 114 Control M User Guide Defining postprocessing actions that depend on job processing results m On statements identify the job processing results that will determine if the accompanying conditional Do actions are to be performed Do statements identify the actions to perform when the On statement criteria are satisfied NOT E _ You fill in On statements differently for z OS jobs than for other jobs For details on filling in On statements for z OS jobs see Defining conditional processing under z OS on page 121 To define conditional postprocessing actions 1 In the Steps panel of the job editing form click the arrow below the On Do heading and select On Before performing the next step note the following points a To fill in On criteria you supply two values statement code m You can define On criteria that depend on values returned from any of the following job SYSOUT processed by the agent job completion code processed by the server
37. the Group Tree Click the toggle button g or choose View gt Group Tree jump to the display for a particular group in the Report pane Click its name in the Group tree navigate through report pages Click the First H Back 4 Next and Last LI navigation buttons as needed go to a specific report page Choose Edit gt Go To perform a text search Choose Edit gt Find export the report Choose File gt Export Alternatively you can use the emreportcli utility For details see Generating and exporting reports in batch on page 336 Note Exported reports are saved locally and can later be imported into other reporting applications or data manipulation tools save your current report definition in a report template Choose File gt Save As Template Chapter 27 Defining and generating reports 327 Defining templates and Ad Hoc reports Defining templates and Ad Hoc reports 328 You define templates and ad hoc reports using the Report Wizard The Control M Reporting facility supplies a fixed pre defined set of report types for example Alerts and Audit reports and each template or report that you define must be of one of these pre defined types When defining templates and reports consider the following m If you expect to run the report only once you can create the report definition without defining a template This is called an Ad H
38. whose combined criteria determine which jobs will be selected and loaded into memory how the jobs will be filtered and the hierarchy that will be used to display those jobs ViewPoints consist of the following subcomponents Collection selects which jobs are loaded from the active environment into memory based on parameter values in the job processing definition Reducing the number of jobs loaded to memory decreases system overhead and clutter Global Filter determines which loaded jobs are displayed in the ViewPoint Filtering can be very useful for managing by exception For example you can filter to display only those jobs that ended Not OK and jobs in a Wait status Though they do not reduce system overhead filters do reduce screen clutter Chapter 20 Selecting jobs to monitor 237 Selecting a ViewPoint enabling you to focus on jobs that really require monitoring Each ViewPoint has an associated Global filter but while a ViewPoint is displayed you can select a different Global filter to alter which jobs are displayed in the current ViewPoints session Once defined Global filters are available site wide Hierarchy definition defines the hierarchical structure used to display jobs Control M EM comes with a set of predefined ViewPoints but you can define your own ViewPoints a Dynamic filters a Dynamic filter can be used to further filter which loaded jobs get displayed in the ViewPoint Like Global
39. 1 Choose File gt Load jobs from Control M EM 2 In the Load Jobs dialog box select the tables and jobs and click Load Confirm the load if necessary When loading a nested Sub table all associated parent tables will be loaded as well 3 When the list of loaded job is displayed close it Navigating in the flow diagram You can select multiple nodes but only one of them can be your current focused node You can navigate among the multiple selected nodes to make a different one your focused node To navigate to and display a node in the flow diagram Click the corresponding node in the navigation tree or net overview To navigate to a predecessor or successor node 1 In the flow diagram or navigation tree display the pop up menu for the node and select Branch Menus Then select Predecessor or Successor 2 In the submenu select the target node job group or condition which is then selected and displayed as the current node To find jobs in the flow diagram that conform to specific criteria 1 In Control M Desktop or Control M EM select Edit gt Find Jobs 2 In the Find Jobs dialog box fill in the criteria you can specify pattern matching strings in certain fields An AND relationship applies to multiple criteria a job must satisfy all specified criteria to match 3 To save the specified Find criteria for future use choose Presets gt Save and assign a name in the Save Preset dialog box and click OK C
40. 2 Enter the Sub table s general definitions in the General tab Notice the Parent Table field in the Hierarchy section of the general tab This is the name of the SMART Table and any Sub tables in the Sub table s hierarchy 134 Control M User Guide Creating and editing jobs in a SMART Table 3 In the RBCs area in the Scheduling tab click on the Select Rule Based Calendar button to open the Select Rule Based Calendar window The listed of RBCs are defined for the parent table and can be inherited by the Sub table Select from the following options All Parent this option associates all RBCs from the direct SMART Table parent to the Sub table Specific this option allows you to select from the list of all the RBCs defined in the Sub table s direct SMART Table parent A Sub table can only select from RBCs which are defined in its direct parent table A Sub table cannot define RBCs of its own By default a Sub table is associated with all of its parent table s RBCs In case a Sub table is not associated with RBCs the Sub table will not be ordered and users must force its submission TIP For Control M Forecast users only By using the Table Forecast button you can graphically display the plan for the Sub table according to the RBCs selected The scheduling plan for the jobs in the table are not displayed 4 Fill in the Sub table s parameters as you would for a job Keep in mind that the Sub table will apply these
41. 252 privilege authorizations 47 Privileges panel Authorizations window 59 superseded authorizations 47 problems See troubleshooting product support 3 Q quantitative resources See also resources defining 209 overview of 205 Quantitative Resources panel Authorizations window 65 R recognizing job dependencies 34 Regular calendars 164 related documentation 17 Relative calendars 164 releasing control resources 207 remove user from a group Member Of panel action 53 reports batch 336 BMC Batch Impact Manager 323 changing Reporting facility password 347 creating one time 329 CTMRPLN calendar utility 164 generating 326 Job Action Report 270 Jobs Execution 324 overview of 319 starting Reporting facility 325 templates for 328 Trend Analysis 324 types of 320 Workload 323 repositioning panes 35 rescheduling jobs manually 272 Resource field Control Resources panel 65 Quantitative Resources panel 65 resources allocating job 110 defining quantitative 209 defining requirements for 205 listing jobs and tables that use 209 security 63 65 Rule Based calendars 164 rules authorization 46 S scheduling groups creating and editing 133 scheduling jobs defining criteria for 88 manually 198 405 ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ manually rescheduling 272 using calendars 163 with New Day procedure 203 scheduling needs predicting See forecasts script editing a job s 266 viewing a job s 257 security authorizati
42. 26 To edit a service rule 1 From the Tools menu select Service Definition Manager The Service Definition Manager window appears 2 Select the service rule that you want to edit and click The Service Rule wizard appears 3 Edit the required fields in the General Selection Grouping and Properties windows as described in Creating a service rule on page 304 4 From the Properties window click Finish Chapter 24 Control M Self Service management 307 Copying a service rule Copying a service rule This procedure describes how to copy a service rule in the Service Definition Manager so you can use it as a template Before You Begin Successful completion of Starting Control M Desktop on page 26 To copy a service rule 1 From the Tools menu select Service Definition Manager The Service Definition Manager window appears 2 Select the service rule that you want to copy and click The Service Rule wizard appears 3 In the Name field type a new name for this service rule 4 Click Next and update the required fields in the Selection Grouping and Properties windows as described in Creating a service rule on page 304 5 From the Properties window click Finish Deleting a service rule 308 This procedure describes how to delete a service rule from the Service Definition Manager Before You Begin Successful completion of Starting Control M Desktop on page 26 To delete a service rule
43. 3 Execution Z Conations ss set lt i shouts Postsrec es bac Days tan hon Tue Wied Tru Fa Sal Sht dey of the vesk Resa Calendar g Jan Feb Me Ag Mey dhn Jul Aug Sep Dot Nor Deo _ a iene coca dat figures by 0 fdqe 9 ote ee a Ee he Mamet 0 Retre Eg F grd Calendar Forecast Diera tame for Friar fF o The procedures for defining Table level RBCs and selecting Control M level RBCs are similar whether the RBCs are being associated with a template job or SMART Table Control M level RBCs are only supported by Control M Servers version 7 0 00 or later To define Table level RBCs in a SMART Table 1 In the left side of the Scheduling tab click on the Create local Rule Based Calendar button and type a name in the high lighted row in the RBC name list The name can later be used to identify the set of scheduling criteria 2 Fill in the scheduling criteria as you would for any job as described in Defining scheduling criteria for a job basics on page 88 Control M User Guide Defining scheduling criteria for a SMART Table 3 To define additional RBCs repeat the above process NOTE m For z OS groups only uppercase letters are allowed in RBC names m RBC names for groups on non z OS platforms are case sensitive To select Control M level RBCs in a SMART Table 1 In the left side of the Scheduling tab click on the Select Rule
44. Access Level column and select the access level from the drop down menu Control M EM components and privileges This section describes the effects of the definitions applied to the various rows of the Privileges tab Table 18 Privileges and features Part 1 of 2 Control M EM privilege Control M Configuration Manager Feature Logon Description The ability to log on to the CCM Configuration The ability to m create update delete and get Control M EM components m enable disable update and manage Control M Server requests m create update delete and get Control M EM system parameters m view agent logs and get components m use CTL ona Control M EM component m perform administrative tasks for Control M Agents m get and set Control M debug level Operation The ability to manage components including m Start and stop Control M EM components m Recycle Control M EM components m Set ignore request levels Database The ability to m remove old requests m check the amount of space in the database m enlarge the database Control M Server Security The ability to create update view and delete user and group Control M security records Control M EM Security Authorizations The ability to access the Authorizations window in Control M EM GUI and Control M EM Desktop 60 Control M User Guide Tabs in the User and Group Authorizations windows Table 18 P
45. Alerts window Audit report lists the results of auditing Control M EM server for operations of a selected audit type For example changes in job and calendar definitions can be tracked Users Authorization report enables you to generate a report that lists the security definitions of a specific user or group When you generate a report for a specific user it lists the groups that user belongs to The report lists security definitions for each user and group for the following items Job actions Service actions Service definitions Privileges Displayed Jobs and Tables Job owners Scheduling Tables Calendars Global conditions Prerequisite conditions Control resources Quantitative rerouces Workload Distribution report for each day for each Control M Server the report lists and includes the following counts from the day s data total number of jobs their breakdown by task type node ID and application type and the number of executions The current day s figures are not included in the report Extreme Peak Usage report for a user specified period the report provides according to the user request one of the following sets of figures highest number of tasks and executions that occurred on a single day on a single Control M Server during that period and their breakdown by task type node ID and application type lowest number of tasks and executio
46. All Reports to display all report types in the right pane Then in the right pane select the report type Enter a name for the report template that you are creating and click OK Chapter 27 Defining and generating reports 329 Creating templates using the Report Wizard Creating The first panel of the Report Wizard the General panel is displayed 4 Fill in or modify the fields of the Report Wizard panels 5 Most fields on most panels are self explanatory For information on using the Report Wizard see Creating templates using the Report Wizard on page 330 templates using the Report Wizard The following section describes the panels of the Report Wizard and how to use the wizard to create a template To begin creating a template or Ad Hoc report see To create a report template on page 329 or To create an Ad hoc report on page 329 Topics in this section include General panel on page 330 Data Source panel on page 331 Filter panel on page 331 Fields panel on page 333 Summaries panel on page 334 Sorting panel on page 334 E E E E m Grouping panel on page 333 E E m Style panel on page 334 E Report Details panel on page 335 Several Report Wizard panels contain unique fields for certain reports The following sections describe these fields m Data Source panel for the Active Links report on page 335 m Filter panel for the Links
47. Based Calendar button The Select RBC window opens 2 In the Select RBC window select one of the following options m All Parent All RBCs of the direct parent are associated with the SMART Table Default m Specific Only the RBCs selected from the list are associated to the job or table 3 Click OK TIP For Control M Forecast users only Using the Calendars Forecast and Table Forecast buttons you can graphically display when and how often jobs in the SMART Table will be scheduled for submission based on the defined RBCs criteria EXAMPLE 2 In the SMART Table create RBCs that will enable some jobs to be scheduled on workdays others on the first day of each month and others on the first day of the new quarter In the Scheduling tab of the SMART Table editing form do the following 1 Click on the Create local Rule Based Calendar button and type Daily in the high lighted row in the RBC name list 2 In the Month Days area select All click And as the connector and in the Week Days area click Mon Tue Wed Thu and Fri in the Months area click All 3 Click on Create local Rule Based Calendar and enter Monthly 4 In the Month Days area click 1 in the Months area click AIl 5 Click on Create local Rule Based Calendar and enter Quarterly 6 In the Month Days area click 1 in the Months area click Jan Apr Jul and Oct Chapter 4 Defining how jobs should run 131 Defining dependencies variables and notific
48. Cewek e Pew Pecen vee bew od 87 Defining scheduling criteria for a joD basics is554 bosses ese teresa se 88 Defining scheduling criteria using calendars 0 000 e cece eee 94 Defining complex scheduling criteria using rules 000000 eee 95 Limiting scheduling to a particular date range 0 99 Defining cyclic Jobs seinere eine t bate wn e a eer Mee ew pee E Re ead a 101 Defining automatic rerun for a job that ends NOT OK 0 102 Defining jobs that should run on specific nodes 0 0 00 c eee eee 103 Defining jobs that should run on nodes where load balancing has been implemented isc ties cen tceveeise wate eteeed eeu EENE eee EEEE PENE neds 104 Defining a time frame during which jobs can be submitted 104 Defining that manual confirmation is required before job submission 106 Assigning priorities to jobs and defining and critical jobs 106 Defining how many days a job can await submission 0000 108 Defining dependencies for the current job 0 c cece eee eee 108 Allocating resources for a JOO cic opi oeh nese G had nrun aeann 110 Defining and using variables that are dynamically resolved at runtime 112 Defining postprocessing actions that depend on job processing results 114 Defining conditional processing under Z OS 0 eee eee eee 121 Defining messages to be shouted at the end of job pro
49. Click OK The service definition is created and added to the Service Definition Manager Editing a service definition This procedure describes how to edit a service definition Before You Begin Successful completion of Starting Control M Desktop on page 26 Chapter 24 Control M Self Service management 301 Copying a service definition To edit a service definition 1 From the Tools menu select Service Definition Manager The Service Definition Manager window appears 2 Select the service definition that you want to edit and click The Service Definition dialog box appears 3 Edit the required fields in the General tab Filter tab and or the Orderable Parameters tab as described in Creating a service definition on page 299 4 Click OK Copying a service definition 302 This procedure describes how to copy a service definition in the Service Definition Manager so you can use it as a template Before You Begin Successful completion of Starting Control M Desktop on page 26 To copy a service definition 1 From the Tools menu select Service Definition Manager The Service Definition Manager window appears 2 Select the service definition that you want to copy and click The Service Definition dialog box appears 3 In the Name field type a new name for this service You can also update other fields as described in Creating a service definition on page 299 4 Click OK Control M Use
50. Control M EM 31 Understanding the flow diagram Table 2 Additional icons in Control M EM only EF Ji Symbol Information Job is executing Symbol Information a Job is held lt Job ended OK Job is waiting for a condition os resource or other execution requirement to be satisfied Job ended NOT OK 9 Job is waiting for a manual ame confirmation Deleted job p Job state changed to unknown NOTE pai Free Late and On Request jobs do not show a visible change in the node appearance Nodes for Started Tasks and Emergency jobs are relevant for z OS jobs only For more information about these job types see the Control M for z OS User Manual Understanding Control M EM job node colors Table 3 indicates the meaning of default colors that are used in the title bar in job nodes in Control M EM Table 3 Job status indicated color Part 1 of 2 Color Status Meaning Gray Wait Condition m Job is waiting for the specified date time or In prerequisite condition m Note Jobs with this status might have any of the following statuses in Control M Server CYCLIC WAITTIME WAIT_ODAT POST_ODAT Green Ended OK Job processing finished successfully Yellow Executing Job is executing Blue Wait Resource Job is waiting for Control or Quantitative resources Blue Wait Nodes Job is waiting for nodes resources to become available
51. Control M EM Flowdiagram Nodes panel are the same as for the same panel in Control M Desktop For details see Table 70 on page 354 Flowdiagram Links panel Except for the options described below the options of the Control M EM Flowdiagram Links panel are found in the corresponding panel in Control M Desktop For details see Table 71 on page 354 Field option Display links behind nodes Default to be set When selected displays the connecting lines that represent the conditional links between jobs behind the job nodes Show links between jobs When selected displays job dependencies as lines between jobs in the flow diagram These dependencies are determined by IN and OUT conditions defined in job processing definitions 362 Control M User Guide Setting options for Control M EM Flowdiagram Colors panel Except for the options described below the options of the Control M EM Flowdiagram Colors panel are found in the corresponding panel in Control M Desktop For details see Table 72 on page 356 Field option Default to be set Sets Color for all level nodes in the hierarchy Archived Background Background color for archived ViewPoints Alerts defaults The Alerts panel contains several default communication settings for the Global Alerts Server GAS Table 77 Alerts panel Field option Default to be set Click Automatically Control M EM should automatically connect to the selected Glob
52. Control M User Guide mum 7 9 Viewing and playing back archived data This chapter presents the following topics Selecting and displaying archived ViewPoints 0 000 000 cc eee eeeee 342 Playing back archived Cventer aii cl crel eee ee eh es oh a ela 343 The Active Net consists of the data conditions and resources of jobs that occur in the Active Jobs file of a data center during the current day NOTE uu In this context the term day refers to the period between runs of the New Day procedure on a Control M Server Each run begins a new day At the beginning of each day Control M EM automatically archives the previous day s Active Net from each data center These Archived Nets include the recording of job changes which can be played back much like a video recording The Archived ViewPoints and Playback features enable you to review the information stored in Archived Nets as follows m Archived ViewPoint provides a static display of the jobs at the end of a day a Playback provides a simulation much like a recording of production environment events the jobs that ran and their status changes during a day This information can help you review track and analyze problems of previous days For example the system manager might use these features every morning to review the previous night s events Users must have authorization to use these features Chapter 28 Viewing and playing
53. Day procedure or a User Daily job 1 Display the Table Manager window by choosing Tools gt Table Manager in Control M Desktop To filter the list of tables use the fields at the top of the Table Manager 2 In the Table Manager select the table and click Table Details 3 Edit the User daily field as follows you must have authorization m If the table should be ordered by a specific User Daily job specify the name of the job 1 10 characters case sensitive m If the table should be ordered by the New Day procedure specify the value SYSTEM uppercase only 4 Click Save or Save amp Close save the changes in the Control M EM database 5 To upload the changes to the Control M select the table in the Table Manager and click jf Upload WARNING If you modify a table associated in Control M with more than one User daily and then upload it to Control M the table is removed from all User Dailies except the one it is associated with it in Control M EM Control M User Guide Identifying data center resources available for Control M use This chapter presents the following topics MOG MEGON psou ornae poepie ebro ues ba eek ee ee ka Chae bak pE REES P 205 Filtering resources on startup aida oye coe ae ena tet eed eke eas 207 Allocating control TESOULCES nis 12k sees aie eee deven se dierw pedi eveetaes eows 207 Viewing the list of jobs and tables that use a control resource 209 Defining quantitati
54. Definition report on page 335 m Filter panel for the Audit report on page 336 General panel The General panel is used for defining general information about the report To fill in the General panel Specify a report title author and a general description When filling in the description press Ctrl Enter to move to the next line in the description area Both the title and general description will appear at the beginning of the report 330 Control M User Guide Creating templates using the Report Wizard Data Source panel The Data Source panel is used for defining from where which Control Ms the report data is taken This panel is only displayed for Active report types NOTE The Data Source panel for the Active Links report has special features For details see Data Source panel for the Active Links report To fill in the Data Source panel 1 From the source list of Control Ms on the left select the name of the source Control M and click the right arrow to move it to the target list Repeat as needed You can remove a Control M from the target list by selecting it and clicking the left arrow 2 To adda mask A Select the Control M in the target list and click Add Mask The Add Mask dialog box is displayed B Specify the Control M name mask using and wildcards 3 Repeat Steps 1 and 2 for each Control M to be added as a data source 4 Select from which network the report data will be loaded m Cu
55. Diagram view and in Net Overview Condition Nodes Color for condition nodes Dependency Color for links unselected Selected link Color for a link that has been selected Focused Node Color of the currently focused node Node Title Color for the node title First Field Color for the first field displayed in the node Second Field Color for the second field displayed in the node Diagnostic defaults The Diagnostics panel helps troubleshoot technical problems with Control M Desktop by printing diagnostics at the selected severity levels into a log file The log file should then be sent to BMC Software Customer Support NOTE Use this panel only when instructed by BMC Software Customer Support Your technical ES support representative will notify you which fields to change NOTE SSeS gael The changes to the settings take effect immediately except for changes made to the Cyclic Log File field s Changes to Cyclic Log File field settings take affect the next time the specified Control M Desktop application files are run Table 73 Diagnostic settings Diagnostic panel Part 1 of 2 Field option Default to be set Log File Name Full name and path of the log file to which diagnostics should be printed For display purposes only Enable Diag Print diagnostics to a log file Default Selected 356 Control M User Guide Setting options for Control M Desktop Table 73 Diagnostic settings Diagnostic panel P
56. General panel of the Options dialog box and each definition is stored in its own file Only users with access to the computer on which a filter is saved can access and use that filter Chapter 20 Selecting jobs to monitor 241 Defining global filters Defining global filters A global filter is a filter definition accessible by all users that determines which jobs are displayed in the ViewPoint To define a global filter 1 In Control M Enterprise Manager choose Tools gt ViewPoint Manager 2 Perform one of the following actions m To edit an existing global filter definition select the filter name under the Filters node and click Edit To create anew global filter definition select the Filters node and click New Then in the Filter dialog box enter a name for the filter and click OK Filter names are not case sensitive The Filter Definition dialog box is displayed Figure 14 Filter Definition dialog box een Indude in Fiter Deleted Fake Job Status Wat Use Deketed Fakse Job Status Wiat Coredition To generate sa ror press the TAB bey on thes Yabu of the lest nea mma 3 In the Filter Definition dialog box do the following 242 Control M User Guide Defining ViewPoints A Optionally define a description for the filter B Define the filtering criteria To add a set of criteria select or specify a field name relational operator and a value for example CTM Name ctmp1
57. M Server It is then ordered if its scheduling criteria are satisfied or forced into the active environment The table s status is set to Executing When a job that is associated with a SMART or Sub table is forced into an existing table or Sub table that has already completed the status of all parent tables is set to Executing if possible If it is not possible due to scheduling criteria the job will remain in WAIT_SCHEDULING status For more information see Manually rescheduling jobs in the active environment on page 272 Downloading tables from Control M to Control M EM 200 It is usually not necessary to download tables from Control M to Control M EM because a table in Control M is not normally more current than the same table in Control M EM Nevertheless there might be instances when you want to perform a download For example if someone incorrectly modified the table and wrote the changes to Control M EM you might want to overwrite the incorrect Control M EM version with the version from Control M Control M User Guide Downloading tables from Control M to Control M EM To download tables from Control M to Control M EM Download the table from one of the following locations m In the Control M Desktop window do the following 1 If the Control M hierarchy is not displayed choose View gt Hierarchy gt Data Center Table Job 2 In the flow diagram or navigation tree right click the table icon and in the pop up
58. M EM continues to record all messages that are issued m Clear erases all messages displayed in the Action Report window leaving the window open Manually indicating satisfied conditions 270 Most commonly prerequisite conditions are used to create job dependencies that is a predecessor job creates a prerequisite condition upon completion that is required for a successor job to be submitted But not all prerequisite conditions are added by jobs When Control M must know the status of something outside its control you can add a manual condition to notify Control M of the status For example a backup job might require that a tape be physically loaded on a tape drive before the job can be submitted To handle this you can define in the job processing definition an In prerequisite condition such as Tape Loaded that is not added by another job but rather manually by the operator after physically loading the tape drive You can manually add and delete prerequisite conditions using the Prerequisite Conditions window Control M User Guide Manually indicating satisfied conditions You create delete and view prerequisite conditions in your production environment using the Prerequisite Conditions window NOTE You can filter conditions on startup before they are loaded from the database This is recommended when working with a large amount of conditions For more information on filtering conditions on startup
59. M EM refreshes the display every two minutes but you can manually refresh the display at any time You can also filter the display However you cannot update the data An updatable version called the Communication Administration dialog box is available in the Control M Configuration Manager facility For details see the Control M Administrator Guide 232 Control M User Guide cme 1 9 Planning production with Control M Forecast This chapter presents the following topics Introduction to Control M Forecast 0 0 0 cunun eeaeee eea 233 Control Forecast integration 213 2 c2lvevescieia cee dis sei eee 234 Introduction to Control M Forecast Control M Forecast adds forecasting capabilities to the Control M suite letting you estimate your scheduling environment behavior with respect to specific dates in the future Both graphic and tabular representations of the forecast provide the future dates on which a given job or a table is predicted to be submitted In addition Control M Forecast generates an estimate of the full production flow for a given future date as an enterprise wide view Control M Forecast is provided as an add on to a pre installed Control M Enterprise Manager implementation The product is integrated as options to the Control M EM GUI maintaining the same look and feel Control M Forecast bases its projections on the data center s new day procedures and user dailies Control M Forecast analyzes tables u
60. Manager you can automate the scheduling and processing of your production jobs Its main GUIs are Control M Desktop and the Control M Enterprise Manager window simply called Control M EM To automate your production environment perform the following tasks Model your production job flow by using job processing definitions Job processing definitions provide Control M with the instructions for scheduling submitting and performing post processing tasks of the jobs in your production environment This book describes how to use Control M Desktop to create job processing definitions and other needed entities a Automate job ordering After job processing definitions have been defined for your production jobs you perform several tasks to transition your definitions to production As part of this transition you can use a feature called New Day processing to automate the ordering of jobs each day Chapter 1 Introduction to Control M Enterprise Manager 23 Automating your production jobs with Control M EM 24 Monitor and where necessary intervene in the processing of your production jobs To ensure that everything is running smoothly you can monitor job processing and if problems arise you can intervene effectively Generally monitoring by exception that is checking problems or potential problems rather than viewing the entire system is the most effective way to monitor your production jobs m Analyze and optimizing job proce
61. Message column in this window will give a description of the problem The Control M Enterprise Manager propagates workload information to the Control Ms Each Control M has one of the following synchronization statuses m Synchronized the relevant Control M is synchronized with the Control M Enterprise Manager All relevant workload settings were sent to the Control M and are confirmed m In Process the Control M Enterprise Manager sent the relevant workload settings to the relevant Control M and is awaiting confirmation There has not been a time out for reception of this confirmation m Not Synchronized the Control M Enterprise Manager sent the relevant workload settings to the relevant Control M but did not receive a confirmation from the Control M before reaching a time out m Not connected workload settings were planned to be sent to the Control M but it is not connected to the Control M Enterprise Manager Gateway At the bottom of the Workload Manager window a visual notification for the aggregated workload synchronization status will appear The displayed status is that of the Control M with the most severe status After clicking Apply or OK the Action Report window will be displayed with a list of all Control M Enterprise Managers version 7 0 00 and higher and their statuses Open Workload Monitor Opens the Workload Monitor window Refresh Refreshes the information in the list of Workloads De
62. On Do actions Out conditions Shouts OK NOTOK and Sysout Processing handling Note When forcing a job that is set with Post Processing bypass the job will end OK and will not perform the post processing actions as a dummy job when the pre submission criteria of the job are satisfied Run as and the job status should change to ENDED OK and only the job Dummy Job 3 After selecting the Bypass options click OK A confirmation dialog box is displayed NOTE By default all bypass options are unchecked If you check any bypass option that setting remains valid for the current run of the job When the job is rerun all bypass options are reset to the default unchecked To perform a restart z OS only 1 Right click the job node and in the pop up menu choose Restart 2 In the Job Restart dialog box using uppercase letters only A Enter the range of steps to be restarted B Check any of the following tasks you want performed m Recapture Abend Codes m Recapture Cond Codes m Perform Step Adjustment 268 Control M User Guide Performing manual job intervention C If desired specify the name of the member in the Control R PARM library that contains processing defaults to be applied to the job D Click OK To view why a job has not begun execution and to intervene if necessary 1 Right click the job node and in the pop up menu choose Why The Why dialog box opens displaying the reasons why the job did not r
63. RC described above Highest z OS only For SMART Tables only The name of the job MEMNAME member that generated the highest return code from among all jobs of the SMART Table i e jobs within a SMART or Sub table Failure RC z OS only The highest return code in the job execution from among the steps that ended NOTOK because of high return codes The abended step s and steps that ended OK are not considered for the resolution of this variable For jobs ended OK this variable resolves to blanks See the Control M Parameter Guide for further information about return codes for z OS jobs Failure RC z OS only Job Step name which generated the Failure Return Step Code Highest RC described above Failure RC z OS only Job Procedure Step name which generated the Proc Failure Return Code Failure RC described above Rule Based Name of RBC that ordered job Calendar Performing manual job intervention You can perform various intervention actions on jobs displayed in the Control M EM ViewPoint Regardless of the action the process for performing the action is basically the same NOTE To perform job actions you must have appropriate authorizations in Control M EM and the relevant Control M To perform an intervention action on a job Right click the job node in Control M EM and in the pop up menu choose the action option The pop up menu lists both monitoring and intervention actions Table 5
64. Sort Semencing Sort Descending Bara The Sakr Fidd Chose Bit Fit This menu is used for performing most modifications Changes made are saved and re displayed the next time the list is displayed To display the list display pop up menu Click anywhere in the list display except the column header Figure 21 List Display Pop up Menu Expt to Fie Print a hem Court Modifying list displays The following modifications can be made to list displays Toggle the Item Counter on and off Sort the list according the values in a column Remove a column from the list Add fields to the list display Resize a column s width Reorder columns Toggling the item counter is performed from the list display pop up menu The other modifications are performed from the columns headers or the column header pop up menu 348 Control M User Guide B Modifying list displays NOTE Not all list displays can be modified and not all modifications are possible in modifiable list displays Furthermore some modifications require Administrator permissions To display or hide the item count in a list display Click Item Count in the list display pop up menu To sort the list according to the values in a column Perform one of the following m Right click the column header Select Sort Ascending or Sort Descending or m Click the column header The selected column initially sorts in ascending order default Once the column is al
65. Sub tables which will also be displayed in the list of jobs The contents of a Sub table can be viewed by clicking on the Sub table in the list Figure 8 Table Content dialog box Iob lisi gt Drinan 5 K OSs ase 2 The columns in the Table Content dialog box display job definition parameters For parameter descriptions see the Control M Parameter Guide 3 To filter the list of jobs click the Filter List check box specify values in the fields at the top of the Table Content dialog box and click Apply To remove filter criteria from the fields click Clear The following table describes the filtering fields of the Table Content dialog box Table 41 Filter fields Table Content dialog box 3 i Job Name Name of the job Mem Name Name of a file containing a job script Chapter5 Organizing and managing jobs in tables 151 Managing jobs in tables 152 Table 41 Filter fields Table Content dialog box Field Description Mem Lib Name of a library directory in which a job script is located Group Name of a group of jobs Application Name of an application Used to supply a descriptive name to a set of related groups of jobs The following table describes the buttons of the Table Content dialog box Table 42 Command buttons Table Content dialog box Element Description Clear Clears filter criteria from the filter fields Apply Applies the specified
66. Up The Control M is connected and available Note Data displayed in the Control M EM ViewPoint might not necessarily be synchronized with data in the Control M Active Jobs file Reconnecting The workstation is trying to reconnect to the Control M Initial The Active environment is not yet loaded The workstation is trying to connect to the Control M Formatting The Active Jobs file cannot be accessed because either the AJF New Day procedure or Active Jobs File Compress procedure is in progress at the Control M Downloading The workstation is receiving a download from the Control M Last Update Time the last message was sent from a Control M This field is displayed in 24 hour clock format Chapter 18 Ensuring Control M components are communicating 231 Communicating with Control M Servers Table 50 Communication Status dialog box fields and symbols Part 2 of 2 Field Icon or Value and Description Remarks If the Synchronization symbol is not green this field displays the reason For example one possible reasons is Loading Jobs The Control M EM Server is loading jobs from the Control M Server database To display communication and other information about Control Ms In Control M EM or Control M Desktop choose Tools gt Communication gt Details The Control M Details dialog box opens and displays data about each Control M including status information Control
67. Valid date values for In and Out conditions Part 1 of 2 Date Value Description date 4 digit date in mmdd or ddmm format depending on the site standard offset or followed by a number from 0 through 999 indicating the number of days in the future or in the past relative to the actual order date This value is valid only for jobs running in Control M for z OS version 6 2 00 or later ODAT Original scheduling date of the job PREV Previous scheduling date of the job NEXT Next scheduling date of the job Chapter 4 Defining how jobs should run 109 Allocating resources for a job Table 33 Valid date values for In and Out conditions Part 2 of 2 Date Value Description STAT The condition is not date dependent Note This value is valid only for Control M Server version 6 0 01 and above and for Control M for z OS or Any scheduling date EXAMPLE Job1 and Job2 are predecessors of Job3 Define the necessary conditions in the Conditions tab for Job1 Job2 and Job3 as follows m InJob1 define that the job should add a Job1 EndedOK Out condition m In Job2 define that the job should add a Job2 EndedOK Out condition m In Job3 define Job1 EndedOK and Job2 EndedOK In conditions that is that these conditions must exist before the job is submitted m Ifthe Job1 EndedOK and Job2 Ended OK conditions are no longer needed after Job3 successfully ends remove them
68. Workload to another node ID Group Chapter 23 Managing Workloads 287 23 288 When a job is associated with a Workload and the Nodes Mapping rules affect the jobs execution node ID Group the job s execution node ID Group definition is actually changed The change is applied immediately to the job s execution definition unless the job is currently running in which case the change is applied once the job has finished An icon indicating that the execution node has been changed is displayed next to the node ID Group field in the Execution tab of the job s job editing form EXAMPLE The job DailyReport_1 is defined to be printed every afternoon on a machine designated as node ID ReportServer_A ReportServer_A needs to be switched off for maintenance Another server ReportServer_B is available to perform the same functionality DailyReport_1 is associated with a Workload The Nodes Mapping rules for the Workload route all associated jobs which are defined to execute on node ID ReportServer_A to be executed on node ID ReportServer_B Therefore DailyReport_1 which has node ReportServer_A defined as the execution node will be routed to execute on node ReportServer_B If the Workload is deleted after it has had an affect on a job s node mapping then the job s execution node ID Group will return to its originally defined value The original value is saved and can be viewed in the job s log If the job s execution n
69. You can use field placeholders which are replaced by actual job attributes in the generated services Chapter 24 Control M Self Service management 305 Creating a service rule EXAMPLE The format name Service for Application in Group might create a service named Service for app1 in group1 that contains jobs with Application app1 and Group group1 NOTE If you group according to the first or last letters of the field s value the placeholder is replaced by the first or last letter In the first example of this procedure Service for Application is replaced with Service for BAC and Service for BAT for the two generated services 9 Do one or more of the following To enable Control M Self Service users to order the generated services select the Orderable checkbox This option is only enabled if you selected Generate service per SMART Table or Generate service per job in the Grouping window and the Active checkbox is not selected in the General window To automatically add orderable parameters to the generated orderable services select the Add automatically orderable parameters to each service The generated parameters are taken from the AutoEdits of a service s SMART Table or job definition This option is only enabled if the Orderable checkbox is selected To generate a separate service instance for each ODAT select Service Instance Per ODAT This option is only enabled if you selected Group jobs to services
70. ZA Z9 0A 0Z 01 09 1A 19 9A 99 You can indicate that a job is a critical job by specifying an symbol in the Priority field and clicking the Critical field Priority and critical logic works as follows Control M User Guide Assigning priorities to jobs and defining and critical jobs m If available resources are sufficient to submit a lower priority job or higher priority job but not both they will be used for the higher priority job m If available resources are sufficient to submit a lower priority job but not a higher priority job the lower priority job will be submitted m If available resources are sufficient to submit a lower priority job but not a critical job the resources will be held until all resources required by the critical job are available and then the critical job will be submitted EXAMPLE A The TransUpd01 and TransSumm01 jobs each require 35 of the CPU but TransUpd01 is a much higher priority job 1 In the Priority field in the Execution tab of TransUpd01 define a priority of 06 2 In the Priority field in the Execution tab of TransSumm01 define a priority of X4 If there are only enough resources for one of the jobs to run TransUpd01 will run first EXAMPLE The TransUpd01 job requires 35 of the CPU the TransSumm01 job requires only 15 of the CPU but TransUpd01 is a much higher priority job than TransSumm01 1 In the Priority field in the Execution tab of TransUpd01
71. and User Authorizations and Command Line Interface cli utility privileges Control M EM security can be defined at the user level and group level Users can be associated with multiple groups The following sections provide an overview for assigning authorizations to users For more information see the descriptions of the respective tabs in Tabs in the User and Group Authorizations windows on page 50 Chapter 2 Working with Control M Desktop and Control M EM 45 Authorization facility for limiting access to entities 46 Log on procedure User names are authenticated in Control M EM according to the AuthenticationMethod system parameter and the DirectoryServiceAuth system parameter settings These parameters determine whether Control M EM uses internal or external authentication For more information about the DirectoryServiceAuth system parameter see the Control M Administrator Guide If the AuthenticationMethod system parameter is null the internal Control M EM authentication is used If the AuthenticationMethod system parameter has a value the specified external authentication plug in is used If the DirectoryServiceAuth system parameter is set to On the AuthenticationMethod system parameter is ignored The log on procedure must authenticate the identifiers of the user against external LDAP directories Users who are not defined in the Control M EM Authorization Facility must belong to groups in the LDAP di
72. back archived data 341 Selecting and displaying archived ViewPoints Selecting and displaying archived ViewPoints To Select and display archived ViewPoints 1 In the Control M EM GUL select File gt Open Archived ViewPoint which displays the Nets list NOTE In the Archived Net listings the Start Time and End Time values are taken from the computer where the Gateway ran Their date values can differ from the listed Date value for example due to time zone or New Day procedure differences 2 Select the Control M server and then select a Net from the Nets list and click Next which displays the list of available ViewPoints 3 Select the ViewPoint to be displayed 4 To filter the jobs that will be displayed in the archived ViewPoint click Dynamic Filter For information on Dynamic Filtering see Defining dynamic filters on page 240 5 Click Finish The selected archived ViewPoint is displayed in the Control M EM GUI Many functions available for regular ViewPoints are available for archived View Points NOTE AW m Ifthe total number of Archived jobs in the GUI server exceeds the value specified in the LimitArchiveJobsInMem system parameter the ViewPoint will not be displayed For more information see the Control M Administrator Guide m Only one Archived Net can be opened at a time in the Archive ViewPoint window However more than one ViewPoint showing information from the same Archived Net can be d
73. been tE EESE E EEEE EE es 144 Managing jobs INTs cyte iawineeres edit teeters gine eco aE a beta de 150 Control M User Guide Chapter 6 Comparing jobs INGOGDUCHON 4 4 s 0u0a o5 go eden ng iee abaia ds mhaG Ne ed E E nPE wala have aden Comparing 100s sreci iet ae othe Pace ee aie ne ed ot ne ee a Chapter 7 Exploring and tracking versions of definition entities TAtFOGUCHOR ese een cheddar he tiaa ee Be hate Dee Ewin eee bones Exploring versions of definition entiies 3 02 5 e ia s este ees cagh eeeeew een eas Version Manager window sci stcncvets answered watts dus cewsneuriws gens Viewi g a job s history srra enorer eenean e ise katewsedaat oie danse Chapter 8 Using predefined calendars to schedule jobs ntrodUCtON essaie cei ige Eea iode a EE e EE E E E E E E E EE E EE Creating and modifying calendars n a nannan nennen rreren To define Regular and Relative calendars o n nnana nunana nannaa To define Periodic calendars 0 cece ce cee cece eee eee aes To define Rule Based calendars 0 ccc cece eee eee eee eens Managing Calendars nc12c4 cece seen beri bi Oe pert dU een ebs Pei ea Den Sah os Uploading and downloading calendars cj 2 250s ce8 ot ries Veded ee eases Copying Calendars oies pase cert eels pn pene bi ee heehee kere ier ede es Deleting calendars ssie irre eri eeucetw ee tetas EEE ed chew a EEE eae Refreshing and unlocking calendars wi ice0 hacen Si ee cade gia se te kin
74. books or to view online books and notices such as release notes and technical bulletins Some product shipments also include the online books on a documentation CD NOTE Online books are formatted as Portable Document Format PDF or HTML files To view print or copy PDF books use the free Adobe Reader from Adobe Systems If your product installation does not install the reader you can obtain the reader at http www adobe com The software also offers online Help To access Help press F1 within any product or click the Help button in graphical user interfaces GUIs Conventions Conventions This book uses the following special conventions mw All syntax operating system terms and literal examples are presented in this typeface m Variable text in path names system messages or syntax is displayed in italic text testsys instancelfileName a The symbol gt connects items in a menu sequence For example Actions gt Confirm instructs you to choose the Confirm command from the Actions menu Syntax statements The following example shows a sample syntax statement COMMAND KEYWORD1 KEYWORD2 KEYWORD3 KEYWORD4 YES NO fileName The following table explains conventions for syntax statements and provides examples Item Example Items in italic type represent variables that alias you must replace with a name or value If a variable is represented by two or more databaseDirectory words
75. can limit the number of jobs associated with the Workload that are running concurrently on a specific Control M Time and date periods can be defined for when these limitations are applied To define limitations for running jobs 1 Click the Add button for a new running jobs definition or double click a definition from the list to modify an existing one NOTE You can copy existing definitions to create a new running jobs by selecting a definition from the list and clicking Copy The Number of Running Jobs Period Definition window is displayed 2 Enter the name of the Control M or select one from the drop down menu in the Control M field The user can also select lt On Each gt to limit the number of jobs on all Control Ms defined in the filter 3 Define the maximum number of jobs that can run simultaneously in the Number of running jobs field 4 Define the date and time that the Workload Policy limitations will be enforced See Defining time periods for Workload Policies on page 289 5 Click OK 6 To save the definitions or modifications proceed to step 4 on page 284 To continue defining or modifying a workload select a tab and continue Nodes Mapping A job may be defined with a specific node ID Group on which the job will be executed This is defined in the Execution tab of the job editing form In the Nodes Mapping tab of the Workload window you can map a specific node ID Group that is defined for jobs in the
76. check box Chapter 27 Defining and generating reports 335 Generating and exporting reports in batch To produce a Global Links report 1 Ensure that the Produce Global Links Report check box is checked 2 Fill in the rest of this panel Filter panel for the Audit report The Filter panel for the Audit report contains special fields Audit Type and Audit Operation 1 In the Audit Type field select which type of Audit data should be retrieved or select lt All gt if all Audit types should be included 2 In the Audit Operation field select for which type of Audit operation data should be retrieved or select lt All gt if all operations of the selected Audit type should be included The available list of operations changes according to the selected Audit type The list of Field Names changes according to the selected operation If Audit Type lt All gt is selected the Audit Operation field is disabled 3 Fill in the rest of this panel Generating and exporting reports in batch 336 The emreportcli command line utility generates reports in a selected format This utility runs only on Microsoft Windows in batch mode NOTE You must specify Control M EM server login information when you invoke this utility Either of the two following options can be used to activate the emreportcli utility m Parameters can be entered as command line parameters m An input arguments file can be generated with XML specifications
77. criteria are satisfied m The New Day procedure can directly order jobs that need scheduling to the Active Jobs file a method sometimes suitable for small data centers a The New Day procedure can order special jobs called User Daily jobs which in turn order jobs that need scheduling a method more suited for large data centers Each User Daily job scans tables specifically assigned to it looking for jobs that should be scheduled that day and orders them to the Active Jobs file SMART Tables are ordered only if the scheduling criteria of at least one Rule Based Calendar in the table is satisfied Whether individual jobs in the SMART Table are ordered depends on the relationship between the individual job scheduling criteria and the selected Control M level Rule Based Calendars which is set by selecting either And or Or see Determining whether jobs in a SMART Table will be scheduled on page 136 and on the values of job specific basic scheduling parameters Chapter14 Automating job scheduling and maintenance 203 Identifying automation criteria for tables For instructions on defining the New Day procedure and User Daily jobs see the Control M Administrator Guide for the particular Control M platform Identifying automation criteria for tables 204 For a table to be automatically ordered during New Day Processing it must be assigned to the New Day procedure or a User Daily job To assign or reassign a table to the New
78. dates are not scheduled in a calendar In a Relative calendar the specified date has or to indicate that if the marked date is scheduled schedule it in the calendar If the marekd date is not scheduled schedule the closest next date or the closest previous date You can use Relative calendars to combine calendars through the Control M IOABLCAL utility For details see the Control M for z OS User Guide Rule based calendars which are specified with rules independent of specific years These calendars can apply to scheduling over several years since they do not have to be redefined for each year There are two types of Rule based calendars table level local and Control M level Table level rule based calendars can be created ina SMART Table and apply to that table and all its children tables Control M level Rule based calendars can be created with the Calendar Manager and applied to any job or SMART Table that is connected to the specific Control M on which the Rule based calendar was defined Each calendar you create is defined for a specific year except Rule based calendars and on a specific Control M but you can copy calendar definitions to other years and to other Control Ms To see the effect of a calendar on a job s schedule plan use Control M Forecast For details see Chapter 19 Planning production with Control M Forecast If Control M Forecast is not licensed at your site you can use the CTMRPLN utility
79. define a priority of 06 2 In the Priority field in the Execution tab of TransSumm01 define a priority of X4 If only 20 of the CPU is available TransSumm01 will be submitted before TransUpd01 EXAMPLE The TransUpd01 job requires 35 of the CPU the TransSumm01 job requires only 15 of the CPU but TransUpd01 is a critical job 1 In the Priority field in the Execution tab of TransUpd01 define a priority of and then click Critical 2 In the Priority field in the Execution tab of TransSumm01 define a priority of X4 If only 20 of the CPU is available Control M reserves that CPU until another 15 of the CPU is free and then submits TransUpd01 Chapter 4 Defining how jobs should run 107 Defining how many days a job can await submission Defining how many days a job can await submission It can happen that a scheduled job does not get submitted on the day it is scheduled for example if its submission criteria have not been satisfied Using the Maxwait parameter in the Execution tab you can define the maximum number of days that such a job can remain in the Active Jobs file awaiting submission To define how long a not submitted job should remain active In the Maxwait field in the AJF Retention area of the Execution panel select the maximum number of days the job can remain active EXAMPLE If the ABC job is not submitted on the day it is scheduled it should remain active until it is submitted up to a
80. eee pew er ees 110 Defining and using variables that are dynamically resolved at runtime 112 Chapter4 Defining how jobs should run 77 78 Defining and using variables that are dynamically resolved at runtime 112 Defining and using variables that are dynamically resolved at runtime 112 Defining postprocessing actions that depend on job processing results 114 Defining postprocessing actions that depend on job processing results 114 Defining conditional processing under Z OS 0 ccc cece ee 121 Defining messages to be shouted at the end of job processing 123 Defining messages to be shouted at the end of job processing 123 Defining how to handle the job s sysout when the job ends OK 125 Archiving sysdata z OS only eee oye GIe Pee ny Ode eae eae CAPE aba HESS 126 Annotating ACV lt 2 228i cjie beh eret keete eat tote ted E rE a 126 Creating and editing SMART Tablescc cpesckivehscvere eid sentences beakes 127 Defining general SMART Table information is s5s6isoei5eensta eee csaeoa nes 128 Defining scheduling criteria fora SMART Table 0 00 e eee eee 129 Defining dependencies variables and notifications in the SMART Table 132 Defining dependencies variables and notifications in the SMART Table 132 Defining actions to be performed after all scheduled jobs in the SMART Table have CNG EPEE ech pen eetee lanes
81. exclusion rather than inclusion m The full draft should be displayed that is the filter should be nullified TIP Because the relationship between multiple criteria specified in the dialog box is AND to create criteria using an implied OR relationship do the following steps 1 Define the first criterion or first set of AND criteria and select Set Matching jobs to be the current filter 2 Then define an OR criterion or set of criteria if they have an AND relationship between them and select Add matching jobs to the current filter This set is added to the filter implying an OR relationship between it and the previous set Repeat this step as needed 4 Click OK to filter the draft according to the specified criteria Draft filters are not saved for future use When you close the draft the filter definition is lost Arranging the Control M Desktop flow diagram display In Control M Desktop after you have performed many changes to the flow diagram for example adding or modifying job dependencies you might want to have Control M Desktop rearrange the flow diagram to more neatly display the job flow To arrange the display In Control M Desktop right click anywhere in flow diagram except on a job node and select Arrange All from the menu Chapter 2 Working with Control M Desktop and Control M EM 39 Changing click and drag in Control M Desktop to define dependencies Changing click and drag in Control M Deskt
82. filter New Opens a new job editing form for an undefined job It can also create a table if the table defined in the Table field does not exist Unavailable if the table is locked or if the user is not authorized to open a job in the table Update View Displays the currently selected job in the job editing form for update If the table is currently locked or the user is not authorized to update the table or its jobs the button says View and opens the job for viewing only Delete Deletes the currently selected job definition or table Unavailable if the table is locked or the user is not authorized to delete the table or its jobs NOTE m If updates are not permitted for example the table is locked or you do not have authorization the phrase Read Only appears in the title bar m Pattern matching special characters can be used for filtering For details see Pattern matching strings on page 387 m The filter fields and the columns in the Table Content dialog box represent job definition parameters For parameter descriptions see the Control M Parameter Guide To display the details of a job or SMART Table Do one of the following actions If you are working in the Table Manager select the job in the Table Content dialog box and click Edit If the Table Content dialog box is not already displayed for the table display it by double clicking the table that contains the job whose definition
83. filter Enter a value or select a value from the drop down menu for the following filter attributes Job Name Mem Name Mem Name is for z OS jobs only Control M Application Group Table Job Type Node ID Group 284 Control M User Guide 23 Each attribute filter is optional but at least one attribute must be defined to establish a pattern for filtering the workload s jobs You can also use prefixes and suffixes as pattern matching strings Jobs that match the pattern string will become part of the workload For example if there are 3 jobs entitled Job1 Job2 and Job3 then setting the filter to Job will include all three jobs Table 58 describes the symbols that can be used in a workload filter Table 58 Symbols used to compose pattern matching strings for workloads Symbol Name Asterisk wildcard Usage Denotes any number of characters including no characters This can be inserted in place of a string or in the middle of the pattern matching string in the place of any number of characters Note If one or more of the filter criteria fields is not needed it is more efficient to leave the field blank than to use the character However at least 1 filter field must contain a value Question mark wildcard Denotes any single character This can be inserted in place of any number of characters Comma Used to separate pattern matching strings enabling the user to specify more than one str
84. filters dynamic filters do not reduce system overhead but they do reduce screen clutter and facilitate monitoring by exception Dynamic filters are defined locally on an on need basis and can be saved for reuse Selecting a ViewPoint You can open multiple ViewPoints at the same time in separate windows To display an existing ViewPoint 1 In the Control M Enterprise Manager window choose File gt Open Viewpoint or click amp 2 In the Open ViewPoint dialog box select the ViewPoint and click OK Displaying nodes in their own ViewPoint 238 Select the nodes in the ViewPoint and choose View gt View Selection A new special ViewPoint opens displaying the selected nodes When you display selected nodes in their own special ViewPoint the ViewPoint is similar to regular ViewPoints but because it is based on a fixed set of nodes a you cannot filter the ViewPoint m you can not remove jobs from or add jobs to the ViewPoint Control M User Guide Filtering the ViewPoint display Filtering the ViewPoint display Two types of filters can be used to filter the display Global filters and dynamic filters These filters differ in several ways including how they are defined For details see m Switching filters m Defining dynamic filters m Defining global filters Switching filters This section describes how to switch global filters and how to filter with dynamic filters To switch global filters In the Filter
85. following entities m Service definitions A service is a group of one or more jobs that are aggregated based on job filtering criteria ODAT SMART table or a job as described in Service definitions on page 298 m Service Rules A service rule is a service generation definition that enables you to manually or automatically generate services as described in Service rules on page 303 Service definitions 298 A service is a group of one or more jobs that are aggregated based on job filtering criteria ODAT SMART table or a job You can create a service definition which enables the service to appear in Control M Self Service when a job that belongs to the service appears in the AJF The following procedures describe how to create edit copy and delete service definitions Creating a service definition on page 299 Editing a service definition on page 301 Copying a service definition on page 302 Deleting a service definition on page 303 Control M User Guide Creating a service definition Creating a service definition This procedure describes how to create a service definition which enables the service to appear in Control M Self Service when a job that belongs to the service appears in the AJF Before You Begin Successful completion of Starting Control M Desktop on page 26 To create a service definition 1 From the Tools menu select Service Definition Manager The Serv
86. for job submission Blue Wait Workload Job is waiting due to restrictions enforced by workload policy rules 32 Control M User Guide Understanding the flow diagram Table 3 Job status indicated color Part 2 of 2 Color Status Meaning Pink Wait User Job is waiting for user confirmation Note Jobs with this status are assigned WAITCONFIRM status in Control M Server Red Ended Not OK Job processing finished unsuccessfully Example Agent platform on which the job was running was changed to disabled by a user White Unknown Communication with the Agent platform or agentless remote host was interrupted Purple Not in AJF Job is not in the Active Jobs file This status is displayed only in archived ViewPoints Understanding colors used in nodes above the job node The color of a high level node that is any node above the job node is determined by the status of its descendant nodes m If all descendant nodes have the same status the title bar of the high level node is the same color as its descendants m If the descendant nodes have different statuses the color of the high level node is as described in Table 4 In this case vertical color bars at the bottom of the node indicate the proportional status distributions of descendant nodes EXAMPLE A The following application node has some jobs that have Ended OK and some that have Ended Not OK DEX Account Table 4 High leve
87. from the active environment after Job3 ends by defining them as Out conditions to be deleted in Job3 when defining the Out condition select in the Effect column m If Job3 is a predecessor job to another job define that it should add a Job3 EndedOK Out condition which can then be specified as an In condition in a successor job of Job3 TIP After defining job dependencies you can use the loopdetecttool utility to detect loops in conditions For details see the Control M Utility Guide Allocating resources for a job 110 To ensure that a job is not submitted for execution before required resources are available you identify available resources to the system in Control M EM for details see Chapter 15 Identifying data center resources available for Control M use and then define the resources required by the job here in the Resources tab Resources can be of one of two types m Quantitative Resources these are resource definitions for which you specify in Control M EM an overall quantity available to the Control M and the amount required by the job in the Resource tab Examples of quantitative resources you might define are CPU RAM MB Hard Disk GB and Tape Drives Control M User Guide Allocating resources for a job m Control Resources these are resource definitions for which you specify the type of control the jobs needs Exclusive or Shared They are often used to represent files or databases
88. group whose authorizations apply to members of the group NOTE Control M EM users with Full access can add modify copy or delete user and group authorizations Users with Browse access can view authorizations For more information see Table 17 on page 59 Chapter 2 Working with Control M Desktop and Control M EM 47 Authorizations window 48 To access the User or Group Authorizations window 1 Log on to Control M EM or Control M Desktop 2 Choose Tools gt Authorizations The Users tab is displayed Authorizations window Users tab The Users panel lists the system s users Fields in this panel are described in Table 7 Table 7 Authorizations window Users tab fields Field Description Filter Select this check box to enable the User Name filter User Name Specify a user name or pattern for example adm Click Apply to apply text box the filter Click Clear to erase the contents of the text box Name Control M EM logon name of the user to whom the authorization refers Names listed satisfy the requirements of the filter if any Full Name Full name of the user Description Description of the user To define authorizations for a group of users click the Groups tab The Groups tab lists group names and descriptions of the groups to which users can be assigned Fields in this panel are described in Table 8 Authorizations window Groups tab Table 8 Authorizations windo
89. in each active job that do not also appear as added OUT conditions in another active job Although such conditions normally reflect manual conditions they can also reflect omitted Out conditions or misspelled In or Out conditions Definition report types a Job Definitions report lists all jobs and job details determined by selection and display criteria It also includes a count of the number of jobs contained in the report Note that in the case of multiple jobs these can be from the same or different tables or SMART Tables m Table Definitions report lists all tables and table details determined by selection and display criteria m Links Definition report shows the links dependencies defined between all jobs or between selected jobs as determined by selection and display criteria Global conditions are also included in this report For example you can list all the dependencies and global conditions that are defined in a specific data center or only those defined between two groups m Manual Definitions report performs validity checks and lists any IN condition that is not defined as an OUT condition of another job Though manual conditions normally have no corresponding OUT conditions the listed conditions might nevertheless reveal omissions and spelling errors Chapter 27 Defining and generating reports 321 General report types General report types 322 Control M Alerts report lists alerts sent to the
90. in Control M servers in Rome and Paris begin executing only after successful completion of a job in Sydney Global conditions are like normal prerequisite conditions except that their names begins with a prefix that identifies the condition as a global condition When you define global conditions what you actually define are the following m prefixes up to 255 characters long that indicate that a condition is a global condition Chapter 16 Establishing job dependencies across Control Ms 213 Defining global conditions 214 m From and To Control M servers for which the global condition prefix is relevant When Control M EM detects the addition or deletion of a global condition in a From Control M it automatically adds or deletes the same global condition in the designated To Control M installations TIP By appropriately designating the same Control M installations as both From and To Control Ms you can create bi directional flows as opposed to From To flows In this case addition or deletion of a global condition in any such installation will always result in the automatic addition or deletion of the global condition in the opposite direction For Best Practices implementation tips see Bi directional global conditions on page 218 You define and manage global conditions in the Global Conditions dialog box which you display from either Control M Desktop or Control M EM After a global condition is defined you c
91. inks exces irisa dh een Re ees AE i e A oE vas 34 Additional display adjustments ssuuasunan s nnnrunn rrn nrn rnrn runn 37 Authorizations window Users tab fields 0 ccc cee eens 48 Authorizations window Groups tab fields 0 eens 48 Tab descriptions ax bau Phe ek oie ees heh ey eee ye eee eee EE 50 User Authorizations window General tab fields 0 00 cece eee eee 51 Group Authorizations window General tab fields 00000005 52 User Authorizations window Member Of tab fields 0 00000 52 Active tab fields and buttons 0 0 00000 ccc cece eee e eens 55 Collection selection criteria 2 0 0 cee eee eee eee eee nas 56 Valid Operators 205 ccas cae cece reenie ee ent ee Kone pren EEE Hear Ses EE E reseed 57 Owners tab fields 0 00 00 cece eee eee eee e eens 59 Privileges tab access levels c c 440 ete ie che Peete fees Pie Peden Thee ew ees 59 Privileges and features soser ens x naei a baw eee eee eden eee sees 60 Table tab fleld Ss c4 23 2 ghee babe b Sadan SUN DORE a oe be eed e brene 61 Table access levels icc cc ew as ee cetenls ee nate nee Mele eb die Oa eS Ghee wae ee ee bes 62 Prerequisite Conditions panel fields si is2vaviseiavia ded vesedals Doe ekaewa lt 4 63 Prerequisite Conditions access levels euy ds ecards Peete en eee ere w ees 63 Control Resources tab fields 1 0 0 0 0c ccc cece eee eee e eee 65 Control Resources acce
92. is a unique entity and not dependent on conditions from another service NOTE Note the following m You only need to do this procedure if you created services per SMART table as described in Chapter 24 Control M Self Service management m Ifyou order a service with jobs that have dependencies the service runs when the dependency is met If you order another service that has the same job dependencies as the first the service runs automatically because it is associated with the job dependency from the first service This procedure prevents this problem by creating unique service entities that are not associated to other services To modify dependencies for jobs within a SMART table 1 Edit a job with a dependency in a SMART table as described in Defining dependencies for the current job on page 108 2 For each dependency add the following suffix Control M for Distributed Systems m lt INCondition gt _ GROUP_ORDID version 6 4 01 and lower a lt INCondition gt _ TBALE_ID version 7 0 00 and higher m Control M for z OS m lt INCondition gt _ GRID version 6 4 01 and lower m lt INCondition gt _ TBID version 7 0 00 and higher Chapter 4 Defining how jobs should run 139 Defining job dependencies by using the flow diagram Defining job dependencies by using the flow diagram 140 You can create or redefine job dependencies simply by clicking and dragging between jobs in the flow diagram Th
93. job on first and fifteenth day in every month except April do the following 1 Click Advanced 2 In the Advanced Dates Selection dialog box click calendar days 1 and 15 and then click OK 3 In the calendar in April click off calendar days 1 and 15 4 Click Save Chapter8 Using predefined calendars to schedule jobs 167 Managing calendars Managing calendars This section describes how to upload and download calendars how to copy or delete them and several other calendar management tasks Uploading and downloading calendars NOTE SSS Upload and download are background processes during these processes you can perform other actions You must upload calendars from the Control M EM database to the Control M Server database to use them for job scheduling To upload updated calendars to the Control M Server database In the Calendar Manager dialog box select the calendar and click Lif Upload TIP If the Control M Server database contains a more recent version of the calendar you are trying to upload an Already Updated error is issued and the upload is prevented To force the upload in this case click Et Force Upload To download calendars from the Control M Server database to the Control M EM database In the Calendar Manager dialog box select the calendar and click gl Download TIP To download a calendar that is not displayed in the Calendar Manager dialog box create an em
94. lt somesol ware Control M User Guide Supporting Version 7 0 00 of Control M Enterprise Manager Version 7 0 00 of Control M Server for UNIX and Microsoft Windows Version 7 0 00 of for UNIX and Microsoft Windows April 2011 WITH THE POWER OF IT www bmc com Kime O Contacting BMC Software You can access the BMC Software website at http www bmc com From this website you can obtain information about the company its products corporate offices special events and career opportunities United States and Canada Address BMC SOFTWARE INC Telephone 713 918 8800 or Fax 713 918 8000 2101 CITYWEST BLVD 800 841 2031 HOUSTON TX 77042 2827 USA Outside United States and Canada Telephone 01 713 918 8800 Fax 01 713 918 8000 Copyright 2010 BMC Software Inc BMC BMC Software and the BMC Software logo are the exclusive properties of BMC Software Inc are registered with the U S Patent and Trademark Office and may be registered or pending registration in other countries All other BMC trademarks service marks and logos may be registered or pending registration in the U S or in other countries All other trademarks or registered trademarks are the property of their respective owners Linux is the registered trademark of Linus Torvalds Oracle and Java are registered trademarks of Oracle and or its affiliates Other names may be trademarks of their respective owners UNIX is the registered trademark of The
95. maximum of 3 days at which time if it has not been submitted it should be cleaned during New Day processing Set Maxwait to 3 Defining dependencies for the current job 108 You define dependencies between jobs by means of In prerequisite conditions and Out prerequisite conditions that you define in the Conditions tab m By defining an In prerequisite condition you establish the requirement that the condition must exist in the active environment before the job can be submitted m By defining an Out prerequisite condition you establish that the condition is added to or deleted from the active environment when the job ends The most basic usage of prerequisite conditions to establish dependencies is as follows m Ina predecessor job define an Out prerequisite condition to be added to the active environment when the job ends OK m Inthe successor job define this same condition as an In prerequisite condition NOTE Alternatively you can create job dependencies by simply clicking and dragging between job nodes in the flow diagram This will automatically generate the In and Out prerequisite conditions Control M User Guide TIP Defining dependencies for the current job If an In prerequisite condition in a successor job is no longer needed after the successor job runs you can have the successor job delete that condition by define it as an Out prerequisite condition to be deleted This is especially useful if
96. menu choose Download 3 If you are prompted for confirmation confirm m From the Table Manager do the following 1 Select the tables to be downloaded 2 Click Download 3 If you are prompted for confirmation confirm TIP To download a table that is not displayed in the Table Manager window create the table and then download the table normally Chapter 13 Putting jobs into production 201 Downloading tables from Control M to Control M EM 202 Control M User Guide lt i mc 14 Automating job scheduling and maintenance Identifying automation criteria for tables cs so oscwves dered eesevbwgeneeeenees 204 After job processing definitions have been defined for your production jobs you can automate daily job ordering and daily maintenance through a feature called New Day processing At the same site defined time each day called New Day time Control M automatically runs a procedure called the New Day procedure A site can set the same or a different New Day time for each Control M The New Day procedure contains instructions for running a number of maintenance and cleanup utilities that among other things archive the previous day s processing and remove the previous day s jobs and conditions The New Day procedure is also responsible for placing jobs that should be ordered that day into a file called the Active Jobs file Control M automatically submits jobs in the Active Jobs file when their submission
97. or deleted m Deleted items items which have been deleted since the specified date Control M User Guide Version Manager window 4 Click Apply A list of definition entities appears Review or restore items in the filtered list by performing one of the tasks described in Table 44 Table 44 Version Manager management tasks Task to perform to view the properties of a definition entity How to perform it Double click the selected definition entity in the list or click the Properties button Note You cannot edit the definition entity from this view to display the list of versions of a definition entity Select the definition entity in the list and click Show History From the Job History window you can manage the versions of the definition entities as follows viewing the definition entity properties comparing versions restoring definition entities editing and restoring definition entities For more information see Exploring versions of definition entities on page 157 to restore one or more entities Select one or more definition entities in the list and click Restore Note Definition Entities are only restored locally in the Control M Desktop You must then write the table containing the job or Sub table to the Control M EM database in order to restore it in the database to edit and restore a definition entity version Select the definition entity in the list and click Edit
98. pane 30 managing job versions 150 Member of field User Authorizations window 52 Member Of panel actions 52 messages See also errors issuing at end of job 123 writing to log file 356 modifying group authorizations 49 user authorizations 49 monitoring alerts 249 exceptions 237 N Name field Authorizations window 48 Group Authorizations window 52 navigating flow diagram 41 navigation tree pane 30 Net Overview pane 30 network neighborhood 42 ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ New Day procedure scheduling jobs with 203 nodes in flow diagram hiding 37 icons 31 level focusing 37 None access level communication 59 Not A Member of field User Authorizations window 52 notifications in SMART Tables defining 132 0 online Help 17 operators list box 57 P pane repositioning 35 password new users 49 password changing 44 password expiration date User Authorizations window 51 Password field User Authorizations window 51 Password never expires field User Authorizations window 51 passwords changing 347 pattern matching symbols 387 Periodic calendars 164 playing back archived events 343 predecessor jobs 42 predicting scheduling needs See forecasts Prefix field Global Conditions panel 66 Prefix text box special characters warning 215 prerequisite conditions defining 109 security 63 65 Prerequisite Conditions panel Authorizations window 63 printing diagnostics 356 flow diagram 43 lists of alerts
99. practices on page 218 Deleting global conditions Select the condition in the Global Conditions dialog box and click Delete Chapter 16 Establishing job dependencies across Control Ms 215 Global condition logic and examples Global condition logic and examples 216 When sending a global condition with an ODAT date reference to Control Ms in different time zones a problem can arise when target Control M installations have an earlier current working date than the source Control M as a result of the time zone changes Such a situation can be problematic due to the following m A global condition with ODAT as its date reference is assigned a date according to the Control M that triggers its creation m During New Day processing cleanup when Control M detects an already existing condition having the new working date month and day it logically assumes that the condition is a holdover from the previous year because the production jobs that might create this condition during the new working date have not yet been run and it deletes the condition EXAMPLE Assume the following m New day processing in both Rome and San Francisco runs at 6 00 AM local time m At 8 00 AM in Rome a job creates Global Condition Glol RecReady with an ODAT date and sends it to San Francisco m At 9 00 AM in San Francisco a job requiring that condition awaits submission The following occurs at new day in Rome on August 4th m August 4th a
100. resolved values Changing certain parameters will not provide any benefit Be cautious and be sure of the benefit before deciding to edit parameters You might find it useful to edit parameters in the Active Set Step or PostProc pages if a job is not being submitted or if there is a need for modified post processing It might also be useful to edit parameters before a rerun or cyclic run Table 53 describes parameters in the Active tab many of which are unique to copies of the job processing definition in the active environment For tips in modifying job details see Creating and editing jobs on page 83 For a detailed description of the fields displayed in the job editing form see the Control M Parameter Guide 4 Click Save 5 Right click the node and choose Free to free the job To order or force the job again see To order or force jobs on page 272 Table 53 Fields of the Active tab Part 1 of 3 Section Field Description Job Details Order ID Unique job order ID in Control M Job ID ID assigned to the job by the operating system Run Time Current Status Status of the job such as Ended OK Held Indicates if the job is held Deleted Indicates if the job is deleted Restarted z OS only Indicates if the job has been restarted Order Date Original scheduling date of the job Next Time Indicates the next expected submission date and time for the Date Time job for rerun or cyclic jo
101. run on specific nodes 2 In the Steps pane select specify m On Statement stmt code Notok Do Rerun NOTE The maximum reruns value applies only to automatic reruns triggered by the On Do statements Reruns that you manually request from Control M EM are not counted toward this total EXAMPLE WI A job that ends not OK should be rerun once If it still fails it should trigger an alternative job and shout a message to the administrator 1 In the Execution panel do the following A Select the following rerun cycle Rerun every 1 minutes from job s end B Select 1 as the maximum reruns value 2 In the Steps panel do the following A Define On Statement stmt code notok B Define Do statement Rerun C Define On Statement stmt rerun code rerun error D Define the following Do statements a Do Force Job Table table1 Job AltJob Date ODAT m Do Shout To Admin Urgn Urgent Msg Rerun JobX failed Alternate job forced Defining jobs that should run on specific nodes Normally Control M Server can submit a job on any computer having a Control M Agent or designated as a remote host for that server To have a job submitted on a specific computer In the Node ID Group field in the Execution tab select the node ID of that computer Chapter 4 Defining how jobs should run 103 Defining jobs that should run on nodes where load balancing has been implemented B NOTE For application type jobs only I
102. sensitive 3 In the Hierarchy Definition dialog box A Optionally define a description for the hierarchy B Select criteria for each level of the hierarchy You can define up to four hierarchy levels 4 Click OK TIP m To return to the default hierarchy click Default Levels m Toclear fields and reset levels click Reset Levels Alternative method for defining ViewPoints the ViewPoint wizard 246 As an alternative to defining ViewPoints hierarchies and filters from the ViewPoint Manager you can define ViewPoints and their accompanying hierarchies and filters using the ViewPoint Wizard To define a ViewPoint using the ViewPoint wizard In Control M EM choose File gt New ViewPoint or click and work through the displayed ViewPoint Wizard pages Most wizard pages are self explanatory For general details regarding the definition of collections global filters and hierarchies see Defining the set of jobs to load to memory collections on page 244 and Defining the display hierarchy on page 245 respectively Control M User Guide Alternative method for defining ViewPoints the ViewPoint wizard NOTE B When defining hierarchies and global filters using the ViewPoint wizard m if you define a new hierarchy but do not specify a name for it the name defaults to the ViewPoint name with Hier appended to it m if you are define a new global filter but do not specify a name for it the name defaults
103. should run 93 Defining scheduling criteria using calendars Defining scheduling criteria using calendars 94 When the same schedule is used by many jobs you can define the schedule in a calendar For details about defining calendars see Chapter 8 Using predefined calendars to schedule jobs To use a calendar in the jobs schedule select the calendar in the Month Days area or the Week Days area Unless you are applying rules Defining complex scheduling criteria using rules on page 95 there is no difference between those selection fields or their impact To limit the calendar to specific days weekdays or months click those values The relationship between them and the calendar is AND that is the job will be scheduled only if the calendar and the months days and weekdays values are satisfied NOTE More complex relationships can be specified for various dates and calendars For details see Defining complex scheduling criteria using rules on page 95 EXAMPLE Schedule the job on all working days of the year The Workdays calendar schedules jobs on all working days of the year In the Calendar field select Workdays EXAMPLE Schedule the job on all working days in July and August The Workdays calendar schedules jobs on all working days of the year 1 In the Calendar field select Workdays 2 In the Months area click July and August EXAMPLE Schedule the job on all workin
104. source from which the substring should be taken select the number of characters that should be taken from the source for the substring and the character position from which to begin taking the substring extract Control M User Guide Managing templates m To add or subtract a value to a numeric function select or select the source of the value select the quantity to be added or subtracted 4 If a green check mark is displayed to the right of the Insert Function dialog box click it 5 To add more functions repeat the process beginning with Step 2 6 To add a literal value before or after the function position the cursor in the correct position and specify the value 7 When finished click OK in the Insert Function dialog box TIP If you clicked OK in the Insert Function dialog box and functions you selected did not appear you might have forgotten to click the green check mark Specify each missing function again and ensure you click the green check mark Then click OK again For a list description of available functions see Table 83 on page 391 EXAMPLE The template should add the following values to jobs along with other values not included in the example m ajob name of APXYn where n is incremented by 1 m a file name of jobname bat In the following template fields define the following indicated values and functions m Inthe Job Name field APXY Counter m Inthe File N
105. tab describes the Authorization group and lists each member of the group Generally each member of a group has the same authorizations to view or modify entities that are assigned to the group Authorizations defined for a specific user are either additional authorizations or take precedence over group authorizations Table 11 Group Authorizations window General tab fields Field Description Group name Identifying name for the group Description Description of the group Name User IDs of users who are members of this group This field cannot be modified To add or delete a user use the Member Of panel in the User Authorizations window Full Name Full name of the user This field cannot be modified LDAP Groups The log on procedure must authenticate the identifiers of the user against external LDAP directories Users who are not defined in the Control M EM Authorization Facility must belong to groups in the LDAP directory These LDAP groups must be associated with Control M EM authorization groups through the Control M EM Authorization Facility To associate an LDAP group with a Control M EM authorization group 1 Select the LDAP Groups tab in the Group Authorizations window 2 Define a name for the group in the field below LDAP Groups Reference 3 Click OK Member Of tab actions Table 12 User Authorizations window Member Of tab fields Field Description Not A Member of List of groups of whi
106. table that was most recently ordered click Recent You can use this option only if you are forcing not ordering jobs and or Sub tables To force jobs and or Sub tables without adding them to a table click Stand Alone You can use this option only if you are forcing not ordering jobs and or Sub tables To select a SMART Table click Select Then click the displayed ellipsis and in the displayed Select Active Group dialog box select the SMART Table to which to add the jobs You can use this option only if you are forcing not ordering jobs If you chose Recent or Selected to add jobs and or Sub tables to the SMART Table even if jobs and or Sub tables with the same name already exist in the table click Duplicate 5 Click Order or Force Control M User Guide Activating third party applications Activating third party applications The Applications Activation feature enables you to insert job processing parameters from a Control M job or SMART Table into a command line used to activate a third party program To use this feature you must perform the steps described in this section 1 Create an Activate Application definition 2 Use the definition you created to activate the application After you have created an Activate Application definition you can reuse it as needed to active the application To create an Activate Application definition 1 In the Control M EM window choose Tools gt Activate Appli
107. that successor jobs can run BackUpAllSystems is a predecessor job to at least one other job To establish the dependency between this job and its successor jobs the following prerequisite conditions are defined either can be used by the successor jobs m An appropriate Out prerequisite condition is defined in the Conditions tab The date defined for this Out prerequisite condition is the keyword ODAT to ensure that the condition is added to the system with the working date the job was forced The symbol in the Effect column instructs Control M to add the condition m An additional prerequisite condition is defined in the Steps tab as follows An On statement stmt codes OK is defined to instruct Control M that the accompanying Do statement is performed if the job ends OK A Do statement adds a condition with a date value of ODAT indicating that the job s task has been completed The symbol in the parameter column indicates that the condition is added rather than deleted NOTE ________ _ _____ mM This condition could have alternatively been defined as Out prerequisite conditions in the Conditions tab Shouting appropriate notification when the job ends After this job has ended successfully that is completed the backups it shouts a very urgent notification to the CIO indicating that the task is completed This Shout action is defined in the job s PostProc tab Appendix B 379 Handli
108. the Analysis menu select Critical Path 4 In the Critical Path dialog box m in the Use area select the measure to be used to calculate the critical path Average Runtime or Last Runtime m you can specify an Overlapping Tolerance in seconds This represents the maximum time in seconds that the end of one job can overlap the start of the subsequent job which impacts critical path calculation NOTE Jobs that do not have runtime statistics have an expected runtime of 0 and are not factored into the critical path calculation 5 Click Find Path The number of nodes in the path and the total runtime for the path are displayed in the dialog box The number of job nodes in the critical path is listed in the dialog box and those job nodes are selected in the flow diagram A display area opens at the bottom of the dialog box and displays the Details list which is a list of those jobs and their details for example current status order ID RBA For a summary of actions you can perform in the dependency Details list see Working with predecessor and successor job details Details list on page 261 TIP If the details display area does not open click Details which alternately displays or hides this display area Chapter 22 Monitoring and intervening in production 259 Checking predecessor and successor job flows To display the details of a job s predecessors that failed 1 In the flow diagram or the navigation tree
109. the Ex ITMaintenance application tsiever ieee iu decls ee cheese saws AENEA tahoe scl sean Handling IT job backup needs 4 5105 sess ceeteeieesareors ea sans Handling emergency situations 22s dja ety stteden Sete aya rnu Handling component shutdown needs 0000s eee eee Appendix C Formats values and functions Pattern matching SEIN PS ictyecedgdys Vet eey Nt eeneys teeeG ine eeu d vex Weng SOL Wildcards ess tysce vp eetier Reese cere pnd per a eee Valid functions for Template editor and condition formats Appendix D Checking job and table processing definition validity Checking the validity of job and table processing definitions Appendix E Troubleshooting Connectivity problems wczcvad erie tac helaayus eek eye eRe deeded y EN Reporting Facility connectivity errors ienchs se ewined Seniesa kes Index 387 387 390 391 393 393 395 395 398 401 12 Control M User Guide db Figures Control M Desktop displaying a draft yu s cecusencees cee anren rrean 29 Control M Enterprise Manager displaying a ViewPoint 000005 30 Condition node in the flow diagram 02 4t nie twain ie ened eRe yas 36 Jeb CUS 108M jects heed eee ede hea eee CONTR Rea ees a ER geen denis 80 Scheduling tab in the job editing form fiche ede eos RE od ee dee Ras 89 Scheduling tab in the SMART Table editing form 6 130 Table Mana Ger sk ase rie be py ee ee eae been eee ven een ees
110. the YYMMDD format For Start Time From and To and End Time From and To use the YYYYMMDDhhmmss format m Fields can contain several criteria separated by commas for example Control M A B m The Job Status and TaskType fields each have a button _ that when clicked opens an appropriate dialog box with relevant check boxes You can select all check boxes by clicking A You can clear all check boxes by clicking XI NOTE m If you do not select any check boxes all options are loaded m Do not select both Emergency and Critical or no jobs will be displayed m Task type for z OS jobs can correspond to the following fields of UNIX jobs Task Type Cyclic and Emergency To correctly filter on certain task types for z OS jobs specify the desired states for example Cyclic or Critical along with the desired task type For example to filter for Cyclic Jobs select Cyclic Only in the main dialog box and Job in the Task Type dialog box m For BMC Batch Impact Manager users Check the Included in Business Service check box to filter on jobs belong to a critical batch service 4 To save this definition for later reuse click H To save with a different name type the new name in the Filter Presets field before clicking H Cl IIM I IMI m Dynamic filter definitions are stored locally The default storage location is under the user profile directory which can be configured differently using the Environment
111. the right top corner of a column header and select a filtering option m Right click on any column header and choose Filter Editor Use the Filter Builder to enter advanced filtering criteria 3 To set display preferences for example always displaying the Alerts window on top choose the appropriate option in View menu Working with alerts The Alerts window is used to view the alert s status and severity urgency according to the Shout Urgency parameter in the job processing definition Alerts first appear in the Alerts window with a status of Not Noticed As you examine and work with the alerts you can change their status Alerts that are being handled are indented and grayed The Alerts facility enables you to attach notes to alerts For example you might want to attach a note indicating the name of the person assigned to handle the alert You can also open an alert into a local ViewPoint which can help you examine and analyze the job that prompted the alert and its work environment This can help you trace the cause of the problem and troubleshoot it You can open multiple local ViewPoints NOTE To perform the actions explained below you must be connected to the relevant Gateway for example to update the alert status and severity To display alerts with severity identifying colors In the Alerts window choose View gt Color Scheme gt Old Scheme To display the details of a particular alert opening the
112. the rule s entry field Separate multiple values by commas 4 Fill in other regular scheduling data 5 If you specified Month Day rules that are relative to a calendar fill in the calendar name in the Month Day area If you specified Week Day rules that are relative to a calendar fill in the calendar name in the Week Day area Chapter 4 Defining how jobs should run 95 Defining complex scheduling criteria using rules 96 EXAMPLE Schedule the job on the last day of the month 1 Click Rules in the Month Days area 2 In the Regular Rules tab in the field under the label Order the job on the n th calendar days counting from the end of the month Ln enter 1 3 Click OK The results will be as follows m Ina month with 31 days the job will be ordered on the 31st day of the month m Ina month with 30 days the job will be ordered on the 30th day of the month m Ina month with 28 days the job will be ordered on the 28th day of the month EXAMPLE A Schedule the job on the last day of the month if that day falls on a workday Monday Friday If the last day is a weekend shift the scheduling to closest preceding workday 1 Click Rules in the Month Days area 2 In the Regular Rules tab in the field under the label Order the job on the n th calendar days counting from the end of the month Ln enter 1 3 Click OK 4 Between the Month Days area and the Week Days area click And 5 In the Week Days area sele
113. the sample above with each global condition representing one direction CheckS updates conditions with an West2East prefix Updates to these conditions are passed towards the East to London CheckL In London checks intranet status and updates global conditions starting with the prefixes defined below This job updates two global conditions instead of one Intranet as was done in the sample above with each global condition representing one direction CheckL updates conditions with an East2West prefix Updates to these conditions are passed towards the West to Seattle MaintainS Dummy job processing definition in Seattle for removing global conditions that are no longer necessary serves administrative and maintenance purposes only MaintainS tracks and deletes unnecessary conditions by updating dummy global conditions MaintainL Dummy job processing definition in London for removing global conditions that are no longer necessary serves administrative and maintenance purposes only MaintainL tracks and deletes unnecessary conditions by updating dummy global conditions Define the following job global condition prefixes Prefix From Control Ms To Control Ms East2West Seattle London West2East London Seattle Processing flow an overview The following figure provides an overview of the processing flow of jobs defined when implementing the recommended practice for s
114. the user is allowed to modify resides Owner Owner user ID on whose behalf the job is executed Node ID Group The computers on which the user has authority to change jobs Node ID or group on which you want the job to run Notes m The lt local gt Node ID Group value should be used when the Node ID Group field in the job editing form is left empty m The Node ID Group field is not applied to jobs running on Control M for z OS For more information see Chapter 4 Defining how jobs should run Authorizations window Privileges tab This panel specifies access levels that determine the actions that a user or member of a group can or cannot perform on different parts of Control M EM Actions that are permitted or denied for each access level are described in Table 17 Table 17 Privileges tab access levels Access Level Description None Denies access to the component Browse Can view and refresh the component Update Permits adding and modifying Control M information Full Permits adding modifying and deleting Control M information Default Valid for user authorizations Not valid for group authorizations Inherits the permissions from the group to which the user belongs Chapter 2 Working with Control M Desktop and Control M EM 59 Tabs in the User and Group Authorizations windows TIP To change the access level for one of the row items click the row in the
115. this job Add a calendar to the list using the Select Rule Based Calendar button which opens the Select Rule Based Calendar window where the following options are available m All Parent Inherits all the RBCs from the direct parent table If an RBC is added to the parent table it is automatically associated with the job Default m Specific Only the RBCs selected from the list are associated with the job Note In a SMART Sub table the Select Rule Based Calendar window only lists RBCs which are defined in the Sub table s parent table Use the Remove button to remove calendars from the list Note Control M level Ruled Based Calendars can only be used with Control M Servers version 7 0 00 or later Month Days A calendar and text box used to indicate the days of each month on which the job should be scheduled Month Days check boxes Each day of the month is 1 31 is indicated by a check box text box Indicates the selected month days and rules You can also specify values directly in the box separated by commas Calendar Name of a user defined calendar for use with the Month Days parameter to indicate a set of working days For more information see Chapter 8 Using predefined calendars to schedule jobs In various Control M and Control M EM utilities this parameter is also known as DCAL and DAYCAL And Or Logical connector establishing the relationship between
116. to the ViewPoint name with Filt appended to it Chapter 20 Selecting jobs to monitor 247 Alternative method for defining ViewPoints the ViewPoint wizard 248 Control M User Guide hme 1 Monitoring and handling alerts This chapter presents the following topics TnithOdUCHON lt i3 4 6346 Eriet boosted Sane Sed SENG Sea Ged bas beens Geeks 249 Connecting to the Global Alerts Server sc cic ei0 eve geasewevir eek eee eres 250 Displaying GIGS siao aan aA a tiles aE a E a beauties gees A es 250 Working with alerts scicbdsueiotew tele eee sdti tei eeeeews etek EUME E 251 Introduction An important way to monitor your production environment is to monitor alerts An alert is a message that indicates that a problem or exception has occurred for a job Alerts are monitored and handled from the Alerts window which must be connected to a Global Alerts Server GAS Alerts can originate from any of the following m Shout facility a job processing definition can include instructions in the Shout or Do Shout parameter to send a message to the Alerts window m Jobs ending not ok two system parameters AlertOnAbend and DownCreAlerts can automatically generate alerts when a job terminates with an Ended not OK status A communication breakdown for example between Control M and Control M EM will generate an alert BMC Batch Impact Manager which can be used to relay messages of special importance For more informatio
117. to create a table See To create a table on page 147 to establish a new table as a SMART Table See To create a table on page 147 to edit a table Select the table and click Table Details For additional information see To edit a table on page 148 to copy a table Select the table and click Li Copy For additional details see To copy a table on page 149 to delete tables Select the table s click the selection arrow by the Delete button and choose the appropriate Delete option For additional details see To delete tables on page 149 To create a table TIP You do not need to explicitly create tables without SMART attributes for jobs When you specify a table name in the job editing form if the table does not already exist Control M Desktop automatically creates it You can define SMART attributes for the table by editing it manually For more information see To edit a table on page 148 1 In the Table Manager window click FH New which opens the table editing form dialog box 2 Fill in the details for the new table in the various fields Fields marked with an asterisk are mandatory Chapter5 Organizing and managing jobs in tables 147 Managing tables 3 Fill in the User daily field as follows but only if one of the following applies m If the table should be ordered by a specific User Daily job specify the name of the job 1 10 charact
118. vee 309 Chapter 25 Service monitoring 311 Service Monitoring OVELVIOW sesede esp kise m anpi e ankka ae iana tee e REA E E 312 Monitoring SCIVICeS eee ver rreren dikeen etek eee eee a ia een eee Rew sees 312 Chapter 26 Introduction to analyzing and optimizing production 317 Analyzing and optimizing the system 6 cece cece eee eee 317 Chapter 27 Defining and generating reports 319 Introduction 0 eee eee eee e nee e been eee nn enes 319 Av il blefreport types scrinia eae ee DAE ARAE 320 Active report types vein is CoRR Oat hen rni iei pak E aiie e E ia Viii iea k 320 Definition report typ s sess sapaia piragi eee See a ANA a eeaies 321 General TEDOTUTY DCS vriet bee ed pE dee ears ee E ed uae e AEE 322 BMC Batch Impact Manager tepartty pes o 05 s0se ves ned one es eens 323 Control M Por cast report ty pes i scvsnaueevis celain ani ddienis Candas 323 Starting the Control M Reporting Facility naass wewiewaw ade ve Von ees 325 Generating STO DO 24 eta ect edt eed eee ocd EE Ladue OR E pease s 326 Displaying and working With reports cvecsie cen ev biet seein eer vere es 327 Defining templates and Ad Hoc TepOtlSsj1os des eden se eaes ahedasdetsadedans 328 Creating templates using the Report Wizard 0 eee 330 Generating and exporting reports in Datla rs syne 4 bees Sees a Ves Bie 336 Using command ling patameters lt c1cviw ss cheep see nunan rruaren nets es 337 InpUbateUMmieniG Tiles hadecrins
119. year from the New Year dialog box and click OK 3 Select the required days or use the following short cuts To select multiple days select a date and drag over the required days To clear currently selected dates click the appropriate date m To apply the same set of dates to all the months Chapter8 Using predefined calendars to schedule jobs 165 To define Periodic calendars A Click Advanced B In the displayed Advanced Dates Selection dialog box select the dates by clicking any combination of specific dates column and row headers and days of the week C Click OK 4 In Control M for z OS only if a date in the calendar is not scheduled schedule the closest scheduled date in the calendar instead m Right click the date and select to schedule the date if it is scheduled or the closest next date if it is not scheduled m Right click the date and select to schedule the date if it is scheduled or the closest previous date if it is not scheduled a Toclear the ona date right click a date and select the blank 5 To add an additional year to the calendar with the same settings click Copy In the New Year dialog box select the additional year and click OK 6 When you have finished defining the calendar click Apply to save the calendar changes in the Control M EM database To use the calendar you must perform an upload To define Periodic calendars 1 Perform step 1 and step 2 in the procedure for d
120. you need to start understand navigate and manipulate Control M Desktop and Control M EM features 26 Starting Control M Desktop 2 ec r2reetieee sssr ver eededeeed erie eee eee ens 26 Starting Control M EM lt lt 20s2t cp sate eae ete ae ie whet ie caiadeenciaes 27 Understanding the Control M Desktop and Control M EM layout 29 Adj sting Mie display eiisisesesirisikeigeentit eye Peale Piei E pE EERE 35 Creating workspaces and loading jobs into Control M Desktop 40 Navigating in the flow Csiagtait 5 sen ose ohne ete eee eee teen ee ea ee 41 Identifying predecessor and successor jObS 1 0 2 6c 42 Printing the flow diagram ished ikea ace eee ied edhe Pada e RIS 43 Changing your password s saser Cie htetin honk er hGas Ceding een es 44 Assigning authorizations 042021 snes unde auie bn Keeees pees PMR yes DEae 45 Chapter 2 Working with Control M Desktop and Control M EM 25 Starting Control M Desktop This chapter provides basic information you need to start understand navigate and manipulate Control M Desktop and Control M EM features Control M Desktop enables you to create and edit job processing definitions one of the first tasks that you are likely to perform Control M Desktop also enables you to define other entities such as tables job templates and calendars After defining these entities you can use Control M Desktop to move entities that you have defined into produc
121. you want to display m If you are working in the Control M Desktop window for jobs only not for tables double click the job s node in the flow diagram or navigation tree Control M User Guide Managing jobs in tables The job or table editing form opens For instructions on filling in the job or table editing form see Creating and editing jobs on page 83 NOTE If the job processing definition cannot be updated for example the table is locked or you do not have authorization the Table Content dialog box contains a Browse button instead of an Edit button To move a job to a different Control M table application or group Perform one of the following actions m In the job editing form for the job redefine the relevant parameter for example Control M m InControl M Desktop display the appropriate hierarchy and in the navigation tree drag the job to the new location To delete jobs from a table In the flow diagram navigation tree list display or Table Content window select the jobs and click Delete NOTE m Deleting a job deletes it from the draft or XML file and therefore from any Control M Desktop panes in which it is displayed m The job will be deleted from the database when you write the table back to the Control M EM database m If you delete a table all jobs in the table are deleted automatically If a table is locked for editing in the local workspace and is then deleted it
122. you want to edit and click 4 Edit the required fields as described in Table 31 5 Click OK The updated service permission appears in the User Authorizations lt user gt 6 Click OK To delete a service permission 1 Double click a user The User Authorizations lt user gt window appears 2 Click the Services tab 3 Select the service permission that you want to delete and click The service permission is deleted Chapter 2 Working with Control M Desktop and Control M EM 69 Tabs in the User and Group Authorizations windows 70 Control M User Guide Defining the production environment This part presents the following topics Chapter 3 Defining the production environment 0 c cece eee eee 73 Chapter 4 Defining how jobs should run 2v lt ea savas cdinuid cdadiae adeeied ems Z7 Chapter 5 Organizing and managing jobs in tables 0 e eee eee 143 Chapter 8 Using predefined calendars to schedule jobs 0s 0cs0c0sseseecee een 163 Chapter 9 Setting up templates for standardized job and table definition 171 Chapter 10 Creating and updating many jobs at once 0 eee eee eee 177 Chapter 23 Managing Wo rkloads iy tein de ip ita a kakiri hc nao ccd 279 Chapter 11 Setting up definitions for periodic statistics collection 0 185 Part 2 71 72 Control M User Guide cme Defining the production environment Your largest and most fundamental task whe
123. your production environments You can for example learn and understand why your enterprise has missed SLAs These reports can help you identify and correct main bottlenecks before there is a negative impact on production For information about forecast related reports see Control M Forecast report types on page 323 Control M Forecast estimates rely on historical data fine tuned by the user You can use the util utility to import and export history and forecast information For details see the description of the utility in the Control M Utility Guide Control M User Guide Table 51 Control M Forecast integration Where to look for integrated features in Control M Desktop Feature validating scheduling definitions graphically for a single job Location the Schedule Forecast window accessed from the Scheduling tab in the job editing form and in the table editing form Specify the scheduling criteria and click one of the following m Forecast in the job editing form m Calendar Forecast in the table editing form m Table Forecast in the table editing form validating scheduling criteria graphically for multiple nodes the Schedule Forecast window accessed by selecting the nodes in a flow diagram Right click one of the nodes and choose Forecast from the pop up menu validating scheduling criteria graphically for jobs in a table the Scheduling Manager window accessed by selecting Tools gt
124. 124 2 In the To field specify the Shout destination in the Control M Valid values are user ID user e mail a specific terminal system console alerts window specify EM as the To destination Control M log 3 Select the message urgency regular urgent or very urgent 4 Specify the message 1 255 characters 5 Repeat these steps as necessary to shout as many messages needed in different situations You can use the buttons above the Shout area to add delete copy or move shout statements up and down NOTE Shout When Late Sub applies only if the job is not submittable that is if a runtime criterion such as an in condition or quantitative resource is not satisfied at the specified time However if a job is ordered after the specified time but starts running immediately because it meets all runtime criteria the Late Sub parameter doesn t apply EXAMPLE I If the BackupAlSystems job ends not OK shout an alert indicating the job s completion code In the PostProc tab do the following 1 In the When field select NOTOK 2 In the To field specify EM 3 In the Urgency field select Urgent 4 In the Message field specify Backup failed Completion code COMPSTAT Control M User Guide Defining how to handle the job s sysout when the job ends OK EXAMPLE Other jobs depend on the CalcExpenses job being executed in a timely fashion If the CalcExpenses job does not finish executing by 8 00 PM shout an
125. 144 Table Content dialog box si ieee ds eae hae 8 Ra oN ee ds Ea 151 Job Comparison dialog DOK acs ng bee ea euete tae eenen euewie ere Reuss wes 156 Template Manager 2 676631374 ee3ie i ect aeghd lenin EEREN DEE ESE meena 172 Template j b editing form o2 ue oteae ce et eee rye en ee eae Lie er eeRe kere es 173 Find and Update window cae eens pie Ray ake eee RA tN gkko Re eel 179 Order Force Parameters dialog box in Control M Desktop 199 Filter Definition dialog box s0 0260ci 048 pee eddrers Siok Sa Ree eaee ees 242 Alerts Wind OW Areri wort eae eodsace nein wei via wae eee ei oe neuen dnd AG eas 250 Order Force dialog box with advanced fields in Control M EM 273 Filled in Activate Applications Editor dialog box 0 000 ee eee 276 Reporting Facility Start Page WINdOW 5 20s 00sitsers deed nee e eee beeen nee 326 Report template filter definition 44 gece S bynes ees eas engl balwekeeebes 340 Column header pop up menu for list displays 0 000 e eee eee 348 List Display Pop up Mens uncer ecit es teins eee eile eed ee DK 348 14 Control M User Guide bme O Tables Node and tree icons ssrsserrorisorisr irst iraro eee eee eee ee eee eset e eens 31 Additional icons in Control M EM only 0 c ee eee eee 32 Job status indicated color 0 een en etn nnn ees 32 High level node status colors Defaults 0 cc cece ec eee eee eens 33 Sample node types vox
126. 2East Check N oe a il Ea Check Mi at is m cd eea East2Wvest Maint 7 The cycle is repeated beginning with Step 3 on page 222 224 Control M User Guide Monitoring and intervening in production This part presents the following topics Chapter 17 Introduction to monitoring and intervention cicvinseiewa what vans ean wa Chapter 18 Ensuring Control M components are communicating 00 Chapter 19 Planning production with Control M Forecast 0000 eee eee eee Chapter 20 Selecting jobs to MO ILOF esycixsts eed cree i amsaa cena eens Chapter 21 Monitoring and handling alerts 2404 24s citeevivintegescs ieee vedeessaeins Chapter 22 Monitoring and intervening in produchOM o 200s 2cs00 cs eee eve ven ee ee ees Chapter 24 Control M Self Service Managements ccsosnipiaawa teenie asewe peeks Chapter 25 Service INONMOLING sesde eke RSA REA ee RS eed E eE kD Eie A Part 4 226 Control M User Guide a Introduction to monitoring and intervention This chapter presents the following topics Monitoring and intervening in production ce s2s1ae4 eke res ee eadaeedsdaos 227 Where to co trom here 4c cy see adhat oa eye e Rag SERS ee eee la 227 Monitoring and intervening in production After you have implemented job scheduling under Control M your next task is to ensure that Control M is up and running and that jobs are processing as required Ideally
127. 303 Creating a service rule m Manual rule Enables you to inspect job definitions manually before you generate the service definitions This allows you to determine which service definitions to generate for display in Control M Self Service The following procedures describes how to create edit copy and delete service rules and generate service definitions from the Service Rule wizard Creating a service rule on page 304 Editing a service rule on page 307 a a m Copying a service rule on page 308 m Deleting a service rule on page 308 a Generating services from a rule on page 309 Creating a service rule 304 This procedure describes how to create a service rule which enables you to manually or automatically generate services for jobs Before You Begin Successful completion of Starting Control M Desktop on page 26 To create a service rule 1 From the Tools menu select Service Definition Manager The Service Definition Manager window appears 2 Click Add New Service Rule The Service Rule wizard appears 3 In the Name and Description fields type the name and description of the service rule 4 Do one of the following If you want Control M EM server to automatically generate services by inspecting the jobs in the AJF leave the Active checkbox selected and click Next m If you want to manually create services for job definitions unselect the Active checkbox and click Nex
128. 4 Defining how jobs should run 141 Defining a condition format 142 Control M User Guide Organizing and managing jobs in tables This chapter presents the following topics Managing Tables ines doh ons oierane eek ures aed eke ben i putai kangen 144 Managing jobs im tables cucis4seiadat JRL e eee eae vat SNTE En PUG eee eee 150 Introduction You can manage tables and jobs from the Control M Desktop window that is the flow diagram or list display and the navigation tree m Table Manager and its Table Content window available in Control M Desktop You can choose either method at any time Factors that might affect your choice are m where you are currently working m whether you want to work in your workspace use the Control M Desktop window or directly in the Control M EM database choose the Table Manager m the task you want to perform Chapter5 Organizing and managing jobs in tables 143 Managing tables B NOTE The following tasks are described elsewhere in this book m To move jobs and tables to production or to manually schedule jobs see Chapter 13 Putting jobs into production m If Control M Forecast is installed to generate a schedule forecast for tables that is graphically the scheduling criteria of the jobs in the table see the Control M Business Service Management Solution User Guide Managing tables To display the Table manager select Tools gt Table Manager or click jj i
129. 4 on page 266 summarizes the intervention actions you can perform on jobs in the active jobs file Control M EM accesses and updates the relevant Control M server database Chapter 22 Monitoring and intervening in production 265 Performing manual job intervention 266 TE NOTE Actions are disabled when communication is not synchronized Table 54 Job intervention actions Part 1 of 2 Intervention hold stop processing the job You must hold the job before you update its details in the job editing form in the active jobs file Note m If the job has not started to execute Hold prevents it from executing even after all submission criteria are satisfied m Ifthe job is executing Hold stops its execution but the job maintains its Executing status m Ifthe job has completed executing while it is Held it cannot be manually rerun The job remains in this state until you release it using the Free option Menu option Hold free resume the processing of the job If you held a job you must free it before processing can resume Free activate third party applications For details see Activating third party applications on page 275 Activate Application specify criteria and resources to be ignored For instructions see To bypass selected submission criteria on page 267 Bypass confirm that Control M should process a job that requires manual confirmation that is the job has
130. 42 displaying on start up 360 dynamically filtering display 240 filtering 239 opening an alert in 252 overview of 237 properties when displaying jobs 261 setting color of archived 363 ViewPoint wizard 246 W What If scenario 359 wildcards in filtering and pattern matching 387 wizard ViewPoint 246 Workload report 323 workspaces changing 40 setting defaults for 353 407 ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ 408 Control M User Guide Notes 200335
131. 8 Control M User Guide Managing tables WARNING m If you modify a table associated with more than one User Daily and then upload it to Control M that table is removed from all User Dailies except the one it is associated with in Control M EM m To modify the extended set of table parameters for a SMART Table you must do so in the Scheduling tab of the table editing form For instructions see Defining scheduling criteria for a job basics on page 88 To copy a table 1 In the Table Manager select the table to be copied and click gi Copy 2 In the Copy Table dialog box specify a name for the new table in the Name field modify the other criteria as needed and click Save or Save amp Close which saves the table in the Control M EM database NOTE If you specify a different target Control M it must have the same platform and version as the original table s Control M To use the table you must perform an upload For instructions see Uploading tables to the Control M database on page 196 To delete tables In the Table Manager select the table click the selection arrow by the Delete button and then choose the appropriate Delete option as follows of Delete I bh amp Delete Remote Local Force Delete Remote Local Local Delete Remote Delete m To delete the tables from both the Control M EM database and the Control M database click Delete R L This option is the defaul
132. Alert Details dialog box either m Inthe Alerts window select the alert and choose Actions gt Properties a Double click on the alert information Chapter 21 Monitoring and handling alerts 251 Working with alerts 252 To change the status of an alert In the Actions menu of the Alerts window choose the appropriate status as follows m To indicate that you ve noticed but not necessarily handled the alert choose Notice To change the status back to Not Noticed choose Unnotice a To indicate that you ve handled the alert choose Handle To change the status from Handled to Unhandled choose Unhandle To change the urgency of an alert 1 In the Alerts window select the alert and choose Actions gt Properties 2 In the Alert Details dialog box select the urgency in the Severity field and click OK To find and focus on the job that produced the alert in the Flow Diagram In the Alerts window select the alert and choose Actions gt Find Job The relevant node is displayed and selected in the Control M Enterprise Manager ViewPoint window To add a note to an alert 1 In the Alerts window select the alert and choose Actions gt Properties 2 In the Alert Details dialog box type the note in the Note field click OK To export the list of alerts to a csv file In the Alerts window choose File gt Export In the displayed dialog box provide a path file name and a file type of csv and click Save To print
133. Communicating with the GUI Server 2i lt atenwad se eide ed cadena dean ea Automatically reconnecting to the GUI Server 00 0 c eee eee Manually intervening in the reconnection process 000e ee eee Communicating with Control M Servers 6 0 0 c cece eee eee ene na Chapter 19 Planning production with Control M Forecast Introduction to Control M Forecast 00 0c ccc cece eee eee nes Control M Forecast integration iciecin doar tiwrdrs idee er ide RE acd as Chapter 20 Selecting jobs to monitor INGPOCUCHOM 4tn seta cee seen raiu Seii ieee Cae EE eet ete eee ee eee Selecting a VieWROUIN 2123 cceaye wrens errekete etre Eth E E Displaying nodes in their own View Pott scs caesa cia andisa vere eew cea ws Filtering the ViewPoint display ce ees ive Gideon teens en tawen veanbens Switching NCES 3 6 aoe canara eE E Reha eee ea Control M User Guide 195 195 196 198 200 203 204 205 205 207 207 209 209 213 213 215 216 218 218 218 227 227 227 229 229 229 230 230 233 233 234 Defining dynamic filtefs ssis ss sessa s aone eie teen Rhea chee dee eee wks 240 Defining global filters v 00 rencene keke eeertedeas eee ee eK ees eeaw ree tees 242 Denning View POIs i e siracsoeresteeecieeataneees deeetek eee AEEA 243 Defining the set of jobs to load to memory collections 4 244 Defining the display hierarchy cnicrecceeredivar e
134. Control M Reporting facility defaults For details see Appendix A Customizing the interfaces Available report types Report types are categorized as follows General included in this category are the Alerts report and Audit report Definition data for the report are taken from the Definition environment Active data for the report are taken from the Active environment BIM reports for sites operating BMC Batch Impact Manager Forecast reports for sites operating Control M Forecast For convenience there is also an All category that lists all report types Available report types are described in this topic grouped by category NOTE m Several sample report templates are provided with the Control M Reporting facility during installation When you generate sample outputs using these templates you might in some cases be prompted to supply input parameter values m In addition to the reports described in this topic some reports for example the Forecast Analysis set of reports including the Workload report and the Trend Analysis report are available only if you purchased other BMC Software products such as Control M Forecast Only administrators can run Control M Forecast reports For details see Control M Forecast report types on page 323 Active report types 320 m Active Jobs report lists all jobs and job details determined by selection and display criteria It also includes a count o
135. Even Do OK EXAMPLE If the job ends NOTOK add a condition that triggers a job that now becomes necessary On Statement stmt code NOTOK Do Condition Name JobX_NotOK Date odat sign EXAMPLE Set the status of the job to NOTOK if the SYSOUT indicates that the password directory is not found In such a case the SYSOUT of the UNIX job might contain the following cp etc passwd tmp cp etc passwdx tmp cp etc passwdx No such file or directory cp etc passwd usr kvm xyzzy cp usr kvm xyzzy Permission denied exit 12 On Statement stmt cp etc passwdx tmp code cp no file Do NOTOK EXAMPLE Rerun the job if the SYSOUT indicates that a particular file to be copied was not found On Statement stmt copy job411 dat code File not found Do Rerun Control M User Guide Defining conditional processing under z OS Defining conditional processing under z OS When defining On statements for jobs running under z OS you specify the particular start and end procedure and program step to be checked for a particular code result Optionally you can define and name step ranges and then reference the step ranges by specifying their names preceded by an asterisk in On statements 1 To define a step range in the Step Range area of the Steps panel do the following A B C Specify a name for the step range Fill in the start program and procedure step and the end program and procedure step Repeat
136. Guide Defining scheduling criteria for a job basics Table 32 Scheduling tab parameters Part 4 of 4 Parameter Description PDS Schedule the job only when the number of tracks in the partitioned dataset falls below the specified minimum This parameter is generally used for jobs that clean the PDS Minimum Minimum number of clean tracks To schedule the job on specific days week days and months Most commonly you will want to specify some combination of months days of the month and days of the week You do this by performing the following as needed m Click the days of month in the Month Days area m Click the days of the week in the Week Days area m Set the relationship between the selected Month days and Week days by clicking And or Or m Click the months in the Month area a Additionally or alternatively you can specify specific dates months and days for example 08 09 in the date area EXAMPLE The job should be scheduled every day 1 Click All in the Month Days area 2 Click All in the Months area EXAMPLE The job should be scheduled on the first day following the end of each quarter 1 Click 1 in the calendar in the Month Days area 2 Click Apr Jul Oct and Jan in the Month area EXAMPLE The job should be scheduled every Monday through Friday 1 Click All in the Months area 2 Click Mon Tue Wed Thu Fri in the Week Days area Chapter4 Defining how jobs
137. Job DataCenter Version lt 700 Mij j Ej r swe Gysave cose E coe a saveacrder f coc E Sarve as Template Templates E5 SMART crstrituted I General F5 scheduling Sh execution 2 condeions G Resources os set E steps G2 Posterac Heraschy Job Meme TART abe Parent Jable ranTTsbie Task Type it T Embe ded Scrint Ed Application Taped gop Tereug M i o i 2 If you are creating a new job or SMART table do the following steps A Inthe Apply Template field in the toolbar select the template to be applied Optional You can select the value lt No Template gt The product is supplied with a default job and default SMART Table template for each platform Only job templates are listed in the job editing form and only SMART table templates are listed in the table editing form Icons indicate whether templates are job templates or SMART Table templates You can modify the templates or define others For details see Chapter 9 Setting up templates for standardized job and table definition TIP You can use a SMART Table template not only for defining SMART Tables but also for KA defining jobs in a SMART Table NOTE Which template types are displayed in the template list can be customized For details see the customization option List all templates on page 352 in Appendix A Customizing the interfaces
138. Job MEM name fields In these cases the Job MEM name value is hidden Ignoring prerequisite conditions if the predecessor jobs that set them are unscheduled If predecessor jobs in a SMART Table are not scheduled on a day that successor jobs are scheduled the conditions required by the successor jobs cannot be satisfied and by default the successor jobs are not submitted However you can override this default To instruct Control M to ignore prerequisite condition requirements if the predecessor jobs that set them are not scheduled in the Adjust Condition field in the Execution tab of the table editing form select Yes The default is No required conditions are not ignored Defining scheduling criteria for a SMART Table The Scheduling tab of the SMART Table editing form is similar to the Scheduling tab of the job editing form but in addition it enables you to define multiple Table level and select Control M level RBCs These are sets of scheduling criteria that can be associated with jobs and Sub tables in the SMART Table NOTE Control M level RBCs are applicable when using Control M Server version 7 0 00 and later A SMART Table is ordered when its RBCs have been calculated and the scheduling criteria has been met A row is added in the Active Jobs file for the table The contents of the SMART table jobs and Sub tables then pass the order procedure A job s scheduling criteria is calculated as well as its AND OR relatio
139. L EXCEL_DO for data only PDF DOC HTML TXT or XML file path Specifies the full filename of the output file Param Specifies the mane and value for each parameter in the form name value Wildcard can be used for text fields Template Specifies the name of the template path Specifies the folder in which the template file is located Chapter 27 Defining and generating reports 337 Input arguments file Input arguments file 338 Input for the utility is an arguments file containing the XML specifications for the report to be generated including all required parameters The following sample XML arguments file is provided at em_home Data Reporting sample_args xml A list of required elements and values for the arguments is provided in the DTD file em_home Data Reporting emreportcli dtd The emreportcli input arguments file parameters are described in Table 66 Syntax emreportcli u lt user gt p lt password gt pf lt password file gt s lt server name gt arg lt XML file name gt NOTE If you are using only a client installation you must include the bin directory in the file path For example c Program Files lt Instance Name gt bin emreportcli exe u lt user gt p lt password gt pf lt password file gt s lt GUI Server Name gt arg lt arguments file gt xml Control M User Guide Input arguments file Table 66 emreportcli utility input argument
140. L job which waited for the creation of its West2East Maint In condition runs and adds the East2West Maint condition which will trigger the CheckS job in Seattle deletes the West2East Maint condition locally deletes the East2West Check condition in both Seattle and London Again because this condition was already deleted in Seattle processing is minimal Searle abal Conditiens Server Landon 5 The cycle begins again The CheckS job is again triggered by its In condition East2West Maint this time not manually When the CheckS job runs it checks intranet status recreates the West2East Check condition which will trigger the CheckL job in London deletes the East2West Maint condition locally deletes the West2East Maint condition in both Seattle and London with minimal effect on processing Seatle Giekal Conditions Senne Loman haii 7 iten r eet Ea Cec a eer Arent cet Chapter 16 Establishing job dependencies across Control Ms 223 Bi directional global conditions 6 The CheckL job is again triggered by its West2East Check In condition and the cycle continues When the CheckL job runs it checks intranet status recreates the East2West Check condition deletes the West2East Check condition locally deletes the East2West Maint condition in both Seattle and London with minimal effect on processing Seattle Global Conditions Server Londan acs Weat
141. LLAS NY LA D S All data centers whose name starts with D and ends with S D S All data centers whose name starts with D ends with S and consists of six characters D ALL S All data centers whose name starts with D and ends with five letters matching the pattern signified by ALL S INY All data centers except for NY Appendix C 389 Using SQL wildcards Table 82 Examples of expressions Part 2 of 2 Pattern Includes LA NY D S Data centers LA and DALLAS excluding NY DALLAS TEXAS The data centers DALLAS and TEXAS D ABC All data centers whose name starts with D and whose second letter is A BorC D A E All data centers whose name starts with D whose second letter is in the range of A E and whose name consists of six characters D AB Z All data centers whose name starts with D and whose second letter is not in the range of B Z NY D S Data center NY and all data centers matching the pattern signified by D S Using SQL wildcards 390 The SQL wildcards m denotes any or no character m _ denotes any one character These wildcard characters when used in ViewPoint collections and filter definitions are evaluated as literal and _ characters not as wildcards Control M User Guide Valid functions for Template editor and condition formats Valid functions for Template editor and condition formats This table lists valid functions for use in the Temp
142. List Display pop up menu which is displayed by right clicking anywhere in the list display except the column header m Save the contents of the list display to a CSV file m Print the contents of the list display To save the contents of a list display to a CSV file Select Export to File in the pop up menu of the list display and perform the save in the Export to File dialog box csv files are comma delimited and can be used in applications such as Microsoft Excel To print the contents of a list display Select the Print option in the pop up menu of the list display Control M User Guide Customizing default options Customizing default options You can customize various default options for Control M Desktop Control M EM and the Control M Reporting facility To customize default options 1 Depending on the window you want to customize in the Control M EM GUI the Control M Desktop window or the Control M Reporting Facility window choose Tools gt Options 2 Select the appropriate panel change the defaults and click Ok Default options are described in the following sections Setting options for Control M Desktop This section presents tables with setting options for the following defaults General defaults Workspace defaults Flow diagram defaults Diagnostic defaults Confirmation defaults Forecast defaults General defaults Table 67 General settings General panel Part 1 of 3 Field option Cl
143. Manager window lt lt s 4 tia4a 4 pase i hae Bea eee Re ee hee RA 158 Viewing a job s NISIOLY 424 0ie bein eee tee rersicitew tidia eae oniinn Sous 160 Introduction You can explore versions of items from Control M Desktop tree view Table Content and flow diagram as well as the Version Manager window and the Table Content window from the Table Manager Depending on where you are working may determine which method is best for you The Control M Desktop Version Manager only directly affects the local workspace whereas operations that are performed through the Table Manager and online workspace immediately affect the Product Short database Exploring versions of definition entities This section describes how to explore definition entity versions using the Version Manager and Job History windows Chapter 7 Exploring and tracking versions of definition entities 157 Version Manager window Version Manager window 158 In the Version Manager window you can view job and table definitions for a specified date and time that corresponds to your specified filter criteria A list of the matched definitions appear indicating the changes made to the item since the specified date and time Each definition entity can be reviewed from the job or table editing form and then selected for a restore operation Multiple entities can be selected when performing the restore operation NOTE A restore action can only be applied in a local w
144. Month Day values and Week Day values Control M User Guide Defining scheduling criteria for a job basics Table 32 Scheduling tab parameters Part 2 of 4 Parameter Description Week Days Day s of the week on which to schedule the job This parameter consists of a series of check boxes for the days of the week Sunday through Saturday and a text box Values can be specified using the check boxes or the text box Note Regardless of which method is used the specified values are displayed both in the text box and the check boxes above it Weekday Each day Sunday through Saturday is indicated by check boxes a separate check box text box Indicates the selected week days and rules You can also specify values directly in the box separated by commas Example 1 2 3 4 5 would schedule the job on Monday through Friday assuming the site standard is 0 Sunday 1 Monday 6 Saturday Calendar Name of a user defined week based calendar WCAL calendar used together with parameter Week Days to specify a set of working days Months Months in which to order the job Conf Calendar Calendar used to confirm job scheduling dates This parameter consists of the following subparameters name Name of the calendar Shift When to schedule the job if the date is not confirmed Option Valid values are m Ignore Job Do not shift the job to a different date The job is not scheduled m Next D
145. NDED condition defined in the Conditions tab of each of its predecessor jobs These In prerequisite conditions are assigned a date value of ODAT m the field above the In Conditions work area in the Conditions tab defines an AND relationship between the In prerequisite conditions Appendix B 385 Handling component shutdown needs Ensuring that successor jobs can run After GatewayStopped ends successfully it adds the Out prerequisite condition EX_GatewayStopped with a date of ODAT and a in the Effects column that can be used as an In prerequisite condition by other jobs 386 Control M User Guide Appendix Formats values and functions This appendix presents the following topics Pattern matching strings xs 2h0 2th cones ee a ees eek gO e ESN es wee 387 Using SQL Wildcats 1s svaneier te bbs 4 phew Os eee ere Cee hae ere kate es 390 Valid functions for Template editor and condition formats 391 This chapter provides the following format rules valid values and functions m Pattern matching strings these can be used in fields that support wildcards m Valid functions these can be used in the Template editor discussed in Chapter 9 Setting up templates for standardized job and table definition and in Condition formats discussed in Defining dependencies for the current job on page 108 Pattern matching strings B Fields used to select data for example in the Table Manager windo
146. Open Group in the US and other countries The information included in this documentation is the proprietary and confidential information of BMC Software Inc its affiliates or licensors Your use of this information is subject to the terms and conditions of the applicable End User License agreement for the product and to the proprietary and restricted rights notices included in the product documentation Restricted rights legend U S Government Restricted Rights to Computer Software UNPUBLISHED RIGHTS RESERVED UNDER THE COPYRIGHT LAWS OF THE UNITED STATES Use duplication or disclosure of any data and computer software by the U S Government is subject to restrictions as applicable set forth in FAR Section 52 227 14 DFARS 252 227 7013 DFARS 252 227 7014 DFARS 252 227 7015 and DFARS 252 227 7025 as amended from time to time Contractor Manufacturer is BMC SOFTWARE INC 2101 CITYWEST BLVD HOUSTON TX 77042 2827 USA Any contract notices should be sent to this address Customer support You can obtain technical support by using the BMC Software Customer Support website or by contacting Customer Support by telephone or e mail To expedite your inquiry see Before contacting BMC Support website You can obtain technical support from BMC 24 hours a day 7 days a week at http www bmc com support From this website you can read overviews about support services and programs that BMC offers find the most current information abou
147. Ordering and forcing jobs E Click OK to add the tables to the list in the Tables panel 2 Repeat step 1 for other access levels if any and other tables 3 Click OK to save the result of the Add procedure To update a row in the Tables panel of an Authorizations window 1 Select a row Click Update to display that row in a Tables dialog box 2 Make the changes to the data in the text boxes of that dialog box 3 Click OK to save the result of the update Control M User Guide Tabs in the User and Group Authorizations windows To delete a row in Tables panel of an Authorizations window 1 Select a row and click Delete to delete that row from the list 2 Click OK to save the result of the deletion AND OR logic for User and Group Authorizations window panels See AND OR logic for tables conditions resources and calendars on page 61 Authorizations window Prerequisite Conditions tab The Prerequisite Conditions tab specifies the prerequisite conditions a user can access For information about prerequisite conditions see Defining dependencies for the current job on page 108 Table 21 Prerequisite Conditions panel fields accrintion SOCPINUVUIT Control M Control M installations whose prerequisite conditions can be accessed Condition Prerequisite conditions that can be accessed Access Level Browse Update and Full access levels as described in Table 22 To add a row t
148. P To move a field up or down that is to re sequence fields in the target list select the field in the target list and click the up or down arrow above the list or drag the field Grouping panel The Group By panel is used to define by which fields the report rows will be grouped Group By criteria should not be confused with Sort criteria defined in the next panel Group By criteria provide the following functionality Group By criteria create branches and sub branches in a navigation tree Group By criteria supersede Sort criteria That is data are first organized according to Group By criteria and only then within the lowest group are they sorted according to Sort criteria To define Grouping criteria 1 Select the field in the source left list box and click the right arrow to copy it to the target right list box To remove a Grouping criterion select it in the right list box and click the left arrow 2 Repeat Step 1 for each field that should be used for grouping NOTE The Grouping panel defines a grouping hierarchy A Grouping field lower down in the target list is a subgroup of a Grouping field higher up in the target list Chapter 27 Defining and generating reports 333 Creating templates using the Report Wizard 334 TIP To move a field up or down that is to re sequence the fields in the target list select the field in the target list and click the up or down arrow above the l
149. Reset to Default Layout Chapter 2 Working with Control M Desktop and Control M EM 35 Changing the data display format Changing the data display format You can choose from the following the data display formats flow diagram m list Gantt chart available only if Control M Forecast is installed To change the data display formats Choose View gt Flowdiagram View gt Job List or View gt Gantt For more details about the Gantt chart see Chapter 19 Planning production with Control M Forecast Displaying dependency names in a node By default prerequisite conditions are not displayed in the flow diagram only the dependencies they define are indicated by the lines and arrows running between nodes However you can customize the defaults so that the flow diagram also displays prerequisite conditions as condition nodes This view is most useful when viewing a small number of jobs Figure 3 Condition node in the flow diagram To display or hide job dependency nodes 1 With the flow diagram displayed choose Tools gt Options 2 Select the Links pane in the Flowdiagram Options dialog box and then select or clear the Display condition nodes check box 36 Control M User Guide Focusing on different level nodes stepping in and stepping out TIP To see dependency names for a particular node you do not need to display dependency name nodes in the flow diagram Instead click a top or bottom ar
150. SAP select External m If the job processing definitions is not responsible for execution of a job or operating system command but merely instructs Control M to perform postprocessing actions such Shout or adding Out conditions select Dummy This task type is useful if you want these postprocessing instructions to be performed as a result of the outcome of other jobs or as a result of a change of status in the system 2 Fill in the accompanying fields that are specific to the task type m Ifthe task type is Job or Detached do one of the following m specify a job script or executable file by doing the following in the File Name field specify the job script or executable file in the Path field specify the full path to the job script or executable file a embed a job script by doing the following select Embedded Script click Edit and type in a script or load it from a file in the File Name field specify the job script s logical name m Ifthe task type is Command in the Command field specify the operating system command m For task type Dummy no accompanying fields in this section are required TIP By default the File Name value is displayed in the flow diagram job node For Command and Dummy jobs to display the job name in the job node copy the job name to the File Name field Alternatively you can change the job node display defaults Chapter4 Defining how jobs should run 85 Identifying the t
151. SMART Table on page 129 7 To add additional search criteria expressions click db and repeat step 6 for each expression There is a sequential relationship between the expressions To change the order of the expressions click on the up and down arrow icons To delete criteria expressions select the expression and click 5 8 Click Update to perform the update The tables that follow provide a description of the search criteria used in finding and updating jobs and tables Control M User Guide Finding and updating jobs and tables Table 46 FIND and Update actions Expression Type Find Description Evaluate simple fields such as Job Name and Application according to the find operator and find value selected For example Find Control M like ABC Find any Specifies list fields such as In Conditions and Shouts and updates or evaluates as specified in the sub expressions of this complex expression Example 1 Find any Control Resource matches to any job that has at least one control resource defined Example 2 Find any Control Resource where Name like C D matches to any job that contains at least one control resource that starts with the letter C or D Update Update simple or sub fields as defined not conditional Update where Conditional updates of simple fields or sub fields For example Update where Application starts with the letter A replace substring A with xyz
152. Table Manager Click Forecast exporting the scheduling criteria the Choose Export Type dialog box accessed by clicking Export and specifying the necessary details generating a forecast the Load Forecast dialog box accessed by selecting File gt Load Forecast displaying a Gantt chart of the forecast the Gantt view accessed by choosing View gt Gantt identifying potential problems in the job flow the Forecast Summary window accessed by choosing View gt Dockable Windows gt Forecast Summary quickly identifying critical batch services that will be late the Forecast Service Monitor window accessed by choosing Tools gt Forecast Service Monitor forecasting the effects of potential changes to the scheduling environment apply a What If Scenario to a forecast by choosing File gt Open gt Scenario Select the name of a pre defined scenario and choose Actions gt Run Forecast generating historical reports to identify trends of the production environment See Control M Forecast report types on page 323 increasing forecast accuracy by refining statistics collection definitions See Chapter 11 Setting up definitions for periodic statistics collection For information about using these features see the Control M Business Service Management Solution User Guide Chapter 19 Planning production with Control M Forecast 235 Control M For
153. Table name m Ignoring prerequisite conditions if the predecessor jobs that set them are unscheduled Specifying the table type Specify whether a table is a SMART Table By clicking the SMART check box at the top of the General tab in the Table Editing Form the table can be defined with an extended set of table definition parameters and can include Sub tables If you are defining a table and enter a value in a field that is only available in a SMART Table a confirmation message will be displayed The message asks you to confirm that the table will become a SMART Table If you do not confirm then any definitions that are only available for SMART Tables will be lost Tables can be changed from SMART to simple in Control M Enterprise Manager and vice versa at any time If an existing SMART table is changed to a table without SMART attributes then some of the SMART table s data will be lost If a SMART has nested Sub tables associated with it it cannot be changed Specifying a SMART Table name Specify the name of the SMART Table in the Table field The name you assign to the SMART Table appears in the SMART Table node in the flow diagram and in the Job List window Control M User Guide Defining scheduling criteria for a SMART Table SMART Tables also have a Job Name or MEM Name field depending on if it is a distributed system table or CONTOL M for z OS table A new SMART Table will generally have the same value in both the Table and
154. The results of the Write operation are displayed in the Write Tables Results dialog box NOTE SSF This operation does not upload to the Control M database To use the changes in production you must still perform an upload Uploading tables to the Control M database 196 The upload operation copies the tables from the Control M EM database to the Control M database Therefore you must ensure that your changes are first saved in or written to the Control M EM database before you upload them to the Control M database By default you perform write and upload operations separately However by changing the default setting of the Write before upload in local workspace option in the General panel of the Control M Desktop Options dialog box you can ensure that whenever you perform an upload a write operation is automatically performed first This option lets you to perform both a write and an upload using a single upload request For details see the option description in Table 67 on page 351 Control M User Guide Uploading tables to the Control M database You can upload a table from either the Table manager or the flow diagram If you happen to be Saving and Ordering a job in the job editing form you can also upload the job s table as part of the Save and Order request For details see Manually scheduling jobs and tables on page 198 To upload tables to the Control M database From one of the following loca
155. Then add it to the Include or Exclude criteria area m To modify an already added set of criteria select it in the Include or Exclude area and then edit it in the Edit area To delete a set of criteria select it in the Include or Exclude area and click delete 4 Click OK NOTE _ _____ __ _______ _ __ ____ You can define up to four sets of filtering criteria in a filter Multiple criteria combine using a Boolean OR relationship all jobs that satisfy at least one of the Include or Exclude criteria are included or excluded accordingly Defining ViewPoints A ViewPoint builds a view of the active environment by retrieving and displaying data according to the criteria defined in the ViewPoint s collection hierarchy and global filter definitions m Collections determine the jobs to be loaded into memory m Global filters determine which jobs to display m Hierarchies determine the hierarchical structure in which to display jobs EXAMPLE An example hierarchy is Control M application group Control M EM is supplied with a number of predefined ViewPoints but you can create or modify definitions To define a ViewPoint NOTE If your new ViewPoint definition will require new collection global filter or hierarchy definitions create them before defining the ViewPoint you cannot create them while defining the ViewPoint Chapter 20 Selecting jobs to monitor 243 Defin
156. a Wait User pink status Confirm delete the job This action does not physically delete the job it only changes the job status to Deleted The job remains visible in the active jobs file until the next cleanup of the Active Jobs file by the New Day procedure or manual request Until then you can undelete the job Delete undelete a deleted job that still appears in the active jobs file Undelete edit the job s JCL or job script statements Note m You cannot edit lines that contain over 200 characters m You cannot edit scripts for SAP jobs m To edit a job script in UNIX you must be identified in the computer s etc passwd file Edit JCL Script change the job s status to Ended OK and the color of the job node to green Available for jobs with a status of Ended Not OK or for jobs ina Wait status such as Wait Time or Wait Cond Note For jobs running under Control M for z OS Force OK always performs post processing regardless of the default setting in the CTMPARM member Force OK change the job status to Ended OK without performing the postprocessing actions of the job Only for jobs running under Control M for z OS version 6 2 00 and later Force OK no Post Processing Control M User Guide Performing manual job intervention Table 54 Job intervention actions Part 2 of 2 Intervention Menu option terminate the job and its associated processes Note Killing
157. a specific Kill instance of a cyclic job does not affect subsequent runs of that job reactivate postprocessing for the selected job z OS only React rerun the job Rerun restart the job using Control M Restart z OS only For instructions see Restart To perform a restart z OS only on page 268 view why the job has not yet been executed and intervene as needed Why Results are displayed in the Why dialog box For instructions see To view why a job has not begun execution and to intervene if necessary on page 269 Bypassing submission criteria There are two extended options in the Bypass pop up menu Pre Submission and Skip Job Selecting the Pre Submission option selects all of the bypass options and runs the job when all other criteria are satisfied Selecting the Skip Job option applies all of the Pre Submission options with the exception of In Condition and runs the job as a dummy job You can use this as a quick option to skip the job when it should be running To bypass selected submission criteria 1 Right click the job node select Bypass gt Select 2 In the displayed dialog box check all required options as described in Table 55 Table 55 Bypass options Part 1 of 2 The job should run Check option regardless of the Time From Time Until and Next Time parameter values Time Limit Note The Time Limit bypass does not include the Time zone parameter That means th
158. a that determine which jobs in the enterprise are loaded into memory Jobs are selected when the values in their job processing definitions match the criteria specified in the collection definition To define a collection 1 In Control M Enterprise Manager choose Tools gt ViewPoint Manager 2 In the ViewPoint Manager dialog box do one of the following Control M User Guide Defining the display hierarchy To edit an existing collection definition select the collection name under the Collections node and click Edit Tocreate a new global filter definition select the Collections node and click New Then in the Collection dialog box enter a name for the collection Collection names are not case sensitive 3 In the Collection Definition dialog box define sets of criteria that should be used to include or exclude matching jobs as follows A In the Edit area select a Field in the first column a relational operator in the second column and select or specify a value in the third column B Click Add next to the Include or Exclude area depending on how the criteria should be applied When filling in the selection criteria keep in mind the following m Many fields correspond to fields in the job editing form If you need a description of the fields see the Control M Parameter Guide m The LIKE operator treats and characters specified in the value as wildcards the operator treats and characters specified in the
159. ables from Control M Desktop at any time NOTE m When you order or force a table what you really order or force are the jobs in the table and any nested Sub tables m When you manually order or force tables or a job in Control M Desktop the Order Force dialog box lets you automatically place the tables into the production databases the Control M EM database and the Control M database m The status of ordered tables jobs and Sub tables is set to WAIT_SCHEDULING m You can order or force tables and jobs from Control M EM However the dialog box and process are different For details see Manually rescheduling jobs in the active environment on page 272 To order or force tables or a job 1 Perform one of the following m To order or force a SMART Table right click on the SMART Table in the tree view or flow diagram To order or force a job or SMART Table click Order in the action menu To order or force a job SMART Table or Sub table display the job editing form or table editing form and then click Save and Order in the toolbar at the top of the form NOTE SSS Sub tables cannot be ordered they can only be forced into other tables using the Order Force Into Table option For details see Manually rescheduling jobs in the active environment on page 272 m To order or force tables from the Control M Desktop window do the following A If the Control M hierarchy is not displayed choo
160. accommodate the information required Task types and their accompanying fields might also vary somewhat according to platform This section describes how to fill in task type and related information for UNIX and Windows platforms For more details or for information relating to other platforms see the Control M Parameter Guide To identify the type of task the job performs and related information 1 In the General tab select the task type appropriate to the job in the Task Type field m If the job processing definition provides Control M with information for submitting a job for execution as a background process and instructions for performing postprocessing following job execution select Job This applies to most production batch jobs submitted under Control M m If the job processing definition provides Control M with instructions for running an executable exe file select Detached m If the job processing definition provides Control M with an operating system command to be executed as a job that is so that Control M will track and analyze the results and perform postprocessing select Command You can also use Command type jobs to run certain Control M Server utilities Control M User Guide Identifying the task type and related information m If the job processing definition instructs Control M to analyze the results of jobs not submitted under Control M for example the job is submitted under an external application such as
161. according to in the Grouping window 10 Do one of the following If the Active checkbox in the General window is not selected and you want to manually create service definitions from the service rule see Generating services from a rule on page 309 If the Active checkbox in the General window is selected and you want to automatically create service definitions from the service rule click Finish The service definitions are automatically created When a job that belongs to a service rule enters the AJF the service appears in Control M Self Service 306 Control M User Guide Editing a service rule NOTE tA Services that are automatically generated for active rules are maintained by the Control M EM server and do not appear in the Service Definition Manager window They are only visible in Control M Self Service m To review the possible services click Next The Review Services window appears 11 View the jobs in each service by clicking View Jobs and do one of the following m To view jobs of the selected service that are in the active environment select Active To view jobs of the selected services that are not in the active environment select Definition 12 Click Finish The service rule is saved and appears in the Service Definition Manager Editing a service rule This procedure describes how to edit a service rule Before You Begin Successful completion of Starting Control M Desktop on page
162. accounting jobs the Ex Accounting application 370 Handling invoicing needs ays eco cae bee hee bei eee eee eee runn pealeRe es 370 Handling payroll processing needs 0 cee eee eee eee 373 Organizing the airline company s flight jobs the Ex Flights application 375 Handling flight related communication needs 000 cee eee eee 375 Organizing the IT department maintenance jobs the Ex ITMaintenance application 45 dw ied ee dss ao eimig Peewee eek EG E Ses E A EEE 377 Handling IT job backup needs si wcci on ed aoe ke ees bei Ge bed eee aes 377 Handling emergency situations 24 tice eo eo eh SGN OE GRAPE EES 380 Handling component shutdown needs 6 eee eee 383 This appendix describes the job processing definitions in a sample draft that comes with this product Accessing the sample draft Control M EM comes with several drafts that you can open in Control M Desktop Each draft is located in a subdirectory of the BMC Software Control M EM 7 0 00 Default directory Demo drf located in the Samples subdirectory Control M Server Utilities drf located in the Samples subdirectory m EXAMPLES drf located in the Samples User Guide Examples subdirectory This appendix examines the jobs in the EXAMPLES drf draft Appendix B 369 Organizing the company s accounting jobs the Ex Accounting application When working with this draft remember that although the jobs are organized i
163. ad 27 no jobs displayed in ViewPoint 245 nodes not displayed in ViewPoint 253 performance and general global conditions 215 tables removed from user daily 149 unexpected results with global conditions 215 using Diagnostics panel 356 z OS table not assigned to user daily 148 U unlocking calendars 170 tables 147 tables during upload 27 Update access level Calendars panel 67 communication 59 control resources 65 Global Conditions panel 66 Prerequisite Conditions panel 63 Quantitative Resources panel 66 Tables panel 62 Update actions Jobs panel 55 uploading calendars 168 tables 196 user authorizations description 45 Privileges panel 59 Resources and Calendars panel 63 65 User Authorizations window General panel 51 Global Conditioins panel 66 Member Of panel 52 user dailies assigning a table to 204 defined 203 scheduling with New Day procedure 203 table removed when uploading 149 ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ User name field User Authorizations window 51 User name text box Authorizations window 48 UserChangePassword system parameter 51 Users panel Authorizations window 48 util utility 234 utilities CTMRPLN 164 emreportcli 336 loopdetecttool 110 util 234 V validating changed job definitions 393 Value field Jobs Filter Definition window 56 variables defining and using for job processing 112 in report templates 319 in SMART Tables 132 ViewPoint window 45 ViewPoints defining 243 displaying archived data 3
164. ad Policy nodes mapping rules are enforced on job s execution definitions Once a job s execution definitions have been affected by a Workload Policy they cannot be changed by subsequent Workloads in the ordered list See Defining prioritization of Workload Policy node mapping enforcement on page 292 Name This is the workload s name Last Update This indicates the last update of a workload or its creation date if it is a new workload The displayed date is based on the local settings of the machine Description This is a free text description of the workload entered by the user Use the Workload Manager toolbar buttons to perform the following actions Table 57 Workload Manager toolbar Toolbar button Action Copy Copies an existing workload A new name must be defined for the new workload Print Prints the workload list This action is available to all users including those with only browse authorization Export Exports the data in the list to an Excel file This action is available to all users including those with only browse authorization Creates a new workload Clicking this button opens the workload definition properties window Full authorization is required to perform this action Chapter 23 Managing Workloads 281 23 282 Table 57 Workload Manager toolbar Toolbar button Properties Action Opens the workload properties window for update
165. al Alerts Server connect to Global Alerts Server and select the server_name when accessing the Alerts window The server can be changed from the Alerts window using the Communication gt Disconnect and Communication gt Connect option For details see Chapter 21 Monitoring and handling alerts New Alert Notification area How Control M EM should handle notification when it receives a new alerts Click the appropriate button m None Do not provide any special notification m Flash Alerts window on task bar Flash the Alerts window button on the Microsoft Windows task bar m Bring Alerts window to front Open the Alerts window Open into Local View area In the Alerts window if you select an alert and choose Actions gt Open into Viewpoint the job that prompted the alert and the jobs having a dependency relationship with that job will be displayed in a Viewpoint You can set the following defaults regarding this ViewPoint and the jobs it displays m Use radius of n nodes The level of dependencies for which jobs should be selected and displayed in the ViewPoint m ViewPoint Name name The ViewPoint into which the jobs should be displayed BMC Software recommends that you choose a viewpoint having a collection of containing all jobs If you choose a viewpoint that does not have a collection of all jobs m nodes not included in the collection will not be displayed m non pin collecti
166. alog box aia s54 di cei ee eewad eees Fok bee Leprers te 300 emreportcli report generation utility parameters 0 0 cee eee eee 337 emr porteli ParaMeles sie duciceeces saipa a aE o a E aE AR E RE 337 emreportcli utility input arguments file description 0005 339 General settings General panel iis ek eds te hehe ates Ca ta ee RAs 351 Workspace settings General Workspace panel 0 0 0 0 cece eee enna 353 General flow diagram settings Flowdiagram General panel 353 Flow diagram node settings Flowdiagram Nodes panel 354 Flow diagram condition settings Flowdiagram Links panel 354 Flow diagram color settings Flowdiagram Colors panel 45 356 Diagnostic settings Diagnostic panel o s s40sseeecrebeenersues ce nrnna 356 Forecast settings Forecast panel 22 0 ci e222 eVaRe layne Abeta de nrnna 358 General environment settings Environment General panel 360 Environment Display panel default settings 0 6 cece eee eee 361 Alerts panel ss cc eycee cereis eri sede nite Fie creer eee het E e E 363 Reconnection panel default settings cieetpetewiakedonwAriesewe adds 364 Fnvironment panel sisses ite iea shew ten ede seb da eee see Ee renee 366 Viewet Paneli aatn25eoieeed asig bi epee sed Senn eer eeerheesen seed eaeee nes 366 Symbols used to compose pattern matching strings
167. ame field Job Name bat Managing templates This section explains how to copy and delete templates Chapter9 Setting up templates for standardized job and table definition 175 Managing templates To copy a template locally 1 In the Template Manager select the template to be copied and click 4 Copy Template 2 Enter a new name for the template and click OK To copy a template to another computer Templates are stored as xml files under lt InstallationDirectory gt Data Templates You can transfer them to any computer that has the same operating system and version To delete a template In the Template Manager select the template and click FS Delete Template 176 Control M User Guide a 10 Creating and updating many jobs at once This chapter presents the following topics IILOCUCHON egari der tot vie ere nba ee een EEE EE ea RE el EE eleven 177 Creating large numbers Of jobs 21s dsa cit eae eae ts ee a 177 Finding and updating many entities at Once 6 eee eee 178 Finding and updating jobs and tables y 21 s 044 20 04s4cu0ed even onde e eh 179 Managing updated jobs nnan n ews taue nuaran nnr eden eens eeeneesewas 184 Introduction Through the Mass Create feature of Control M Desktop you can automatically create large numbers of job processing definitions through a single request Although you must later provide these jobs their unique values individually in the Job Editing form this t
168. an handle it for example view or delete it like a non global prerequisite condition from the Prerequisite Conditions dialog box To define and manage global conditions you need appropriate security permissions To create or modify a global condition definition 1 In Control M EM or Control M Desktop choose Tools gt Global Conditions which opens the Global Conditions Prefixes dialog box 2 To refresh the display click Refresh 3 To filter the display click the Filter check box fill in the filtering criteria in the fields at the top of the dialog box and click Apply 4 To add or modify a global condition definition do the following steps A Click New or select the condition and click Update B Inthe displayed Add New Global Condition dialog box fill in or modify the definition as follows m Specify the global condition prefix m Specify the From and To Control Ms for which the global prefix will apply by selecting the Control Ms and clicking Add or Remove Control M User Guide Deleting global conditions WARNING m When filling in the Prefix text box be careful about specifying special characters such as asterisks as prefix indicator Special characters in this field are treated as text characters not wildcards and unless you intend them as literals they might cause undesired results For example if you specify glo instead of glo as a global prefix glo job1_started will be a global condition b
169. appropriate very urgent message to the Administrator In the PostProc tab do the following 1 In the When field select Late Time 2 In the Param field specify 2000 3 In the To field specify Admin 4 In the Urgency field select Very Urgent 5 In the Message field specify Job CalcExpenses not completed by 8 00 PM EXAMPLE If the CalcSalary job executes in less that half its average execution time there might be a problem with the data being used Shout a message to the Payrol234 user Id In the PostProc tab do the following 1 In the When field select Exectime 2 In the Param field specify 50 3 In the To field specify Payrol234 4 In the Urgency field select Urgent 5 In the Message field specify Job CalcSalary completed quickly Check data and results Defining how to handle the job s sysout when the job ends OK 1 In the PostProc tab in the Sysout Handling field select required handling 2 For the following SYSOUT handling specify the require parameters in the displayed field as follows For sysout being copied specify the full path and name for the target file For sysout being moved specify the full path for the target destination For sysout being printed released specify the target printer Chapter 4 Defining how jobs should run 125 Archiving sysdata z OS only EXAMPLE If the job ends OK print the SYSOUT on the EWH14 printer In the PostProc tab do the following 1
170. apter6 Comparing jobs 155 Comparing jobs To display a list of differences between two jobs 1 Select two jobs in Control M Desktop 2 Choose Actions gt Compare The Job Comparison window opens see Figure 9 The tasks that can be performed with Job Comparison window are described in Table 43 Figure9 Job Comparison dialog box E Jobi Compaiisen Jobdd dob a w heen DL e reon ange Fii aiue in doh iobal a Weka in dob Jori O Sanma dh Marne bad Joris File Hares dia Eor Ceacripgen afer dick pea treed Commend Line ffir C ern Bye dir Tep E 3 Condition C af te Condtiners in Corian Keres lobe ENDED Gate ODAT Amii Ac E ee tut Conatiioeee ub Genelia Marne Jobe EMDED Dashes a DLT Sri sh e G Table 43 Job comparison tasks to navigate to rows describing differences icons to export a report describing the Click RB Export differences between the two job tal versions Select the destination folder and the type of document HTML text or XML for the report to search for a string in the field Type in the string and click H Find Next values to display only the rows that Select Only show changes contain differences between the jobs 156 Control M User Guide Exploring and tracking versions of definition entities This chapter presents the following topics Exploring versions of definition entities cscs cy ees ea se ved tase dad eebek ad yen 157 Version
171. are also prefixed by two percent signs as well as the application s abbreviation and a hyphen for example SAPR3 for SAP OAP for Oracle E Business Suite For more information about AutoEdit expressions see the Control M Parameter Guide Do Set Var To send shout a message to a destination You must specify a destination degree of urgency and the message text as subparameters Do Shout To force a job or a complete table to be ordered under Control M regardless of the scheduling criteria You must specify as subparameters the name of the table to be forced or containing the job to be forced the scheduling date to use and for z OS the library containing the table Do Force job Control M User Guide Defining postprocessing actions that depend on job processing results Table 34 DO actions Part 2 of 2 Desired Action Parameter To specify how the job s output should be handled Do Sysout The following subparameter fields are displayed for this DO statement option SYSOUT option code list box The following options are available C Change job class F Copy output D Delete output N Move output m R Release for Printer PRM Relevant SYSOUT data The appropriate value depends on the option code above For use with codes F C or N Text m For option F specify the file name m For option C specify the New class one character or to indicate the jobs ori
172. art 2 of 2 Field option Use Minimum Diag Level Default to be set Diagnostic Level Print all diagnostics to the log at the selected diagnostic level or higher even if diagnostic levels specified in the Diagnostic Levels fields see below are lower than the value specified here Values can be selected from the list or entered manually keyword or numeric code Default 1 ERROR Valid values are 0 SEVERE Only severe issues crashes 1 ERROR Error messages CORBA exceptions errors that can cause the application to malfunction or crash at a later time Default 2 WARNING Warning messages unexpected events that do not stop the application but might limit functionality 3 General General events 4 INFO Information about the basic functionality of the application 5 DEBUG More detailed information including the steps of an event parameters etc 6 FNC_ENTER Every entrance to a function method 7 FNC_EXIT Every exit from a function method Cyclic Log File When checked Print diagnostics to a set of log files instead of one Default Not checked Number of Files Maximum number of files to which diagnostics are printed Valid values 1 300 Default 1 Number of Messages Per File Maximum number of messages that can be written to each cyclic log file Valid values 200 10000 Default 200 Control M Desktop overwrites the existing log files starting with the first in the set if mor
173. as a whole for details see Defining postprocessing actions that depend on job processing results on page 114 1 In the On Table end block select whether the post processing actions you will specify should be performed if the processing of the SMART Table ends OK or NOTOK m OK all jobs in the table ended ok NOTOK at least one job in the table ended not OK 2 In the On Table end block select the post processing Do actions that Control M should perform 3 Repeat the process for another On Table end block if necessary that is one block if the table ends OK and one block if the table ends NOTOK EXAMPLE The salary check printing job is located in a regular table It should not be run unless all scheduled jobs in the table containing the SMART Table Payroll ended OK In the PostProc tab of the SMART Table Payroll do the following 1 Click On Do and select On then select type OK 2 Click On Do and select Do then select Condition 3 Define the condition as follows Name PayrollTable EndedOK Date ODAT Sign Alternatively you can specify the condition as an Out condition in the Conditions tab Chapter 4 Defining how jobs should run 133 Creating and editing Sub tables Creating and editing Sub tables Sub tables are used for jobs whose processing can be treated as a single unit They are defined within a SMART table which is referred to as the Sub table s parent The Sub table inherits any RBCs whic
174. ask type and related information 86 EXAMPLE The CalcExpenses bat batch job which calculates the expenses incurred by the company on the current day should be scheduled submitted and monitored by Control M which should also perform any required postprocessing Fill in the task type and related information as follows 1 In the Job Name field specify CalcExpenses 2 In the Task Type field select Job 3 In the File Name field specify CalcExpenses bat 4 In the Path field specify C Prod Acct Calc EXAMPLE Control M should be responsible for the scheduling submission and postprocessing for the SystemStatus exe executable job which determines those external applications that are up and those that are down Fill in the task type and related information as follows 1 In the Job Name field specify SystemStatus 2 In the Task Type field select Detached 3 In the File Name field specify SystemStatus exe 4 In the Path field specify C System Maint EXAMPLE AAA Control M should use an operating system command to backup daily transactions it should also monitor the results and perform post processing if needed Fill in the task type and related information for the BkpDailyTrans job as follows 1 In the Job Name field specify BkpDailyTrans 2 In the Task Type field select Command 3 In the Command field specify Copy D Data Transactions Daily ODATE txt E 4 Optionally in the Fil
175. at jobs that are waiting for a specific date will still wait for that date even if the Time Limit bypass is checked even if prerequisite IN conditions are not satisfied IN Conditions regardless of whether Quantitative resources specified in the job Quantitative definition are available Resources Note The Quantitative resource bypass also ignores the quantitative resource restrictions in the workload entities that the job belongs to regardless of whether control resources specified in the job definition are Control available Resources Chapter 22 Monitoring and intervening in production 267 Performing manual job intervention Table 55 Bypass options Part 2 of 2 The job should run Check option post processing actions in the job should be performed regardless of the restrictions set by the workload entities Workload and Node Note Workload Nodes Mapping rules enforced on jobs in the Active restrictions environment are not bypassed regardless of the job s SCHENV statement Scheduling Environment z OS only regardless of whether other jobs using the same Pipe as that specified in Pipes z OS the definition of this job are ready to run only even if Control M is in Quiesce mode either as a result of QUIESTIME or Quiesce z OS QUIESORES commands only without any of the jobs post processing actions being performed Post including
176. atabase and upload the table to the Control M Server database m If you order or force the job a dialog box is displayed that enables you to upload and write the job as part of the order force request Fill in the dialog box as described in Manually scheduling jobs and tables on page 198 5 If an action confirmation prompt is displayed m click OK to complete the action or Cancel to cancel the changes If the Audit Annotation window appears m enter a purpose for performing this action in the Subject field and a justification or descriptive note in the Description field Click OK NOTE The system administrator can configure which actions require annotation Therefore the Audit Annotation window does not necessarily appear after creating editing jobs or tables See Annotating activities on page 126 for details about auditing and annotation For details about writing and loading tables and jobs see Chapter 13 Putting jobs into production This product comes with a draft containing sample job processing definitions For an explanation of how and why these job processing definitions were defined the way they were see Appendix B Examples for defining jobs Control M User Guide Creating and editing jobs Creating and editing jobs This section describes the following topics Assigning a name to the job Identifying the task type and related information Defining the job hierarchy Defining the jo
177. ations in the SMART Table Defining dependencies variables and notifications in the SMART Table Fill in the SMART Table parameters as you would for a job but keep in mind that the SMART table will apply these criteria to all scheduled jobs as a whole When defining Shout notifications be aware that m in the table editing form you define Shout notifications in the Shouts tab but in the job editing form you define Shout notifications in the PostProc tab m the format of the Shout statements and the procedure for defining the Shouts are the same in both locations EXAMPLE A number of jobs belong to a SMART Table which is called CalcsGrp No jobs in this table should be executed until the BranchSumm job in a different table has ended OK Furthermore the jobs should not be submitted unless they have Shared control of the BranchSummTots file and exclusive control over the TransUpd file Note This is a z OS example the Resources tab is only available for SMART Tables in z OS 1 In the Conditions tab of the BranchSumm job processing definition define the following Out prerequisite condition to be added BranchSumm EndedOK ODAT 2 In the Conditions tab of CalcGrp add BranchSumm EndedOK ODAT as an In prerequisite condition 3 In the Resources tab of CalcGrp define Shared control over the control resource BranchSummTots dat and exclusive control over the control resource TransUpd dat Defining actions to b
178. aving the new periodic statistics definitions you can arrange the order of their precedence using the Move Up and Move Down arrow buttons To change the basic details of a periodic statistics definition 1 In the Periodic Statistics Manager select the periodic statistics definition in the list and click f Edit 2 In the Periodic Statistics Definition dialog box make the changes and click OK 3 Click OK or Apply in the Periodic Statistics Manager window to save the edited periodic statistics definition To change the order of precedence of a periodic statistics definition 1 In the Periodic Statistics Manager select the periodic statistics definition in the list and click the Move Up and Move Down arrow buttons as needed to move the definition to the required position in the list 2 Repeat Step 1 for any periodic statistics definition that you want to reposition Control M User Guide Managing periodic statistics definitions 3 Click OK or Apply in the Periodic Statistics Manager window to save the new order of precedence for the periodic statistics definitions To copy a periodic statistics definition 1 In the Periodic Statistics Manager select the periodic statistics definition to be copied and click gi Copy 2 In the Copy Periodic Statistics Definition dialog box specify a name for the new periodic statistics definition in the Name field modify the other criteria as needed and click OK 3 Click OK or Apply in t
179. ay Shift to the next working date m Prev Day Shift to the previous working date m No Confcal Tentatively schedule the job for the current day even if not a working day Additional shifting may or may not be performed depending on the value indicated in the by n days box by n days The number of working days that a job can be shifted Values from 62 to 62 can be entered This function is also called Extended Shift and Shift Num z OS only Maxwait Maximum number of days job can wait for execution after order date Valid value is an integer between 0 and 99 where 99 indicates no limit Chapter 4 Defining how jobs should run 91 Defining scheduling criteria for a job basics 92 Table 32 Scheduling tab parameters Part 3 of 4 Parameter Description Retro Only applicable to Table level RBCs Indicates whether the job will be scheduled for possible execution after its original scheduled date has passed Dates Dates on which to order the job Valid values are 4 character dates in mmdd or ddmm format depending on the site standard Dates are inserted into the list separately followed by the Enter key A maximum of twelve dates can be specified If more dates are required use a calendar Active Date range during which the job or SMART Table can be ordered or the RBC can be used From To Select From to define an active range during which the job is eligible to be ordered sandwiched between two inacti
180. b s owner and author Defining job documentation Defining scheduling criteria for a job basics Defining scheduling criteria using calendars Defining complex scheduling criteria using rules Limiting scheduling to a particular date range Defining cyclic jobs Defining automatic rerun for a job that ends NOT OK Defining jobs that should run on specific nodes Defining jobs that should run on nodes where load balancing has been implemented Defining a time frame during which jobs can be submitted Defining that manual confirmation is required before job submission Assigning priorities to jobs and defining and critical jobs Defining how many days a job can await submission Defining dependencies for the current job Allocating resources for a job Defining and using variables that are dynamically resolved at runtime Defining postprocessing actions that depend on job processing results Defining conditional processing under z OS Defining messages to be shouted at the end of job processing Defining how to handle the job s sysout when the job ends OK Archiving sysdata z OS only Annotating activities The job editing form and table editing form consist of a series of tabs each providing a set of parameters for defining job and table processing definitions NOTE B m A red asterisk indicates required fields m The fields displayed in the job editing form might vary according to the type of job z OS group and so on m To sequent
181. beep eee Pewee Ree seen e eee aa eeRS eee 132 Defining actions to be performed after all scheduled jobs in the SMART Table have ended orii ciate cet ele een etiet dees ohne en ted weee oe econ a Ea 132 Defining actions to be performed after all scheduled jobs in the SMART Table have ended sertce tipin e ees elie Cees eke Aid eee Cote EEN ee dee kas 132 Defining actions to be performed after all scheduled jobs in the SMART Table have hae 310 ae er eres eee ae a ee eee eee ee a eee ee eee eee 132 Creating and editing Sub tables scv sist seas cine esexiwedeed eens a ores 134 Creating and editing jobs in a SMART lablescis soieisaeasetsasiesetiaeedias 135 Defining scheduling criteria for a job in a SMART Table 136 Copying RBCs from one SMART Table to another 000000 138 Modifying dependencies for jobs within a SMART table 005 139 Defining job dependencies by using the flow diagram 00000 140 Defining a condition format 2224 444 babe ie Re we eke id dO REE RES 141 This chapter provides tips and examples on how to define individual job processing definitions A SMART Table is different than a job processing definition in that a SMART Table is really an extended set of table definition parameters that defines how to process its jobs as a unified group Nevertheless the procedure for defining job processing definitions and the procedure for defining SMART tables are quite si
182. bs that use the Interval option For z OS jobs only the time is specified Rerun counter Number of times the job has been rerun Chapter 22 Monitoring and intervening in production 263 Viewing and editing the details of a job in the active environment Table 53 Fields of the Active tab Part 2 of 3 Section Additional Info Field Sysout search count Description z OS only Number of times Control M has looked for the job NJE Node z OS only Node ID of the NJE terminal NJE z OS only 1 indicates that the job was sent for execution to a computer that is connected to Control M through NJE the node does not share a spool with Control M Logical z OS only For Control M for z OS version 6 2 00 and later Partition Logical partition where the job is running Must end by z OS only Time by which the job must finish executing num Days The day by which the job must finish executing The num Days subparameter is relevant only for jobs running in Control M for z OS version 6 2 00 or later Elapse z OS only Length of time in minutes that the job is expected to run Due In z OS only Time at which the job must start executing num Days The day on which the job must start executing The num Days subparameter is relevant only for jobs running in Control M for z OS version 6 2 00 or later Job Name z OS only Name of the job S
183. button appears pressed 2 Select the job in the Results grid area that you want to highlight You can then view it highlighted in the Flow diagram Gantt view or List view Control M User Guide Setting up definitions for periodic Statistics collection This chapter presents the following topics OO MEGON saspiesta pbn n oe eae eee ba eee bee Eae ed a e eE 185 Defining periodic statistics definitions 4 lt lt s 24465a si etia ee ensa eee eats 186 Changing periodic statistics definitions 0060 00 c cece eee eee 186 Managing periodic statistics dENnIGONS i054 544426548 ances ea ded ea vee 187 Introduction If for a specific job or set of jobs there is usually a variation in statistic values for different periods during the week month or year there is a great advantage in collecting the statistics separately for each distinct period Statistics which are collected separately for each period are called periodic statistics and are managed using the Periodic Statistics Manager EXAMPLE If the average runtime of a job during work days is different than during weekends there is an advantage of collecting statistics for this job separately for work days and for weekend periods The average runtimes will then be much more accurate for each period This section describes how to collect periodic statistics using the Periodic Statistics Manager Chapter 11 Setting up definitions for periodic statistics collection 185
184. c Control M that tracks the availability of the resource in the data center This chapter describes how you perform this task in Control M EM You must specify the resource usage requirement in the job processing definition of the job requiring the resource You perform this task in Control M Desktop For details see Allocating resources for a job on page 110 The following example illustrates control resource usage EXAMPLE 2 A job called DeductCharges requires exclusive control of a file called AcctBalance To enable Control M to handle this correctly do the following m In the job processing definition of DeductCharges specify exclusive control of a control resource called AcctBalance m Using the Control Resources dialog box in Control M EM allocate the control resource AcctBalance to Control M Control M will only submit DeductCharges if AcctBalance is not being used by another job If another job also requires AcctBalance it will not be submitted as long as DeductCharges is running The following example illustrates quantitative resource usage EXAMPLE Control M has three tape drives available A job called BKP_Tallies requires one tape drive To enable Control M to handle this correctly do the following m In the job processing definition of job BKP_Tallies specify that the quantity 1 of a quantitative resource TapeDr is required m Using the Quantitative Resources dialog box in Control M EM d
185. cally as you need it You can then discard it or save it for reuse To define a dynamic filter 1 If the Dynamic Filter Definition dialog box is not currently displayed display it by performing one of the following tasks whichever is appropriate m Ifthe Select ViewPoint dialog box is currently displayed that is you are in the process of opening a ViewPoint after you select the ViewPoint click Dynamic Filter m If the ViewPoint is currently displayed select lt Dynamic Filter gt in the Filter list box The Dynamic Filter Definition dialog box displays the last used dynamic filtering criteria 2 To edit an existing filter select it in the Filter Presets field and click OK To create a new filter specify a name for it in the Filter Presets field 3 Fill in filtering criteria TIP To clear displayed criteria click Clear at the bottom of the dialog box Consider the following when filling in filtering criteria Most fields are self explanatory If you need a description of the fields that correspond to fields in the job editing form see the Control M Parameter Guide 240 Control M User Guide Defining dynamic filters m The LIKE operator is used for all text fields except the Odate Start Time and End Time parameters For Odate From Start Time From and End Time From the gt operator is used For Odate To Start Time To and End Time To the lt operator is used m For Odate From and Odate To use
186. cannot be sorted NOTE e _____tfeHfeH_seee eq ______z A statistics calendar that is defined in an MVS job takes precedence over a Periodic Calendar that is related to the job through the Periodic Statistics Manager Changing periodic statistics definitions 186 The following use cases involve changing the periodic statistics definitions Consider the case where periodic statistics are collected for the following two periods weekends defined as period A and weekdays defined as period B Initially Friday is considered a weekday but after a few weeks have passed it is decided to consider Friday as part of the weekend To reflect this change all Fridays in the Periodic Calendar are marked with A s instead of a B s Control M User Guide Managing periodic statistics definitions In this case the statistics collected on the Fridays before the change remain part of the weekday statistics since the periodic statistics are not recalculated retroactively When a change is made in the Periodic Calendar only future statistics calculations are affected Consider the case where the holidays for the current year are marked in the Periodic Calendar with the letter G In this case holidays for future years should also be marked with the same letter G This ensures that statistics collected during holidays in the current year will be used for jobs that will run on holidays of future years If over time more than one period lett
187. cate the vertical sequencing EXAMPLE m B A corresponds to the first column on the second page horizontally m 3 2 corresponds to the second row on the third page vertically m You can include the rulers in the printout m You can include an index of displayed nodes only when rulers are also printed m You can print the entire flow diagram or a selected page range Changing your password 44 When your password is soon due to expire the login dialog box of the Control M windows Control M Desktop Control M EM Control M Reporting Facility and Control M Configuration Manager will display fields that enable you to change your password To change your password at any other time you must issue the request through the Control M EM or Control M Desktop windows Password changes made in one application window for example Control M EM automatically apply to the other application windows To change your password 1 If the change password fields are not already displayed in the Control M EM or Control M Desktop window choose Tools gt Change Password 2 Fill in your current and new passwords and then confirm the new password 3 Click OK NOTE Alternatively you can change passwords using the User Authorizations window but this is generally not recommended unless you are changing other password criteria or changing the passwords for other users For more information see the Control M Administrator Guide Co
188. cations Editor NOTE You can only define an Activate Application definition from an Administrator account 2 Perform one of the following actions in the Activate Applications Editor esee entry field that opens in the Applications area specify a unique name for the Application Activation definition a To modify an existing Application Activation definition select the definition in the Applications window 3 Fill in or modify values for the definition as follows A In the Program field browse to and supply the full path and name of the application to run B In the Initial Dir field browse to and supply the full path of the working directory If not specified the default is the Program directory C In the Parameters field select parameters flags or switches including job processing parameters to be passed on the command line to the program at runtime Chapter 22 Monitoring and intervening in production 275 Activating third party applications B 276 NOTE m Inserted job processing parameters appear in red literal values appear in black m When you insert a parameter after a path a space is automatically inserted between the path and the variable You should manually delete this space if it is not needed m The same parameter can be inserted multiple times m You can use the up and down arrows in the dialog box to change the positioning of listed applications and the delete button to de
189. ce m no jobs are requesting the resource that is there are no table entries for this resource with a Requested resource type Chapter 15 Identifying data center resources available for Control M use 211 Defining quantitative resources 212 Control M User Guide che 1 6 Establishing job dependencies across Control Ms This chapter presents the following topics Defining global conditions ves ore een eae ee en phe ee ee ea ben eee eeu dae eee 213 Deleting global conditions lt onc decys pee Oe Mea tea ei oie eens 215 Global condition logic and examples ici ccuseieeiw i iaiewn Seas rakes Cbs 216 Best practices sds npr Sethe eee see eee eg eee ES eee ges eed RS Res 218 Frequent updates to a global condition toggles 0 00005 218 Bi directional global conditions s ace eee nesen es aia eee aA 218 Normally prerequisite conditions used to establish job dependencies are local that is they apply only on the particular Control M in which they are defined This chapter explains how you can define global prerequisite conditions to establish job dependencies across different Control Ms You establish these dependencies by defining condition name prefixes that will indicate that a condition is global Defining global conditions Global conditions are special case prerequisite conditions that create dependencies between jobs running on different Control M servers For example you can specify that jobs
190. cessing 123 Defining how to handle the job s sysout when the job ends OK 125 Archiving sysdata z OS only sci cavhercaveseeeet nen dae ane see ee es 126 Annotating activities oi sche eens ee rented ieee eeeein t ideaa EGE Eae 126 Creating and editing SMART Tables cye tesnsenee een ss eee eee EAS 127 Defining general SMART Table information 0 000 000 cece eee 128 Defining scheduling criteria fora SMART Table 00 0000s 129 Defining dependencies variables and notifications in the SMART Table 132 Defining actions to be performed after all scheduled jobs in the SMART Table haveended ipic 6c essed ete t Eni eit ea ee ela a Eaa eee dade es 132 Creating and editing Sub tables weiisecsib ceded ee eee ee ee dee eee en yen eek 134 Creating and editing jobs ina SMART Table 0 ccc eee eee eee 135 Defining scheduling criteria for a job ina SMART Table 136 Copying RBCs from one SMART Table to another 00 00000 138 Modifying dependencies for jobs within a SMART table 004 139 Defining job dependencies by using the flow diagram 0 005 140 Defining a condition format cess ces sceerdneeue ede tscecew Peden eenniuns 141 Chapter 5 Organizing and managing jobs in tables 143 TM EFOGUCH OM seg p ck ase E En Sodot ce ena soot aun E ead E E ct derape lee be ashen eons oe 143 Managing tables i2 iesci tees sth errs nae
191. ch the user is not a member Member of List of groups of which the user is a member Control M User Guide Tabs in the User and Group Authorizations windows To add a user to a group 1 Select the group in the Not A Member of list 2 Click Add The group name is added to the Member of list and deleted from the Not A Member of list 3 Click OK To add a user to multiple groups 1 While holding down the Ctrl key select each group from the Not A Member of list 2 Click Add The selected group names are added to the Member of list and deleted from the Not A Member of list 3 Click OK To remove a user from one or more groups 1 Select the group or groups from the Member of list 2 Click Remove The selected group names are added to the Not A Member of list and deleted from the Member of list 3 Click OK NOTE __ ____ ____ ___________ All of the tabs displayed and described below are included in both the User Authorizations window and the Group Authorizations window Authorizations window Active tab The Active tab for both Group Authorizations and User Authorizations contains the following filters m Displayed Jobs filter determines what jobs in the active environment the user or group members can see when opening a ViewPoint in Control M EM Job Actions filter determines what actions the user or group members can perform on the displayed jobs For all User and Group Authoriza
192. criteria to all scheduled jobs as a whole 5 Click Save or Save amp Close Creating and editing jobs in a SMART Table After you have defined the SMART Table you can define the table s job processing definitions using the job editing form New jobs can be created within the table by doing the following steps 1 From any view in the Control M Desktop right click on the table 2 Select Add Job to Table from the drop down menu The job editing form is displayed 3 Define the job s attributes and processing definitions Chapter 4 Defining how jobs should run 135 Defining scheduling criteria for a job in a SMART Table NOTE m In addition to the criteria you define for the SMART Table as a whole you define individual criteria for the particular job processing definition m Most parameters in job processing definitions in a SMART Table are the same as those in job processing definitions in regular tables For instructions refer to Assigning a name to the job on page 84 m This section describes details that are unique or different for the job processing definitions in SMART Tables Defining scheduling criteria for a job in a SMART Table 136 When defining scheduling criteria in a job processing definition you can define individual scheduling criteria and can associate previously defined RBCs with the job You can set the relationship between the individual job scheduling criteria and the selected Contro
193. ct Mon Tue Wed Thu and Fri 6 Click Rules in the Week Days area and in the Week Days tab of the Special Week Rules dialog box select Saturday and Sunday and click lt n N Click OK Control M User Guide Defining complex scheduling criteria using rules EXAMPLE Schedule the job on the 5th and 10th days from the end of the month 1 Click Rules in the Month Days area 2 In the Regular Rules tab in the field under the label Order the job on the n th calendar days counting from the end of the month Ln enter 10 5 3 Click OK The results will be as follows m Ina month with 31 days the job will be ordered on the 22nd and 27th day of the months m Ina month with 30 days the job will be ordered on the 21st and the 26th day of the month m Ina month with 28 days the job will be ordered on the 19th and 24th day of the month EXAMPLE Schedule the job on the 1st and 15th day of the month even when they do not appear in the calendar and to ensure that the job will not be scheduled on the 10th and 25th day of the month even when they appear in the calendar do the following in the Special Month Days tab 1 Click Rules in the Month Days area 2 In the Month Days tab A Click 1 and Ctrl 15 in the tab s calendar B Click n C Click 10 and Ctrl 25 in the tab s calendar D Click n E Click OK 3 In the Month Days area specify the calendar name The job will be ordered on every day marked as a working day
194. d every day Defining an operating system command job and other general information about the job The General tab defines the following m The Tasktype is Command Appendix B 377 Handling IT job backup needs 378 m The Command field contains the Copy command to be executed This is a required field for the Command tasktype m File Name is an optional field for Command type jobs Any value specified in this field appears as the job name in the job node in the flow diagram Instead of leaving this field blank BMC Software recommends that you specify the name of the job in this field In this example the job name Backup has been placed in the field Defining the job so that it is scheduled daily The job is scheduled every day In the Scheduling tab the following values are selected m all values of the Month Days area done by clicking ALL m all values of the Week Days area done by clicking ALL a the relational connector is Or but And would also work Ensuring that required tape drives are available before job submission Depending on the files being backed up this job copies the files to one of two tape drives To ensure that these tape drives are available the Resources tab indicates that two tape drives are required as Quantitative resources The job is not submitted unless the drives are available and reserved for the job Defining an emergency backup job The BackupAllSystems job is executed only in extreme
195. d table to the specified Control M Server database regardless of whether a more recent version of the table exists in the Control M Server database Upload is a background process you can perform other actions during transmission On completion the Modified field changes to No Upload Copies the selected table to the specified Control M Server database Upload is a background process You can perform other actions during transmission On completion the Modified field changes to No m Ifthe table in the Control M Server database is a more recent version a message appears indicating that the Upload is not allowed This restriction can be overridden using the Force Upload option described below m To upload or download multiple tables hold down the lt Ctrl gt key and select the required tables Order Orders or force the selected table SMART Tables can also be ordered from the Order Force Jobs window in Control M EM When Order is clicked a dialog box is displayed in which you specify Order date Specify either ODAT or a specific date Whether to upload the job before ordering Whether to force the job Whether to place the ordered or forced job in Hold status Delete R L Deletes the table from both the Control M EM and Control M Server databases For more information see Table Synchronization in the Control M User Guide Force Delete Deletes the table from both the Control M EM and R
196. de status until units are available This will prevent the Workload s jobs from taking control of all available resource units The 5 additional resource units up to 10 are available to other jobs NOTE If a specific job associated with a Workload requires a number of quantitative resource units greater than that limited by the Workload Policy rules the job will not be submitted To limit the quantitative resources available to the jobs associated with a Workload 1 Click Add for a new quantitative resource definition or double click a definition from the list to modify an existing one The Quantitative Resource Period Definition window is displayed 2 Enter the name of the Control M or select one from the drop down menu in the Control M field 3 Enter a resource name or select one from the drop down menu in the Name field The listed resources in the drop down menu are the ones defined for the selected Control M in step B 4 Enter a number in the Quantity field to limit the number of resource instances available to the jobs in the workload 5 Define the date and time that the Workload Policy limitations will be enforced See Defining time periods for Workload Policies on page 289 6 Click OK 7 Tosave the definitions or modifications proceed to step 4 on page 284 To continue defining or modifying a workload select a tab and continue Control M User Guide 23 Running jobs In the Running Jobs tab you
197. defined in increments of 15 minutes Table 59 Date and Time Type Date Type Option Defining Date and Time All Days Selecting All Days in the Date Type field defines all days in the calendar In the Time Type select either m All Hours 24 hours per selected day m Between From and To fields appear to define the range of hours The period is defined as all calendar days during the defined hours Every periodic day of the Selecting this option displays a list of the days of the week week with a check box next to each and the Time section at the bottom of the screen 1 Select the check box next to the desired day in the Date section 2 In the Time Type select either m All Hours 24 hours per selected day m Between From and To fields appear to define the range of hours The period is defined as each selected day during the defined hours 290 Control M User Guide 23 Table 59 Date and Time Type Date Type Option Between specific days in the calendar Defining Date and Time Selecting this option displays a From and To fields for date and time 1 Edit the date in the From and To fields or select a date from the calendar by clicking the drop down arrow next to the fields 2 In the Time Type select either m All Hours 24 hours per selected day m Between From and To fields appear to define the range of hours The period is defined from a start date to an ending date d
198. ds is done by defining rules called a Workload Policy A Workload Policy enforces its rules on all jobs associated with the Workload In this way you can quickly affect large numbers of jobs processing definitions without manually changing the jobs definitions individually Chapter 23 Managing Workloads 279 23 Workload Policy rules can limit the resources that the jobs associated with a Workload can consume and specific times can be defined for when these rules enforced This prevents a Workload from taking control of all available resources and preventing other jobs from running A Workload Policy can route certain jobs associated with a Workload to a specific node This allows you to change the execution node defined for certain jobs in the active environment and re route groups of jobs without actually affecting the jobs definitions With Nodes Management the load on any node machine or node group can be controlled You can limit the usage of a node and the specific times when those limitations will be applied A node s participation in a node group can also be defined for specific times This helps you control the nodes available to the jobs in the active environment Nodes Management is performed using the Control M Configuration Manager s Node Manager option For more information see the Control M Administrator Guide The following is a list of actions that can performed using the Control M EM GUI and Desktop m Define a
199. e specify Substr 0 2 Mem Name Appendix C 391 Valid functions for Template editor and condition formats 392 Control M User Guide za Checking job and table processing definition validity This appendix presents the following topic Checking the validity of job and table processing definitions 393 Checking the validity of job and table processing definitions B NOTE AA By default the validity of job and table processing definitions is automatically checked when you save the definitions and this procedure is not necessary Use this procedure only if you changed the default so that the job or table processing definition validity is not automatically checked Though generally not recommended you can change the default so that the validity of job and table processing definitions that you define in your local workspace is not checked For example you might want to create a template see Chapter 9 Setting up templates for standardized job and table definition or perform a mass job create see Chapter 10 Creating and updating many jobs at once that will not pass validity checks until you later manually add more details To change the default setting of the automatic validity checker use the General options panel of Control M Desktop which you can access by choosing Tools gt Options If you changed the default you should perform the validity checks as described in th
200. e Name field specify BkpDailyTrans so the name appears in the flow diagram job node Control M User Guide Defining the job hierarchy EXAMPLE In the event of an emergency that requires evacuation of the site the site manager submits the Evacuation Alert emergency job which shouts a message to all personnel to shut down their machines and leave the building Fill in the task type and related information as follows 1 In the Job Name field specify EvacuationAlert 2 In the Task Type field select Dummy 3 Optionally in the File Name field specify EvacuationAlert so the name appears in the flow diagram job node Defining the job hierarchy In the General tab select the following hierarchy information for each job processing definition table application and group For information regarding this hierarchy information see the Control M Concepts Guide NOTE If the table application or group does not yet exist type the information in and Control M Desktop will automatically create the items Defining the job s owner and author For security and authorization reasons you must specify in the General tab an owner and author for each job processing definition m The author is the person who defines the job m The owner is the User ID associated with the job that is for whom the job is executed Defining job documentation BMC Software recommends that you provide a brief description of the job d
201. e checked in the job processing definition Operator Relational operator to be applied to the specified value Value Value that determines whether a criteria is satisfied The Field column is a list box If a row can be changed an arrow is displayed to the right of the Field column on that row Click this arrow to display the field names that can be used in the Jobs filter The Operator column is under the Value heading If you click a cell in the Operator column a list box is displayed Valid operators are listed in Table 15 Control M User Guide Tabs in the User and Group Authorizations windows Table 15 Valid operators Operator Description Value in the job must equal the value in the table LIKE Use of wild card in the value field gt Value in the job must be greater than the value in the table lt Value in the job must be less than the value in the table Value in the job must not equal the value in the table The Value column is used to specify the value of the field You can manually enter a value or for some fields you can select a value from a list that is displayed when you click a cell inside the column NOTE Use the arrow keys or the vertical scroll bar to move through values in a list box Use the Tab key to skip to the next column in the table Each completed row in the table is added to the appropriate Include in or Exclude from Jobs Filter list described below
202. e cli utility m ability to define Collections Hierarchies Filters ViewPoints and Authorizations By default a user has the highest authorization defined for any group of which he is a member However group authorizations for a user are superseded by authorizations specified in the Privileges panel of the User Authorizations window with any Access Level other than Default EXAMPLE User JimA belongs to group Staff Group Staff has Update authority for all Collections Hierarchies Filters and ViewPoints but only Browse authority for Authorization definitions Communication Alerts and Archived ViewPoints JimA is defined with Default authority for all definitions and Update authority for Communication JimA can create and modify ViewPoints as well as add modify and delete Control M installations from the Control M EM database Tasks that may require both Control M and Control M EM Authorizations Many operations require authorizations in both Control M EM and Control M For example to Hold a job the user must be authorized in Control M EM to access that job and authorized in Control M to Hold jobs for the job owner For more information see the Control M Administrator Guide Authorizations window The Authorization window has separate panels for users and groups The Users panel enables you to add modify copy or delete a user whose authorizations can be configured The Groups panel enables you to add modify copy or delete a
203. e diagnostics are generated than fit in the defined number of cyclic log files Changes to these fields take affect the next time the specified Control M Desktop application files are run not immediately Diagnostic Levels Individual diagnostic level settings for each file or context procedure See the Use Minimum Diag Level field for valid values Contexts tab Generate diagnostics on a procedural basis at the level specified next to each context procedure Procedures listed in the Contexts tab can span several files or sub procedures When you change the level of a procedure Control M Desktop automatically changes the level of any sub procedures Files tab Generate diagnostics on a file basis at the level specified next to each file name Save settings for next runs Save diagnostic settings as a default for future Control M Desktop sessions Otherwise the settings take effect for this Control M Desktop session only Appendix A 357 Setting options for Control M Desktop Confirmation defaults The Confirmations panel determines which confirmation requests and warnings should be displayed for various job table and calendar actions before you complete an action Confirmation options are divided into the following sections Job Confirmations Table Confirmations Calendar Confirmations General Confirmations To set confirmations 1 Select or deselect the general confirmations that you want display
204. e draft 1 In Control M Desktop choose View gt Filter 2 In the Filter dialog box define selection criteria for the filter An AND relationship applies to multiple criteria a job must satisfy all specified criteria to match When defining criteria consider the following points Most fields correspond to fields in the job editing form For a description of the fields see the Control M Parameter Guide m Certain fields correspond to values for Control M parameters for example August is a value for parameter MONTHS To specify such criteria set the value to true for example August true Control M User Guide Arranging the Control M Desktop flow diagram display m The LIKE operator treats and characters in the value as wildcards the operator treats and characters in the value as literals 3 In the Action area select how the criteria should be applied to the draft m Only jobs matching the specified criteria should currently be included in the filter Set Matching jobs to be the current filter This option is especially useful when no other criteria are currently applied or you want to override previously applied criteria m Jobs matching the new criteria should be added to or removed from the current filter These options are especially useful for adjustments when other criteria are currently applied criteria The Remove matching jobs from the current filter option is also useful for defining criteria for
205. e following information m The Tasktype is Job m The File Name and Path fields identify the file name and location of the batch job These are required fields for the Job tasktype Control M User Guide Handling payroll processing needs Defining the job so that it is scheduled daily The job is scheduled every day In the Scheduling tab the following values are selected m all values of the Month Days area done by clicking ALL m all values of the Week Days area done by clicking ALL a the relational connector is Or but And would also work Ensuring that the printer required by the job is available before job submission The job prints out a report of the due invoices To ensure that the printer required for printing the report is available the Resources tab indicates that the job requires exclusive control of the printer in this case Printer1 The job is not submitted unless the printer is available Handling payroll processing needs The company runs a batch job CalcSalaries that calculates the salaries to be paid to employees for the month just ended After these calculations are completed the company can run a paycheck printing job to print the pay checks The sample draft does not contain the job processing definition for the check printing job but does contain the salary calculating job described in this appendix Defining a job to calculate salaries This batch job calculates employees salaries for the month jus
206. e of the critical and urgent nature of this jobs the Execution tab defines it as critical and assigns it the highest priority 99 Control M User Guide Handling component shutdown needs Ensuring that this job does not run until its predecessor jobs have ended ShutDownAllSystems initiates system shut down It must not run until m all users have logged out initiated by the AllUsersLogOut job m all system files have been backed up initiated by the BackUpAllSystems job m all other data centers have been notified of the shut down initiated by the SetUpEmergencyGlobalCondition job To ensure that it runs only after all its above mentioned predecessor jobs have ended successfully ShutDownAllSystems contains the following definitions m its Conditions tab contains In prerequisite conditions that match the conditions defined in Do Condition statements in the predecessor jobs These In prerequisite conditions are assigned a date value of ODAT m the field above the In Conditions work area in the Conditions tab defines an AND relationship between the In prerequisite conditions Ensuring that successor jobs can run This job is a predecessor job to most of the shut down jobs in the Ex ComponentStopping group To enable the successor jobs to run after ShutDownAllSystems adds the following Out prerequisite conditions with a date of ODAT and a symbol in the Effects column after it ends successfully a ShutDownAllSystems ENDED thi
207. e or IP address of the client it is important that you clear the Use bidirectional communication check box This would force the server to resolve the client s address and initiate a connection back to it After the correct hostname or IP address is identified reselect the Use bidirectional communication check box If the Control M EM GUI server cannot initiate a connection to client computers for example because of a firewall rule blocking ports for outgoing connections on the server side or blocking ports for incoming connections on the client side all configuration options will fail when the bidirectional check box is cleared In this situation ensure that the Use bidirectional communication check box is selected Select one of the following a Use Specific IP Address select an IP address from the list of all enabled network interfaces on the computer m Use IP Address matching Specific mask specify an IP mask This option is recommended when using VPN connections since the IP addresses may change dynamically By using an IP mask you avoid the need of reconfiguring CORBA each time you reconnect For example at runtime the subnet mask 137 72 114 0 will prefer the IP address 137 72 114 142 to 192 168 241 3 In the configuration file the mask is set in the Prefer PMask parameter and the hostname_in_ior value is IP which is evaluated at runtime If this option is selected the SIP characters a
208. e or the Control M Parameter Guide 1 In the PostProc tab click When and select the situation in which Control M should shout the message and if necessary specify the accompanying parameters in the Param field Use the following table as a guide Situation When option Parameters The job completion status is ended OK OK none The job completion status is NOTOK NOTOK none The job completion status is RERUN RERUN none The job has not been or cannot be Late Sub time in hhmm format from 0000 through 2359 submitted by the specified time The job does not finish executing by the Late time time in hhmm format from 0000 through 2359 specified time The job s elapsed runtime is outside of Exectime According to the format specified Shout the a specified limit message if the elapsed runtime is m gt n is greater than n minutes 1 999 m lt n is less than n minutes 1 999 m n exceeds the job s average execution time by at least n minutes 1 999 m n is less than the job s average execution time by at least n minutes 1 999 m n exceeds the job s average execution time by at least n 1 900 m n is at least n less than its average execution time 1 999 You can specify more than one parameter in a Shout When Exectime statement Chapter 4 Defining how jobs should run 123 Defining messages to be shouted at the end of job processing
209. e performed after all scheduled jobs in the SMART Table have ended 132 Control M performs post processing defined in a SMART Table only after all jobs that were ordered in the table have ended or timed out At this time Control M assigns the group of jobs in the table a completion status and the post processing actions specified for that group completion status are performed m If one or more jobs ended with errors NOTOK Control M assigns the table a status of Not OK m If all jobs in the group ended successfully Control M assigns the table a status of OK Control M User Guide Defining actions to be performed after all scheduled jobs in the SMART Table have ended If a table is reactivated because jobs in the table were rerun or new jobs were ordered into that table after the group of jobs finished Control M re evaluates the completion status of the table of jobs when the new jobs are completed and performs post processing for the table according to the new completion status NOTE If there are no jobs submitted in a table for example due to basic scheduling criteria the completion status of the group is OK Post processing actions for a table completion status OK are performed You fill in the post processing criteria as you would Steps criteria for a job only instead of filling in a regular On statement you fill in an On Table end statement which applies the criteria to the results of the SMART Table processing
210. e table will be held NOTE To update details you must perform a Hold on the job in the active environment before opening the job editing form and Free the job when you have finished the updates 2 Double click the job node The job editing form displays the job processing definition The Active tab displays details unique to the job order in the active environment 3 Edit the job processing definition as needed For an explanation of how to edit the job processing definition see Chapter 4 Defining how jobs should run Keep in mind the following points 262 Control M User Guide Viewing and editing the details of a job in the active environment You are working on a copy of the original Any changes you make apply only to the current copy you are editing They do not apply to the original or to any other copies that might appear in the active jobs file Not all pages or parameters that appear in the original appear in the active jobs file copy For example because the job is already scheduled the Scheduling tab parameters are unnecessary and this tab does not appear Conversely after a job is scheduled certain required parameters are generated during job processing These do not appear in the job editing form that you define in Control M Desktop but are displayed in a panel in the job editing form that is unique to Control M EM the Active tab Furthermore some variables and AutoEdit parameters might display their
211. e the connectivity problem by specifying connection configurations and testing them To automatically resolve a connectivity problem 1 Click Repair to allow for automatic identification of available IP addresses The connectivity problem is automatically resolved by using the IP address displayed in the window NOTE If the automatic resolution failed use the manual resolution procedure described below ensuring that the Use bidirectional communication check box is selected 2 Click Close NOTE The configuration changes affect the entire installation including client and server processes that were running while the changes were made You should restart every running Control M EM application such as the Control M EM GUI client Control M EM GUI server Control M Desktop GAS server Control M Forecast server BMC Batch Impact Manager server and CMS server To manually resolve a connectivity problem 1 Click Advanced to open the Troubleshoot Connectivity window 2 In the Troubleshoot Connectivity window temporarily clear the Use bidirectional communication check box for this procedure Control M User Guide mM Connectivity problems NOTE The Use bidirectional communication check box at the bottom of the window reflects the value of the BiDirPolicy parameter in the CORBA configuration file By default all Control M EM processes use bidirectional communication When testing the accessibility of the hostnam
212. e user to see the current status of jobs from the workload perspective To display the Workload Monitor from the Control M Enterprise Manager GUI or Control M Desktop click Tools gt Workload Management gt Workload Monitor The Workload Monitor window appears with a list of workloads in the active environment The following table lists the columns in the Workload Monitor window with its description Table 60 Workload Monitor window columns Column Name Description Name Indicates the workload s name Wait Nodes Indicates the number of jobs waiting for nodes resources due to one of the following reasons m agent or execution host is unavailable m node currently has its max number of jobs running m node has reached its max CPU usage restrictions Chapter 23 Managing Workloads 293 23 Table 60 Workload Monitor window columns Column Name Description Wait Workloads Indicates the number of jobs waiting due to restrictions on the maximum number of jobs running concurrently in the workload policy Running Jobs Indicates the number of jobs that are currently running simultaneously At the bottom of the Workload Monitor window a table row is displayed The columns in this row show the number of jobs according to the column definition for all jobs in the Active Jobs File The column totals do not count jobs twice That means that if a job appears in more than one workload it will only be counted once
213. ecast integration 236 Control M User Guide cme V0 Selecting jobs to monitor InithOdUCHON lt 4 2 2 24 344 33 4 Fo o8 o8d booed bh oe ith one EEEN phe dabehs 237 S lectinga ViewPoint seks repente bpn rane eohl erie vue reer ereeiekurees 238 Displaying nodes in their own ViewPoint 0 000 0 c cee eee eee 238 Filtering the ViewPoint Cispla via wccrse cece va yeas we BWA ee hee ent wenden ees 239 SW HC ING FINCTSs oot ia dek a heen eat Wegneopeaiuectiy ensure A a T ia 239 Defining dynamic filtersic ccasec0 ries txaeteeyiwerdwedeese ee di aera eens 240 Defining sloval MNCS ctiip cate dene etre pani dasa yet a nae eae es 242 Defining View POs oi din tcnetas eens ke Powe rantini sime eee hee iania sees 243 Defining the set of jobs to load to memory collections 244 Defining the display hierarchy oi lt i scseseuiens cen eenev ibe se aeewer ine 245 Alternative method for defining ViewPoints the ViewPoint wizard 246 Introduction Job processing problems are the exception not the rule and it is the exceptions that you want to monitor By limiting the active environment jobs that you load and display in the Control M Enterprise Manager window to those jobs that appear problematic you simplify job monitoring and significantly reduce processing overhead The mechanisms described in this chapter provide this functionality a ViewPoints a ViewPoint consists of a number of referenced subcomponents
214. echnique saves you from having to enter the common values for these jobs individually You can use the Find and Update feature of Control M Desktop to perform updates on large numbers of existing job processing definitions Creating large numbers of jobs This section describes how to use the Mass Create feature to create large numbers of jobs with similar parameters Chapter 10 Creating and updating many jobs at once 177 Finding and updating many entities at once To create multiple jobs with similar parameters NOTE To use the Mass Create feature you must be working in your local workspace 1 In the Control M Desktop window choose Tools gt Mass Create or click ny 2 In the Mass Create dialog box choose the number of jobs to create and select the template to be used for creating the new job processing definitions To create a new template or edit an existing template click Edit Template For details about editing templates see Chapter 9 Setting up templates for standardized job and table definition TIP Instead of creating all jobs in a table with a single request you can use several requests and modify the template before each request The resulting jobs might then require less cleanup after you have created them 3 Click OK 4 After you have performed mass job creation you can create dependencies between the jobs by clicking and dragging on job nodes in the flow diagram Finding and updating
215. ecks and updates conditions starting with the Intranet prefix such as IntranetS Up and IntranetL Up In London a job named CheckL performs the same function Addition and deletion of conditions with the Intranet prefix in either location should always occur in both locations Using bi directional global conditions not recommended The following representation of the Global Conditions window illustrates a basic and intuitive way to define bi directional global conditions Prefix From Control Ms To Control Ms Intranet Seattle London London Seattle This definition specifies that addition and deletion of a condition that begins with the characters Intranet in either the Seattle or London site automatically generates the same update at the other site This is a valid definition for bi directional global conditions but is not efficient Chapter 16 Establishing job dependencies across Control Ms 219 Bi directional global conditions 220 Using regular global conditions recommended For more efficient distribution and processing of global conditions define jobs and global condition prefixes as follows The setup In this scenario you would create the following job processing definitions Jobs CheckS Purpose In Seattle this job checks intranet status and updates global conditions starting with the prefixes defined below This job updates two global conditions instead of one Intranet as was done in
216. ected a Job Type value other than OS a tab related to the particular job type is automatically added as the second tab in the job editing form For instructions on filling in this additional tab see the following m Fora BIM tab see the Control M Business Service Management Solution User Guide m For an external application tab see the appropriate Control Module administrator guide Chapter 4 Defining how jobs should run 81 Defining job processing definitions and SMART Tables basic procedure 82 TIP To be able to use this job definition as a basis for creating other jobs click Save as Template before proceeding 4 Save the definition by clicking Save Save amp Close or Save amp Order at the top of the editing form If the Audit Annotation function was activated the Audit Annotation window or an action confirmation prompt appears When saving the definition consider the following a If you save the job while working in an Online workspace or working through the Table manager the new or modified job processing definition is saved directly in the Control M EM database To use the job in production you must perform an upload to the Control M Server database m If you save the job while working in a Local workspace the new or modified job processing definition is saved in an XML file format or as an internal draft file To use the job in production you must write the job actually its table to the Control M EM d
217. ecting the rerun interval and the measurement unit or by entering an interval sequence and then select whether the cycle should be measured from the start end or target scheduling time of the current instance m Enter specific times for the job runs and select a lateness tolerance For jobs running in Control M for z OS specified times can be defined with days offset For example if the specified times were 13 00 15 00 14 00 1 17 00 2 then 13 00 and 15 00 would be submitted at those times on the day of order 14 00 1 would be submitted at 14 00 on the next order day and 17 00 2 would be submitted at 17 00 two days after the order day 3 Select the maximum number of reruns NOTE SF m If Cyclic Job is not selected the job is not affected by the values and rerun descriptions that are displayed in the Rerun Information area m Control M Server sorts the times entered in Specific Times and runs the job starting from NewDay time or Order time according to chronological order until the next New Day time Chapter 4 Defining how jobs should run 101 Defining automatic rerun for a job that ends NOT OK TIP m To provide logic to stop a cyclic job for example if the job ends not OK create the relevant On statement followed by a Do Stop cyclic statement in the Steps tab m You can use the Maxwait parameter in the Execution tab for cyclic jobs as well as non cyclic jobs to determine the maximum number of da
218. ecution and to intervene if necessary on page 269 Why Checking predecessor and successor job flows 258 In Control M EM you can identify and gather details about the following predecessor and successor job situations m Predecessor and successor jobs of a job Neighborhood For details Identifying predecessor and successor jobs on page 42 a Identify the maximum runtime for a series of jobs and list the dependent job nodes in the longest path Critical path described in this section m Predecessor jobs of a selected job that failed to run OK Enhanced Why described in this section After you have generated the list of jobs and displayed their details you can perform a number of other operations for example exporting the list NOTE To navigate directly to a predecessor or successor node without generating detail lists do the following 1 In the job node s pop up menu choose Branch Menus and then Predecessor or Successor 2 In the submenu select the target node Control M User Guide Checking predecessor and successor job flows To display the details of a Critical Path dependency 1 In the flow diagram expand all relevant group nodes so all jobs to be included in the critical path are visible 2 Select the first and last nodes in the path in the flow diagram The last node should be a descendant of the first node but not immediately below it 3 In
219. ed 2 To reassign the originally provided default settings click Restore Defaults Forecast defaults NOTE ee The Forecast panel and its defaults settings are only available if the Forecast facility is installed Table 74 Forecast settings Forecast panel Part 1 of 2 Field option Default to be set Color Settings Color of job nodes in the Forecast flow diagram You can select the color for executed jobs non executed jobs and the display of the execution time Start Day of the Week Day of the week on which a business week starts in the Forecast multiple nodes calendar display Maximum Jobs per Forecast Action Maximum number of jobs to be included in the Forecast multiple nodes calendar display Display execution time Time reference to be used when displaying the execution time in the job node or Gantt chart local time or the time according to the Control M Server Business Service Critical Path The critical path consists of the jobs in the Business Service that have the most impact on the completion time of the service The critical path is indicated in the flow diagram by special markings on the job nodes If Forecast predicts that the Business Service will be delayed the user can examine the jobs in the critical path to determine what factors are delaying the jobs Options m Show complete path The entire critical path is indicated m Show until first gap Only the part of the c
220. ed the table is ordered by the New Day procedure The New Day procedure and User Daily Jobs are described in the Control M User Guide Modified Yes indicates that the table has been updated but not yet uploaded Last Upload Time 24 hour format of last upload of the table to the Control M Server database in the indicated installation The following table describes the buttons of the Table Manager Table 38 Command buttons Table Manager Button Description New Opens the table editing form dialog box to enable definition of a new table For more information see Managing tables on page 144 Table Details Displays a window from which you can modify the selected table This window is described in Managing tables on page 144 Copy Opens the Copy Table dialog box to enable the copying of a table For more information see Managing tables on page 144 Chapter5 Organizing and managing jobs in tables 145 Managing tables Table 38 Command buttons Table Manager Button Download Description Copies the selected table from the Control M Server database to the Control M EM database Download is a background process You can perform other actions during transmission On completion the Modified field changes to No To download a table that is not displayed in the Table Manager window create the table and then download the table normally Force Upload Copies the selecte
221. ee To display the details of a Critical Path dependency on page 259 view the job s documentation Documentation for a selected job identify the predecessor jobs that failed to run OK This Enhanced Why feature can help you determine why a selected job or SMART Table failed to run as expected For details see To display the details of a job s predecessors that failed on page 260 view log messages for the job in the Job Log dialog box Log identify the predecessor or successor jobs of a selected job For details see Neighborhood Identifying predecessor and successor jobs on page 42 view statistics of the job s latest runs Statistics view the job s JCL or job script statements View JCL Script Chapter 22 Monitoring and intervening in production 257 Checking predecessor and successor job flows Table 52 Job monitoring actions Part 2 of 2 Action view the job s SYSOUTs In the displayed dialog box select the SYSOUT to view and click OK Note For z OS this option is available only if Control M Restart is installed in the Control M Note If the SYSOUT size exceeds the size limit defined for the Control M during installation the SYSOUT cannot be viewed Option View Sysout List view why the job has not yet been executed and intervene as needed Results are displayed in the Why dialog box For instructions see To view why a job has not begun ex
222. ee Hold and view the Log and Documentation m Users and Groups from a combination of Control M EM version 6 2 01 and Control M EM version 6 3 01 The job actions of a migrated group that does not yet have job filtering criteria defined will apply as they did in Control M EM version 6 2 01 However if after migration you define a job filter for this group the job actions allowed by this group will only apply to jobs allowed by this group NOTE SE BMC Software recommends that you not use this option When displaying the Active tab for a new user or group all of the Job Actions are unselected by default Table 133 Active tab fields and buttons Field or button Description Jobs Filter This check box is only displayed for groups When selected this check box enables the use of the Filter button to define filters for groups Note This check box is disabled for group definitions that were migrated from Control M EM version 6 2 01 and earlier Filter Button that displays the Jobs Filter Definitions window Jobs filter definitions that are relevant to alerts are used to automatically define the Alerts filter Browse actions Active job data the user can view Properties Documentation Log Statistics View sysout list View JCL view Why text Control actions Control actions the user can perform Hold Free Confirm Rerun React Restart Kill Bypass Update actions Update actions the user can perform
223. ees Cause edes Downloading tables from Control M to Control M EM 000005 Chapter 14 Automating job scheduling and maintenance Identifying automation criteria for tables 0 cece ee eee ee Chapter 15 Identifying data center resources available for Control M use Introduction 0 eee ence eee eee e eee e eens nes Filtering resources on startup o c2te ein dehy Pen End Pee has eke veh eee Allocating control resources 24045 nackte ei sed hee eRe ioe ised oeeRee teen ees Viewing the list of jobs and tables that use a control resource Defining quantitative SesCulles ii 25 criareenpevenewieweeet tie Pleas ete Chapter 16 Establishing job dependencies across Control Ms Defining global conditions co cc ceeds cnt egie Pane gieese showers sgertedeae ss Deleting global conditions civvacs css SokaKee tees ego ySeanes Yee dea eae es Sey Global condition logic and examples idnccurs deecve sant eee rerne Best practices J 6 nt ole tetas ckeeesea he belae ieee enee tle os obese bad ees Frequent updates to a global condition toggles 000 eee Bi directional global CONCIMONG ven 2 eedioG s KetaGne hacienda ee bed aes Chapter 17 Introduction to monitoring and intervention Monitoring and intervening in production s 0 ii ceese ik cee ee beeee dented WHERE TY so from Mere isi coke bnew se hee bee heee ee Sea yee Eeaw ewe Chapter 18 Ensuring Control M components are communicating
224. efine a quantitative resource TapeDr having a total quantity of 3 to Control M Wherever a job using TapeDr is submitted Control M drops the currently available quantity of the resource by the quantity the job uses until the job ends Control M will only submit BKP_Tallies if there is at least one TapeDr available 206 Control M User Guide Filtering resources on startup Filtering resources on startup You can filter resources on startup before they are loaded from the database This is recommended when working with a large amount of resources In the status bar you can view the filter criteria To filter resources on startup 1 Choose Options gt Show Refresh Filter on startup 2 In the Refresh Filter dialog box fill in the data that defines the resource and click OK To change the filter 1 Choose View gt Refresh Filter 2 In the Refresh Filter dialog box fill in the data that defines the resource and click OK Allocating control resources B You allocate release and view control resources in your production environment using the Control Resources window NOTE You can filter resources on startup before they are loaded from the database This is recommended when working with a large amount of resources For more information on filtering resources on startup see Filtering resources on startup on page 207 To allocate or release a control resource 1 In the Control M EM GUI choose Tools gt C
225. efined for this Control M the list will be blank 5 Click OK 6 To save the definitions or modifications proceed to step 4 on page 284 To continue defining or modifying a workload select a tab and continue time periods for Workload Policies You can define date and time periods when the limitations defined for quantitative resources and concurrently running jobs will be applied You define these periods by using a combination of date type and time type A type can be a specific periodic or range of dates and times All dates are according to the Control M s logical date To define a time and date period 1 In the Resources or Running Jobs tab of the Workload window click New The Quantitative Resource Number of Running Jobs Period Definition window is displayed 2 Define a Control M in the Control M field or select one from the drop down menu 3 For the Resources tab A Enter or select the name of the quantitative resource in the Name field B Define the quantity of resource instances available to the workload in the Quantity field Chapter 23 Managing Workloads 289 23 For the Running Jobs tab A Define the maximum number of running jobs in the Number of running jobs field 4 See the following table for descriptions and steps for defining date type and time type combinations for the period definition A preview of the period definition is displayed in the Preview field at the bottom of the window Time type is
226. efining Regular and Relative calendars 2 In the Periods toolbar identify the period m Select the identifier from the list m For Control M for z OS only in the text box enter a special character Only valid characters can be entered 3 Select the dates for which you want to provide the same period identifier or use the short cuts described in step 3 in the procedure for defining Regular and Relative calendars 4 Continue with step 5 to the end of the procedure for defining Regular and Relative calendars 166 Control M User Guide To define Rule Based calendars To define Rule Based calendars 1 Specify the scheduling criteria for Rule Based calendar in the Rule Based Calendar Definition dialog box Since the use inferface is like the one used for defining scheduling criteria for jobs and SMART Tables for more details see Defining scheduling criteria for a job basics on page 88 and Defining scheduling criteria fora SMART Table on page 129 2 Click OK EXAMPLE To schedule a job on each Wednesday in March in the calendar for March do the following 1 Select the first Wednesday of the month and drag over the other Wednesdays in the month 2 Click Save EXAMPLE To schedule a job on each Tuesday in every month do the following 1 Click Advanced 2 In the Advanced Dates Selection dialog box click the Tue check box and then click OK 3 Click Save EXAMPLE To schedule a
227. efinition in the Description field in the General tab This information will appear in displays such as job nodes enabling you to know at a glance what the job does Chapter 4 Defining how jobs should run 87 Defining scheduling criteria for a job basics In the Documentation field you can create a documentation file in order to provide details about the job For example you might want to document the purpose of the job under what conditions it should run necessary prerequisites whom to notify if there are problems and so on The file path can be up to 255 characters and the file name up to 64 characters The documentation file path can also be a URL using one of the following prefixes http https and ftp By clicking View to the right of the Documentation field you can view the documentation specified Defining scheduling criteria for a job basics 88 TIP If Control M Forecast is installed you can graphically display when and how often jobs will be scheduled by clicking Forecast Define the schedule for job or SMART Table in the Scheduling tab Starting with Control M EM 7 0 00 Fix Pack 1 the editing form for jobs tables and templates has a unified interface Through the Scheduling tab for each of these entities you can apply Rule Based Calendars RBC For more information about RBCs see Chapter 8 Using predefined calendars to schedule jobs The job scheduling definition is a combination o
228. eieweabeti ele pees eee e i a R on RR E 338 Chapter 28 Viewing and playing back archived data 341 Selecting and displaying archived ViewPoints 0 0 c eee eee eee 342 Playing back archived CVents s cn25 cabs snaneseeves Canes eenee cane eae 343 Appendix A Customizing the interfaces 347 Changing your password xix sscecensncee bee sees ber teaus er esns eee en eawberes 347 Adjusting list displayS s thence vineerttdeteae bers coe etaee ee eh ene eee ee 347 Modifying list displavescudia4 seve dre eka eiieetg eileen eels deh eRe es 348 Customizing default options ss sassa eee aw keen da errre rreren 351 Setting options for Control M Desktop 0 2 00 0 cece cece runnen 351 Setting options for Control M EM s ssc isesased een eeketerieverewe es 359 Setting options for the Control M Reporting facility 366 Appendix B_ Examples for defining jobs 369 Accessing the sample tall 24 ecucuw sls wee Penney Pe eeeer Pee endee setae 369 Organizing the company s accounting jobs the Ex Accounting application 370 Handling invoicing needs 2 20 ci 65 6 ried seas ererine kine tee eeeestaciw ed 370 Handling payroll processing Heeds 42 lt okisjigeecesaradistasy rrean 373 10 Control M User Guide Organizing the airline company s flight jobs the Ex Flights application Handling flight related communication needs 004 Organizing the IT department maintenance jobs
229. eighborhood dialog box specify the following information m Inthe Direction field select the node relationship To identify nodes branching in all directions from the selected node select Radial To identify the predecessor nodes of the selected node select Predecessor To identify the nodes dependent on the selected node select Dependent To identify the predecessor and dependent nodes above and below the selected node select Direct Relationship 42 Control M User Guide Printing the flow diagram m In the Radius field specify the number of nested node levels not number of nodes to branch out from the selected node Valid values 1 99999 5 Click Find to select the applicable job nodes in the flow diagram The number of applicable job nodes is listed in the dialog box In Control M EM a display area opens at the bottom of the dialog box and displays the list of those jobs and their details TIP If the details display area does not open in Control M EM click Details which alternately displays and hides this display area 6 Either close the dialog box or do one of the following m In Control M Desktop to save the data in a report click Save Report and fill in the details m While the Network Neighborhood details list is displayed in Control M EM you can perform the following tasks on that list Task How to display or hide an item count at the Click Item Count in the pop up menu for an
230. ek Days area done by clicking ALL a the relational connector is Or but And would also work Ensuring that CalcProfits runs only after CalcRevenue and CalcExpenses have ended successfully CalcRevenue and CalcExpenses can run in any order but both of those jobs must end successfully before CalcProfits can run The Conditions tabs of these jobs are filled in as follows m Both CalcRevenue and CalcExpenses have no predecessor jobs and therefore have no In prerequisite conditions Appendix B 371 Handling invoicing needs 372 m When each job CalcRevenue and CalcExpenses ends successfully it adds an Out prerequisite condition ExCalcRevenuOK and ExCalcExpensesOK respectively The date definition for these conditions is the keyword ODAT which ensures that the condition is added to the system with the original scheduling date of the job The symbol in the Effect column instructs Control M to add rather than delete the condition To ensure CalcProfits runs only after both CalcRevenue and CalcExpenses have successfully ended CalcProfits has ExCalcRevenuOK and ExCalcExpensesOK defined as In prerequisite conditions To ensure that these In prerequisite conditions are only satisfied by Out prerequisite conditions from the same day they are assigned a date value of ODAT which resolves to the original scheduling date To ensure that both conditions are satisfied an AND relationship value is selected in the field above the In Conditi
231. elevant when you are working in a local workspace To write a table to the Control M EM database 1 From your local workspace in Control M Desktop do one of the following To write multiple tables 1 Choose File gt Write to Control M EM 2 In the displayed Write to Control M EM dialog box select the tables and click Write To filter the display select the filtering criteria and click Apply a To write an individual table do the following Chapter 13 Putting jobs into production 195 Uploading tables to the Control M database 1 If the Control M hierarchy is not displayed choose View gt Hierarchy gt Data Center Table Job 2 In the flow diagram or navigation tree right click the table node and in the pop up menu choose Write 2 If the Confirm Write Tables dialog box is displayed it means that the tables listed in the dialog box that you are trying to write already exist in the Control M EM database and are unlocked If you continue the write operation on those tables you will overwrite the existing version Click the check box next to the tables that you want to overwrite and click Write Depending on how system parameters are set after you click Write in the Confirm Write Tables dialog box Control M Desktop might prompt for an additional confirmation WARNING WW BMC Software recommends that you not overwrite any tables unless you are certain that you are not overwriting any important data
232. elong to a service BMC Batch Impact Manager and make the necessary definitions See Chapter 25 Service monitoring When you define schedules in job processing definitions you can reference a calendar to simplify scheduling definition For information on defining calendars refer to Chapter 8 Using predefined calendars to schedule jobs When you create a job processing definition you can assign to it an existing template containing predefined values To define a new template see Chapter 9 Setting up templates for standardized job and table definition You do not need to create and update job processing definitions individually For instructions on how to automatically create or update large numbers of job processing definitions refer to Chapter 10 Creating and updating many jobs at once Control M User Guide Understanding workspaces m To manage your jobs and tables copy delete and so on refer to Chapter 5 Organizing and managing jobs in tables When you have finished defining job processing definitions remember that you still must do the following steps to automate the production environment m To define security requirements as needed see the Control M Administrator Guide To move to production move jobs to production automate job scheduling and define resources and global conditions to the data center see Part 3 Moving to production m To check that the job
233. emergencies It is not scheduled to run but is instead manually forced when needed Because this critical batch job can be very damaging to the company if misused only the CIO can force it The job requires a large number of tape drives has no predecessor jobs and must complete the emergency backups before other jobs can shut down all systems Once submitted this job the highest priority Defining the job type and other general information about the job The General tab defines the following m The Tasktype is Job m The File Name and Path fields identify the file name and location of the batch job These are required fields for the Job tasktype m Because this jobs is intended only for an extreme emergency the Chief Information Officer is identified as the author Control M User Guide Handling IT job backup needs Defining the job scheduling As already noted this job is not scheduled Rather it is manually forced if needed Therefore it has no parameters defined in the Scheduling tab Ensuring that the job is treated with the highest priority Because of the critical and urgent nature of this job the Execution tab defines the jobs as critical and assigns it the highest priority 99 Ensuring that the job has the required tape drives available BackUpAllSystems must back up all systems to tape It requires 50 available tape drives before it run These are defined as quantitative resources in the Resources tab Ensuring
234. ency line of the condition that you want to delete and in the displayed pop up menu click Delete Dependency 2 Inthe Delete Dependency dialog box select the name of the condition to be deleted and the names of the jobs from which to delete the condition Control M User Guide Defining a condition format Defining 3 Click OK NOTE In the Flowdiagram Links panel of the Options dialog box you can customize whether the Delete Dependency dialog box will delete only In Conditions delete both In and Out Conditions or prompt for the type of condition to delete For details Appendix A Customizing the interfaces a condition format You can change the default dependency format used for creating job dependencies when you drag between job nodes in the Control M Desktop flow diagram Condition format definitions use functions An example of a condition format is MemName TO ToJob MemName which is the default condition format To define a Condition Format 1 In the Control M Desktop window choose Tools gt Options and select the Flowdiagram gt Links page 2 In the Condition Format field select the format for the condition 3 Click OK EXAMPLE Format of the automatically generated conditions should be jobname ENDED OK 1 In Control M Desktop select Tools gt Options 2 In the Options dialog box tree diagram click Flowdiagram gt Links 3 Select Job Name ENDED OK 4 Click OK Chapter
235. ent Display panel Table 76 Environment Display panel default settings Field option Reload active net Default to be set When selected enables information from Control M to be updated automatically in the Control M EM GUI If this option is not selected you must click Refresh in the Control M EM window in order to display the latest changes in the production environment Rebuild Flowdiagram when reload active net for minimum n jobs Minimum number n of job changes reloads or removals that causes the flow diagram to be rebuilt from beginning to end rather than updated when the user clicks Refresh Normally when Refresh is clicked the existing flow diagram is updated that is jobs are reloaded or unloaded as necessary But if there are too many changes this process is slow and it quicker and more efficient to rebuild the flow diagram from beginning to end Default This option is checked and n is 100 if there are 100 or more job reloads removals the flow diagram is rebuilt Arrange All every n seconds How often to automatically refresh the flow diagram Reload resources list every n seconds Enables automatic update of the status of resources in the Active environment as displayed in the Prerequisite Conditions Control Resources and Quantitative Resources windows The automatic update occurs at intervals according to the number of seconds specified Redraw Flowdiagram every n sec
236. er This can slow down other requests and data transmissions For this reason BMC Software recommends that you avoid implementing bi directional global conditions You can achieve the benefits of bi directional global conditions using regular one way global conditions This more efficient alternative involves m definition of additional dummy jobs for maintaining adding and deleting global conditions m definition of two global condition prefixes instead of one each representing a direction between the Control M installations 218 Control M User Guide Bi directional global conditions definition of two extra dummy global conditions for triggering the maintenance functions performed by the two dummy jobs A sample implementation is provided below first using bi directional global conditions and then by simulating the use of bi directional global conditions Sample scenario A set of jobs can only run if the company s intranet is up and running at all sites Therefore all sites Control M installations have cyclic jobs that at regular intervals check intranet status and update the status using global conditions If a particular intranet site in the company is down a job deletes the global conditions that indicate that the intranet is up and running In this scenario the company has two sites m one Control M installation exists in Seattle m another exists in London In Seattle a job called CheckS ch
237. er Guide Communicating with Control M Servers To display the status of communications In Control M EM choose Tools gt Communication gt Status The Communication Status dialog box opens and displays the status of communications Control M EM refreshes the display every two minutes but you can manually refresh the display at any time Each component in the communication path is represented graphically in the Communication Status dialog box as described in Table 50 m Ifa symbol is green the relevant component is active m Ifa symbol is red the relevant component is inactive Table 50 Communication Status dialog box fields and symbols Part 1 of 2 Field Icon or Value and Description Control M name Each Control M Server has a color coded indicator if m A green check indicates that the Control M is enabled m A Red X indicates that the Control M is disabled x When the gateway is restarted Control M EM attempts to communicate with the Control M Gateway Control M EM gateway connection to the Control M T g Communication Communication route between the gateway and the AIF ADA Control M Synchronization Synchronization of the active environment with the Active SS E Jobs file in the Control M If red Control M EM is not synchronized with the Control M Network Status Status of communication between the Control M EM workstation and the Control M The following statuses can appear in this field
238. er general information about the jobs Each of these jobs issues an operating system shutdown command For each of these jobs the General tab defines the following m The Tasktype is Command a The Command field contains the following operating system Stop command to be executed ctl u emuser p empass C component all cmd stop where component is the relevant Control M component GAS GCS and so on This is a required field for the Command tasktype m File Name is an optional field for Command type jobs Any value specified in this field appears as the job name in the job node in the flow diagram Instead of leaving this field blank BMC Software recommends that you specify the name of the job in this field as has been done in these sample jobs Ensuring that these jobs will not run until their predecessor job has ended Each of these jobs has ShutDownAllSystems ENDED defined as an In prerequisite condition in its Conditions tab This condition is only added after ShutDownAllSystems has ended successfully The In prerequisite conditions are assigned a date value of ODAT Control M User Guide Handling component shutdown needs Ensuring that successor jobs can run After each of these jobs ends successfully it adds two Out prerequisite conditions for example EX_GCSStopped and EX_GCSStopped ENDED either of which can be used by successor jobs The date definition for these conditions is the keyword ODAT which ensures that
239. er is used to mark holidays each set of holidays marked by a different letter is considered a different period Managing periodic statistics definitions Table 49 lists periodic statistics management tasks you can perform with the Periodic Statistics Manager Table 49 Periodic statistics management tasks Task to perform How to perform it to create a periodic statistics Click uh New For additional details definition see To create a periodic statistics definition on page 187 to change the basic details of a Select the periodic statistics definition and click periodic statistics definition Edit For additional information Ti see To change the basic details of a periodic statistics definition on page 188 to change the precedence of a Click T Move Up and m Move Down periodic statistics definition For additional details see To change the order of precedence of a periodic statistics definition on page 188 to copy a periodic statistics Select the periodic statistics definition and click definition Copy For additional details m see To copy a periodic statistics definition on page 189 to delete a periodic statistics Select the periodic statistics definition s click oy definition Delete For additional details see To delete a periodic statistics definition on page 189 To create a periodic statistics definition 1 In the Periodic Statistics Manager w
240. erarchy is referred to as the outermost table In many ways you interface with a SMART Table as you do job processing definitions For example you can edit or browse the SMART Table definition much as you would a job processing definition and many actions you can perform on job processing definitions can also be performed on SMART Tables You define SMART Table parameters in a form called the table editing form This form is very similar to the job editing form used for defining job processing definitions and the definition tasks are also very similar Chapter 4 Defining how jobs should run 127 Defining general SMART Table information NOTE m Because most details of the table editing form are similar to the details of the job editing form instructions for those details are not repeated here Instead see Creating and editing jobs on page 83 m The Scheduling tab of the table editing form provides additional scheduling functionality compared to what is found in the job editing form m This section describes details that are unique or different for the SMART Table Fill in the criteria as you would for a job but keep in mind that the SMART Table will apply its scheduling criteria to all the scheduled jobs as a whole Defining general SMART Table information 128 When filling in the General tab of the table editing form the following require special consideration m Specifying the table type m Specifying a SMART
241. eria are satisfied the job is not scheduled m If the job s basic scheduling criteria are not satisfied and And is selected the job is not scheduled Table 35 on page 137 summarizes the SMART Table logic An in a column indicates that the item has no impact on the scheduling decision for that row Table 35 Determining which jobs in a SMART Table get scheduled E job not scheduled none satisfied at least one satisfied satisfied Or job scheduled And at least one satisfied job scheduled And none satisfied job not scheduled not satisfied Or at least one satisfied job scheduled Or none satisfied job not scheduled And j job not scheduled EXAMPLE Schedule a job in a SMART Table only if the criteria in the Monthly RBC are satisfied and the day of the week is a Monday Tuesday Wednesday Thursday or Friday In the Scheduling tab 1 In the Week Days area click Mon Tue Wed Thu and Fri 2 In the RBCs Relationship area click and 3 Click Select Rule Based Calendar and in the displayed dialog box select Monthly click the right arrow and click OK Chapter 4 Defining how jobs should run 137 Copying RBCs from one SMART Table to another EXAMPLE tN Schedule a job in a SMART Table when either the criteria in the Quarterly RBC are satisfied or on any Saturday that is the 15th day of the month In the Scheduling tab 1 In the Month Days area click 15 2 In t
242. ers case sensitive m If the table should be ordered by the New Day procedure specify SYSTEM uppercase only as the value The New Day procedure and User Daily Jobs are described briefly in Chapter 14 Automating job scheduling and maintenance and in detail in the Control M Administrator Guide NOTE If you are defining a z OS table any value you specify in the User daily field is for documentation purposes only To actually assign the table to the New Day procedure or to a specific User Daily job follow the instructions in the Control M for z OS User Guide 4 Click Save or Save amp Close which saves the table in the Control M EM database and displays the name in the Table Manager window To use the table you must perform an upload For instructions see Uploading tables to the Control M database on page 196 To edit a table 1 In the Table Manager select the table and click Table Details 2 In the table editing form make the changes and click Save or Save amp Close you must be authorized which saves the changes in the Control M EM database NOTE m You can change a table to a SMART Table in the table editing form by selecting the SMART Table checkbox and defining the extended scheduling parameters To apply the changes to the table definition in the Control M database you must perform an upload For instructions see Uploading tables to the Control M database on page 196 14
243. es sh oh went eens ee ae 245 Alternative method for defining ViewPoints the ViewPoint wizard 246 Chapter 21 Monitoring and handling alerts 249 InithOCUCHOR ss scee eco s se kg he oe he a eek ee eed axe anes eed ente Dad ei 249 Connecting to the Global Alerts Server v2u cyseR ee oes ce tes ede aweeede wees 250 Displaying alerts ans crt 0s i a E EAE E Rene ee eee eee ees 250 Working withialerts reesi bende cobb 2s eee eh ath EEN e eh beet vase aieiaa 251 Chapter 22 Monitoring and intervening in production 255 MONINE soccer ok erase eee ss ok eg eet eee eens eee then yeaa a iit 255 Checking job status summaries by Control M application and group 256 Checking job status etatsie 5 tcier enue iowa dewee dd oeudwa eS eiews see 256 Performing job monitoring actiONs sc 14 2086 eee eee eee nese eee tee 257 Checking predecessor and successor job flows 0 000 cee eee eee 258 DUCCVENING cine ttereteee beeen aed epee R seekers eGR E ese era ds 262 Viewing and editing the details of a job in the active environment 262 Performing manual job intervention 60 s2i084 eee d ox dee enek nee eee Maes 265 Handling errors that occur when you intervene 0 6 c cece eee eee 270 Manually indicating satisfied conditionss 035 s issisesesaebadawae cine 270 Manually rescheduling jobs in the active environment 5 272 Activating third party applications ss suasusu rreren Bede ee ees 275 Chapte
244. etails see Defining global conditions on page 213 Chapter 22 Monitoring and intervening in production 271 Manually rescheduling jobs in the active environment Filtering prerequisite conditions on startup You can filter prerequisite conditions on startup before they are loaded from the database This is recommended when working with a large amount of conditions In the status bar you can view the filter criteria To filter conditions on startup 1 Choose Options gt Show Refresh Filter on startup 2 In the Refresh Filter dialog box fill in the data that defines the condition and click OK To change the filter 1 Choose View gt Refresh Filter 2 In the Refresh Filter dialog box fill in the data that defines the condition and click OK Manually rescheduling jobs in the active environment 272 Ideally the process of ordering jobs or SMART Tables into the Active Jobs file should be automated through use of the New Day procedure or User Daily jobs However you can manually reorder or force jobs SMART Tables appearing in the Active Jobs file as the need arises To order or force jobs and SMART Tables you must have the appropriate privileges To order or force jobs 1 In the Control M Enterprise Manager window select Tools gt Order Force or click ay The Order Force Jobs dialog box is displayed NOTE You can also order or force jobs using the cli command line utility described in the Control M Ut
245. eter Tooke wince thle ORAS e AE Clete ROM allele Po fom a ie oe oOo mR al teh co wd HD aeii iE are Chapter2 Working with Control M Desktop and Control M EM 29 Understanding the Control M Desktop and Control M EM layout Figure 2 Control M Enterprise Manager displaying a ViewPoint C0 Tn i nerpa Pasage tir Lonel in Hew bi piits Wie dal ciber Malia ha GSS Rea aa ke alti xj jeBs2n jae q aa ar wom JAR jae a oe a eh andy ite Iheig UM The Control M Desktop and Control M EM windows contain the following sections m navigation tree pane lists entities according to the selected hierarchy m main pane work area displays entities in a flow diagram format a job list format or a Gantt chart format available only if Control M Forecast is installed You can also use the main pane to display a job editing form or a table m Net Overview pane displayed only when a flow diagram is displayed this pane displays a thumbnail version of the flow diagram and highlights the part of the flow diagram currently displayed in the main pane Use this display for quick navigation in the flow diagram In addition if Control M Forecast is installed you can display the What If Scenario and Forecast Summary panes For more details see Chapter 19 Planning production with Control M Forecast 30 Control M User Guide Understanding the flow diagram In Control M Deskto
246. existing template m To create an all new template from beginning to end Click the Add Job Template icon on the toolbar to create a template for a regular job Click the Add SMART Table Template on the toolbar to create a template for a SMART Table The Template job editing form or table editing form is displayed The following figure shows the Template job editing form 172 Control M User Guide Defining templates Figure 11 Template job editing form Templie Daily 05 Commend liehibubed Jeb Data enber ters lt P00 E save GI arada jsut lee Girart CH rtnn it Clean CONTROL CONTROL 6 kb type s fi CD General C schecuting G Execution Conditions G Resources 1 set E Sers 2h rosera Hranei Parent Tsbler 3 Fill in or modify the template For instruction and hints see the instructions for filling in the job editing form in Creating and editing jobs on page 83 For a description of the parameters of in Job Editing Form and their usage and values see the Control M Parameter Guide In most free text fields exceptions include Control Resource Name Quantitative Resource Name AutoEdit var and Steps which are located in the appropriate tabs you can insert predefined functions instead of or in addition to literal values For example in the Job Name field you might insert the function jbl counter For instructions on inserting functi
247. f the Node IDs do not appear in the selection list click Load then select the node ID EXAMPLE A job should only be submitted by the Control M Agent resident on the pqrs3693 host machine In the Node ID Group field in the Execution tab select the pqrs3693 node ID Defining jobs that should run on nodes where load balancing has been implemented If your site has implemented load balancing you can define the job to run on a node in a specified load balancing group Control M Server will then select the node in that group according to the load balancing algorithm To have a job submitted on a node in a load balancing group In the Node ID Group field in the Execution tab select the group If the groups do not appear in the selection list click Load then select the group EXAMPLE A job must only be submitted on a node belonging to the UNIX_Group load balancing group In the Node ID Group field in the Execution tab select group UNIX_Group Defining a time frame during which jobs can be submitted 104 To limit the time frame during which Control M can submit a job define the time frame in the Activity Period area of the Execution tab To define a time frame during which jobs can be submitted 1 To define the earliest time that a job can be submitted specify the time in hhmm format in the Submit between field in the Execution tab 2 To define the latest time that a job can be submitted specify t
248. f the job scheduling parameters and the RBCs see Figure 5 on page 89 The Scheduling tab in job templates is identical to the Scheduling tab for jobs The SMART table definition includes the RBCs that can be applied to all the jobs and sub tables included in the SMART table see Figure 6 on page 130 The Scheduling tab in SMART table templates is identical to the Scheduling tab for SMART tables Control M User Guide Defining scheduling criteria for a job basics Figure 5 Scheduling tab in the job editing form iD C Diskribabed Jobi GeabeLenter Yersinns lt Po The following table describes the parameters in the Scheduling tab Chapter4 Defining how jobs should run 89 Defining scheduling criteria for a job basics Table 32 Scheduling tab parameters Part 1 of 4 Parameter Description Definition of m Set the criteria for the job scheduling using the parameters calendar Job s and text box in the tab Scheduling m Set the relationship between the job scheduling criteria and the selected Control M level RBCs by choosing either And or Or This relationship setting is only applicable for jobs it is not applicable for SMART tables Note Control M level Ruled Based Calendars can only be used with Control M Servers version 7 0 00 or later Ruled Based Calendars Name dynamically displayed depending if RBCs are supported List of names of the selected Control M level Ruled Based Calendars that applied to
249. f the number of jobs contained in the report Note that multiple jobs having the same name can be in the same or different tables Control M User Guide Definition report types m Prerequisite Conditions report lists conditions according to selection and display criteria This report is also called the Conditions report The report is similar to the information displayed when Tools gt Prerequisite Conditions is accessed from Control M EM or Control M Desktop m Control Resources report lists control resources and their attributes according to selection and display criteria The information in the report is similar to the information displayed when Tools gt Control Resources is accessed from Control M EM or Control M Desktop Quantitative Resources report lists quantitative resources and their attributes according to selection and display criteria The report is similar to the information displayed when Tools gt Quantitative Resources is accessed from Control M EM or Control M Desktop m Active Links report shows the links dependencies defined between all jobs or between selected jobs as determined by selection and display criteria Global conditions are also included in this report For example you can list all the dependencies and global conditions that are defined in a specific data center or only those defined between two groups m Active Manual report performs validity checks and lists the In conditions
250. fining how jobs should run 105 Defining that manual confirmation is required before job submission Defining that manual confirmation is required before job submission Submission of a job might depend on a non automated condition be satisfied For example m abackup job might require that you load a storage medium into a drive m ajob might require that you first activate an particular external application m ascheduled job should not be submitted until you have loaded a data file from an external source To define that a job requires manual confirmation before submission Check the Wait for confirmation check box in the Execution tab To actually confirm the job after it has been ordered right click the job node in Control M EM and select Confirm TIP In the job s documentation file or the Description field in the General tab you might mention the condition that should be satisfied before someone confirms the job EXAMPLE The BkpDailyTrans backup job requires that an empty CD be mounted as the backup medium 1 In the Execution tab check Wait for confirmation 2 Optionally write in the Description field in the General tab Mount empty CD before confirming backup Assigning priorities to jobs and defining and critical jobs 106 You can assign priorities to jobs by specifying 2 character alphabetic or numeric values as follows where AA is the lowest priority and 99 is the highest priority AA AQY
251. fining or modifying a Workload To create or modify a workload 1 In the Workload Manager window m Click Actions gt New Workload to define a new Workload m Select a workload and right click then select Workload Properties to modify an existing Workload Chapter 23 Managing Workloads 283 23 The Workload window is displayed 2 Define the Workload s name state and description Once a Workload s name is defined it cannot be modified 3 Define or modify the Workload s rules in one or all of the following tabs m Filter See Filter on page 284 m Resources See Resources on page 286 a Running Jobs See Running jobs on page 287 m Nodes Mapping See Nodes Mapping on page 287 Defining limitations and nodes mapping is optional for a Workload 4 To save all of the definitions and or modifications made to the Workload and close the Workload Window click OK at the bottom of the Workload Manager window The Control M Enterprise Manager GUI Server saves the data in the database NOTE Control M Server can reject the update if the data was being updated from an additional interface in parallel The user can force the update or cancel Definition tabs of the Workload window The following section describes the tabs in the Workload window and how they are used to define a Workload Policy Filter Jobs are included in a workload if they contain the attributes defined in the workload s
252. for as many step ranges as you want to define 2 To define On statements other than On Sysout do the following A B Click under the On Do header and select On Click under the Type header and select Statement Specify the program step Alternatively you can specify m step_range_name a ANYSTEP code criteria can be satisfied in any step m EVERY code criteria must be satisfied in every step Specify the procedure step Alternatively you can specify m blank m EVERY code criteria must be satisfied in every step Specify the codes that will satisfy the On step criteria You can precede them with relational operators lt gt or N not Most codes will be in one of the following formats Cnnnn step condition code where nnn is a 4 digit value Sxxx Step system abend code where xxx is a 3 character hex value Unnnn Step user abend code where nnnn is a 4 digit value Keyword value such as JLOST JNRUN and JFAIL OK and NOTOK For for information and rules regarding usage see the description of the On statement in the Control M Parameter Guide Chapter 4 Defining how jobs should run 121 Defining conditional processing under z OS 122 NOTE The N qualifier indicates that the DO statements must not be performed if the specified condition exists It does not indicate that the DO statements must be performed if the specified condition does not exist 3 To define an On Sysout statement do the foll
253. for requested resources The value is always 1 for exclusive resources 3 To allocate a control resource do the following A Inthe Control Resources window choose Actions gt Add B In the displayed Control Resource dialog box fill in the data to associate the control resource with a Control M data center specify the type of control and click OK 4 To release a control resource select it and choose Actions gt Delete NOTE You can delete a Shared control resource only if m nojobs own the resource that is the Counter field is 0 for all resource table entries for the resource m no jobs are requesting the resource that is there are no table entries for this resource with a Requested resource type Control M User Guide Viewing the list of jobs and tables that use a control resource Viewing the list of jobs and tables that use a control resource B You can view a list of jobs and SMART Tables for which a selected control resource is specified This list might help identify potential sources of resource contention For example if too many jobs require exclusive control of a resource you might want to see if it is possible to give some of the jobs shared control Because the list of control resources only displays resources in use at the time of the last update only jobs and tables that use those resources are in the list From the displayed list of jobs you can display a job in the job editing form
254. g Mondays in July and August The Workdays calendar schedules jobs on all working days of the year 1 In the Calendar field select Workdays 2 In the Months area click July and August 3 Click And 4 In the Week Days area click Mon Control M User Guide Defining complex scheduling criteria using rules Defining complex scheduling criteria using rules Sometimes required values cannot simply be specified as absolute values as the following situations illustrate m To schedule a job on the last day of the month clicking 31 in the Month Days area will not work because there are months with 30 days or less m You are using a defined calendar but want to exclude certain days that appear in the calendar In such cases using Rules can be helpful You can specify Rules by clicking Rules in the appropriate Month Days and or Week Days area To define complex scheduling criteria using rules 1 To apply rules click Rules in the appropriate area 2 In the displayed dialog box click the appropriate tab 3 Select or fill in the values as follows m Inthe Month Days and or Week Days tab click the days you can select multiple values and then click the rule format button m Inthe Regular Rules tab fill in the numeric values only for example specify 3 not L3 or 3 in the rule s entry field Separate multiple values by commas m Inthe Periodic Rules tab fill in the numeric value and period only for example 3b in
255. g the IT department maintenance jobs the Ex ITMaintenance application The IT department runs a number of maintenance jobs of different types that are collectively organized into the Ex ITMaintenance application Most of the jobs in the sample draft perform tasks that must be performed in extreme emergencies fire floods tornado watch and so on The draft also contains a job for routine non emergency backups During an extreme emergency it is imperative that emergency procedures be immediately implemented to get employees to safety get the system backed up and to shut down Control M components The sequencing of these jobs is important and this in turn affects the groupings of these jobs Jobs in this application fall into the following groups m jobs to perform backup in both non emergency and emergency situations Ex Backups m jobs to initiate emergency procedures in an extreme emergency Ex EmergencyProc m job to shut down Control M components after the emergency procedures have been implemented Ex ComponentStopping Handling IT job backup needs The Ex Backup group contains two jobs one that performs a standard backup of company data under normal circumstances and another that performs a full backup in an extreme emergency Defining a standard backup job The Backup job executes an operating system command copy to back up certain files from a directory to one of two tape drives It should be schedule
256. ginal MSGCLASS m For option N specify the new destination up to 8 characters FROM From class Limits the SYSOUT handling operation to SYSOUTs originating in the specified class To add or delete a prerequisite condition You must specify as Do Condition subparameters the condition name and date and whether to add or delete the condition To e mail a message Under the Parameters heading you must specify as Do Mail subparameters the To Subject and Msg fields These details can also be entered in the Mail dialog box displayed by clicking the arrow in the Details field along with the following additional fields Cc Urgency and Attach SYSOUT Valid values for Attach SYSOUT are m Yes m No m Default This subparameter takes its value from the ADD_SYSOUT_TO_EMAIL configuration parameter To open or close a Remedy ticket You must specify as subparametersa Do Remedy problem summary description and the problem urgency AutoEdit terms are supported Chapter 4 Defining how jobs should run 119 Defining postprocessing actions that depend on job processing results 120 EXAMPLE If the word error appears anywhere in the SYSOUT shout to the Administrator On Statement stmt code error Do Shout To Admin Urgency Very Urgent Msg Potential error in Job jobid EXAMPLE Any even completion code should cause the job to end OK On Statement stmt code COMPSTAT EQ
257. h are defined in the Sub table s direct parent The user can select which of these RBCs will affect the Sub tables submission A Sub table can be empty or can contain jobs and other Sub tables The following items should be considered when creating nested Sub tables a The number of nested Sub table levels within a outermost SMART Table is limited to 9 for a hierarchy limitation totaling 10 including the outermost table m Nesting Sub tables can only be done when working with Control M Server version 7 0 00 and later a The name of a Sub Table must be unique in its same level of hierarchy which means that you cannot create a Sub Table X under parent table a b c and then create another Sub Table X under the same parent table a b c To create a Sub table 1 From any Control M Desktop view A Right click on an existing SMART Table in the hierarchy B Select Add Table to Table in the displayed menu The Sub table editing form is displayed From the Table Manager A Select Tools gt Table Manager or click jg in Control M Desktop The Table Manger window is displayed B Click an existing SMART Table in the Table list in the window The Table Content window is displayed C Click the New Sub table icon on the Table Content window toolbar to add a Sub table at this level of the nested hierarchy or click on another SMART Table in the displayed list to open its contents The Sub table editing form is displayed
258. hapter 2 Working with Control M Desktop and Control M EM 41 Identifying predecessor and successor jobs 4 In Control M Desktop click Select All to select all nodes matching the criteria or click Find Next to select the first node that matches the criteria and click Find Next again to select the next node that matches the criteria In Control M EM click Find to select all nodes matching the criteria To change the focus navigate among multiple selected nodes Click the appropriate navigation button M First 4 Previous Next or hl Last or use the View gt Toggle Selection menu Identifying predecessor and successor jobs Using the Network Neighborhood feature you can identify predecessor and successor jobs of a selected job In Control M EM this feature also generates a list of jobs and displays their details and you can perform other operations on the list NOTE aaas To navigate directly to a predecessor or successor node without generating detail lists use the branch menus options For details see To navigate to a predecessor or successor node on page 41 To list predecessor or successor jobs and their details 1 In the flow diagram expand all relevant group nodes so all jobs to be included are visible Ensure that Condition nodes are not displayed 2 In the flow diagram or the navigation tree select the relevant job or SMART Table node 3 In the View menu choose Neighborhood 4 In the Network N
259. he Months area click All 3 Between the Month Days area and the Week Days area click And 4 In the Week Days area click Sat 5 In the RBC Relationship area click or 6 Click Select Rule Based Calendar and in the displayed dialog box select Quarterly click the right arrow and click OK Copying RBCs from one SMART Table to another 138 1 From the Control M Desktop window choose Edit gt Copy Rule Based Calendars which opens the Copy Rule Based Calendars dialog box NOTE tA The Copy RBCs option is enabled only when at least two SMART Tables each containing at least one RBC exist in Control M Desktop 2 In the Copy Rule Based Calendars dialog box do the following A In the From area of the dialog box choose the source data center and source SMART Table from which to copy the RBCs which displays the list of available RBCs in the SMART Table B In the To area of the dialog box choose the target data center and target SMART Table to which to copy the RBCs C In the From area select the RBCs to be copied and click the right arrow to add the selected RBCs to the list of RBCs in the To area 3 Click OK to save the current list of RBCs in the To area Control M User Guide Modifying dependencies for jobs within a SMART table Modifying dependencies for jobs within a SMART table B This procedure describes how to modify dependencies for jobs within a SMART table which ensures that each orderable service
260. he Periodic Statistics Manager window to save the edited periodic statistics definition To delete a periodic statistics definition 1 In the Periodic Statistics Manager select the periodic statistics definition click PA Delete 2 Click OK or Apply in the Periodic Statistics Manager window to save the change Chapter 11 Setting up definitions for periodic statistics collection 189 Managing periodic statistics definitions 190 Control M User Guide Moving to production This part presents the following topics Chapter 12 Introduction to moving to production 66 6 c eee 193 Chapter 13 Putting jobs into production sssssssnarss rnr srunr runur rrnr rnrn 195 Chapter 14 Automating job scheduling and maintenance 0 0 e rnnr eee eee 203 Chapter 15 Identifying data center resources available for Control M use 205 Chapter 16 Establishing job dependencies across Control MS 0 0 00 annaran 213 Part 3 191 192 Control M User Guide Introduction to moving to production This chapter presents the following topics Moving to prod chgN seri yerespreg beh arn pi Sods bx Sern Seu veh aka ees 193 Moving to production After you have defined tables and jobs to move to production you must perform the following tasks a Move the jobs to production a Automate job scheduling by using New Day processing m Define resources to Control M m Define global conditions to es
261. he PostProc tab Organizing the airline company s flight jobs the Ex Flights application The primary objective of this airline company is to keep its airline routes functioning according to schedule its seats booked and its airplanes flying The IT jobs that help the company meet its goals fall collectively into an application called Ex Flights Though in reality jobs in this application would fall into several groups for simplicity the sample draft contains one group Ex Communication which contains communication jobs and this group contains one job Handling flight related communication needs The airline company runs a number of communication jobs The sample contains one job UpdateFlightTimes which updates flight departure and arrival times Defining a job that updates flight departure and arrival times The UpdateFlightTimes job runs a program that distributes updated departure and arrival times to the airline company s travel agents and associated airport monitors and Internet sites This batch job should run repeatedly throughout the day at one minute intervals from the start of the previous iteration Appendix B 375 Handling flight related communication needs 376 Defining the job type and other general information about the job The General tab defines the following m The Tasktype is Job m The File Name and Path fields identify the file name and location of the batch job These are required fields fo
262. he same viewpoint always open automatically click Select and select the viewpoint m To have the last opened viewpoint from the previous session open automatically click Last Viewpoint m To have the Open Viewpoint dialog box automatically displayed enabling selection of a viewpoint for the current session click Display Open ViewPoint dialog Enable JEF Undo up ton To enable Undo or Redo in the job editing form click the option and select actions the number of Undo Redo operations that can be performed Default 100 To perform an Undo or Redo click Ctrl Z or Ctrl Y in the job editing form Display Tool Tips Display a tool tip whenever Control M EM is started Do not receive updates while editing jobs If someone else updates a job processing definition while you are editing it by default you receive the updates By checking this option will not receive such updates BMC Software recommends that you do NOT check this box Use compact Step Codes grid The Step Codes grid of the job editing form is displayed in a compact format Browse and select in Preset path Default location for filter presets Help Language Click Use local language Viewpoint If there is only one Sysout for a job then it will open automatically when the job has finished Click Open Sysout if there is only one Sysout for the job 360 Control M User Guide Setting options for Control M EM Environm
263. he time in hhmm format in the time to field Control M User Guide Defining a time frame during which jobs can be submitted 3 To link the time frame to a time zone other than the Control M Server s time zone for example to the Control M Agent s time zone select the time zone in the Time Zone field The time zone selection list provides both geographic name abbreviations and Greenwich Mean Time GMT offsets NOTE To ensure that if Control M did not submit the job before New Day processing for the next day began it submits the job as soon as possible afterward specify gt instead of a time value in the time to field EXAMPLE The job should be submitted after 6 00 PM In the Execution tab specify 1800 in the Submit between field EXAMPLE The job should be submitted before 10 00 PM in Sydney Australia In the Execution tab specify 2200 in the time to field and select SYD GMT 10 00 in the Time Zone field EXAMPLE The job should be submitted between 6 00 PM and 10 00 PM In the Execution tab specify 1800 in the Submit between field and specify 2200 in the time to field EXAMPLE AA The job should be submitted after 6 00 PM If it is not submitted before New Day processing the next day is should be submitted as soon as possible after that New Day processing In the Execution tab specify 1800 in the Submit between field and specify gt in the time to field Chapter 4 De
264. iagram arranging the display in CONTROL M Desktop 39 changing formats 36 defining dependencies 40 format 36 job dependency indicators 34 navigating 41 printing 43 understanding 31 focusing on node levels 37 forecasts overview of 233 Full access level Calendars panel 67 communication 59 control resources 65 Global Conditions panel 66 Prerequisite Conditions panel 63 Quantitative Resources panel 66 Tables panel 62 Full Name field Authorizations window 48 Group Authorizations window 52 User Authorizations window 51 G Gantt chart 36 358 Gantt chart format 30 Gantt view 359 GAS See Global Alerts Server GASStopped job 384 gateway stopping 385 GCSStopped job 384 General panel User Authorizations window 49 51 Global Alerts Server GAS connecting to 250 setting defaults 363 stopping 384 global conditions defining 214 examples 216 in Active Links report 321 in Link Definition report 321 overview of 213 SetUpEmergencyGlobalCondition job 380 unexpected results warning 215 Global Conditions panel User Authorizations window 66 Group Authorizations description 45 General panel 52 Privileges panel 47 59 Resources and Calendars panel 63 65 Group Authorizations window panels 50 Group name field 403 ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ Authorizations window 48 Group Authorizations window 52 Groups panel Authorizations window 48 GUIServerStopped job 384 H Help online 17 hiding nodes 37 hierarchy view 38 his
265. ially undo entries click Ctrl z To sequentially redo undone entries click Ctrl y This feature works even when the page with the entry is not currently displayed m Most fields are self explanatory and not explained here For a detailed description of the job editing form fields see the Control M Parameter Guide Chapter 4 Defining how jobs should run 83 Assigning a name to the job Assigning a name to the job In the General tab in the Job Name field you must assign a name to each job processing definition This name along with the file name parameter appears in various job definition and job tracking displays enabling you to identify the job You also use this name when ordering or forcing jobs NOTE When creating a table the Table field in the General Tab of the table editing form defines the name of the table the same as the Job Name field defines the name of the job in the job editing form The following should be considered m Table names cannot contain the character in its name m Names for tables and Sub tables may be up to 64 characters with the exception of Control M for z OS tables which may be up to 8 characters Identifying the task type and related information 84 You must identify the type of task this job processing definition performs Different task types require different accompanying information so depending on the task type select certain fields displayed in the tab might change to
266. ically be set to the Field Name for example Odate You can modify the value in the Value Param Name field 4 If you did not click Param specify in the Value Param Name field the value to be used for filtering the field The Value Param Name field allows you to specify and wildcards the symbol for Not logic and the symbol for Or logic Example Jobname LIKE A B Application LIKE APPL Explanation Retrieve all jobs whose jobname begins with A or B but whose application names do not start with APPL NOTE If you specify wildcard or special logic symbols in the Value Param Name field you must set the operator to LIKE or these symbols will be treated as literals 5 Click Fix for any entries that you want to appear in the panel the next time you create a new report or template of this type 6 Repeat steps 1 through 5 for each field that should be used for filtering And logic is assumed between multiple lines fields Control M User Guide Creating templates using the Report Wizard Fields panel The Fields panel is used to define which report fields will appear in the report To define the fields to be in the report 1 Select the field in the source left list box and click the right arrow to copy it to the defining right list box To remove a field from the report select it in the right list box and click the left arrow 2 Repeat step 1 for each field that should appear in the report TI
267. ice Definition Manager window appears 2 From the Add New Service Rule dropdown list select Add New Service Definition The Service Definition dialog box appears 3 In the Name and Description fields type the name and description of the service 4 Select one of the following options as described in Table 62 Table 6 amp 2 Service options Option Description Service based on filter Determines which jobs are part of a service based on the selected filters For a detailed description of these filters see the Control M Parameters Guide Service per ODAT based on__ Creates a separate service instance for all jobs that matches filter the selected filters and have different ODAT values Service per SMART Table Creates a separate service instance for every instance of a SMART table defined in the Filter tab that enters the AJF To group jobs to a SMART table see Creating and editing SMART Tables on page 127 To ensure that each orderable service is a unique entity and not dependent on conditions from another service see Modifying dependencies for jobs within a SMART table on page 139 Chapter 24 Control M Self Service management 299 Creating a service definition Table 62 Service options Option Service per job Description Creates a separate service instance for every instance of a job defined in the Filter tab that enters the AJF Orderable Enables Control M Self Se
268. ick Always check the Control M Desktop should automatically check the validity of parameter Default te t validity of jobs values as they are entered in the job editing form Note If set to No that is not clicked perform validity checks on all jobs in a draft using the Tools gt Validity Checks option For more information see Appendix D Checking job and table processing definition validity Display Tool Tips Display a tool tip whenever Control M Desktop is started Counter Default number of jobs to be created using the Mass Job Create and Find and Update facilities For more information see Chapter 10 Creating and updating many jobs at once Appendix A 351 Setting options for Control M Desktop Table 67 General settings General panel Part 2 of 3 Field option Click Enable Undo and in the Undo Size field set the number of actions that can be undone or redone Default 100 Default to be set Enable actions performed in the Job Editing form to be undone or redone Display Time Synonym Normally time parameters examples Time from Time until Shout Late time allow you to specify times ranging from 00 00 through 23 59 hours However if you check this option you can specify time periods ranging from New Day time until New Day plus 23 59 Example If New Day time is 7 00 AM this option allows you to specify a range from 07 00 until 30 59 Note The Time Synon
269. ick Force Delete R L which can often successfully perform a delete in a non serious error situation m To delete the calendars from the Control M Server database only click Remote Delete m To delete the calendars from the Control M EM database only click Local Delete Chapter8 Using predefined calendars to schedule jobs 169 Refreshing and unlocking calendars Refreshing and unlocking calendars If you have the required permissions you can also refresh the calendar display and unlock locked calendars Calendars are locked automatically while they are being edited and you should exercise great caution before unlocking them For example you might need to unlock a calendar that was being edited when a crash occurred To refresh or unlock calendars In the Calendar Manager click 3 Refresh To unlock calendars In the Calendar Manager select the calendars and click gf Unlock 170 Control M User Guide hme 9 Setting up templates for standardized job and table definition This chapter presents the following topics Defining templates veaaukiee ad rapieren pa en eP bees Oh Geel ele ees yes 172 Adding functions to template fields c11 s24 64s care ein t ewlacin ears 174 Managing templates 2iscie vi saciw tw hs eke nunn RGU E EES ReE ees Boke eee S RRS 175 Different jobs will often have the same values for many parameters To make the process of defining such jobs easier you can define the common values in a tem
270. igrating from Control M EM version 6 0 xx or 6 1 xx this option is selected for each user Password will expire every n days If selected the password expiration date is computed and displayed n defaults to the value of system parameter PasswordLifetimeDays The administrator can change the value of n for this user Default this option is not selected User must change password at next login If this check box is selected the current password expires and the user must change the password at the next logon Password expiration date Date when password expires Read only field Lock account Select to manually lock the account Clear to manually unlock the account If selected a message similar to the following is displayed Account was locked by user on mm dd yyyy hh mm ss AM PM NOTE If a Control M EM administrator uses the Authorization dialog to set a password the password complexity length and history requirements are ignored If the UserChangePassword system parameter is set to 1 its default value all users can change their own password using the Tools gt Change Password option If this parameter is set to 0 only users who have Full or Update permission to modify security definitions can change their own password Chapter 2 Working with Control M Desktop and Control M EM 51 Tabs in the User and Group Authorizations windows 52 Group Authorizations window General tab This
271. ility Guide And you can order or force jobs from the definition environment using the Order Force dialog box of Control M Desktop for details see Manually scheduling jobs and tables on page 198 2 In the Order Force Jobs dialog box select the Control M and optionally the table name For z OS select also a Library name Control M User Guide Manually rescheduling jobs in the active environment TIP Several jobs or SMART Tables can be ordered forced using the asterisk wildcard character in the table name or job name fields For example Specifying UD1 in the Table name will order force 1 outermost table that matches this prefix Specifying UD1 in the Table name will order force 1 outermost table UD1 Specifying UD1 Job will order force all jobs and or Sub tables whose name begins with Job The dialog box displays the list of jobs SMART Tables Figure 16 on page 273 and Sub tables Double clicking on a job displays the job editing form and double clicking on a Sub table displays the Sub table s content in the list and the Sub table s name with a character in the Table field To order or force specific jobs in the table select the jobs or type a job name or mask To order or force all the jobs in the SMART Table skip this step NOTE tA If the tables or jobs do not appear in the dialog box because they were created in Control M after the last update between Co
272. imulating bi directional global conditions Each phase in the processing flow is numbered and described in detail under Processing flow step by step on page 221 Control M User Guide Bi directional global conditions Processing flow step by step 1 The CheckS cyclic job in Seattle runs when the East2West Maint global condition is created the first time manually This job checks intranet status creates a global condition named West2East Check The Global Conditions server passes this condition to London Teata London Chapter 16 Establishing job dependencies across Control Ms 221 Bi directional global conditions 2 The CheckL job is triggered by the creation of the West2East Check In condition This job checks intranet status creates the East2West Check condition deletes the West2East Check condition locally meaning at the local Control M installation only because West2East is a one way prefix Seija London Habal Conmiitians Sarwar 3 The MaintS job which waited for the creation of its East2West Check In condition runs and creates the West2East Maint condition deletes the East2West Check condition locally deletes the West2East Check condition in both Seattle and London Because this condition was already deleted by CheckL in London processing is minimal ee ee eee Wei haim 222 Control M User Guide Bi directional global conditions 4 The Maint
273. in the total column In addition to the above default columns displayed in the Workload Monitor window customized columns can be added to the primary list of workloads and table row at the bottom of the window To add or remove columns from the Workload Monitor display 1 Right click on any column name in the Workload Monitor window To add summary columns right click on a column name at the bottom of the screen 2 Select Column Chooser The Customization window appears with a list of column names 3 Add or remove a column by dragging and dropping the column in the order of your choice in the Workload Monitor window or to the Customization window The following table describes the additional Workload Monitor columns Table 61 Additional Workload Monitor columns Column name Description Ended OK Indicates the number of jobs that ended OK Ended Not OK Indicates the number of jobs that ended Not OK Total Waiting Indicates the total number of waiting jobs including all jobs in m Wait Resources m Wait Nodes m Wait Workload Wait User Indicates the number of jobs in Wait User status Wait Condition Indicates the number of jobs in Wait Condition status Description This is the description of the workload as defined in the Workload Manager window Total This is the total number of jobs in the workload s 294 Control M User Guide 23 To view the properties of a workload 1 Select the W
274. in the calendar except on the 10th and 25th it will also be ordered on the 1st and 15th of the month even if they are not working days in the calendar Chapter4 Defining how jobs should run 97 Defining complex scheduling criteria using rules EXAMPLE Schedule the job on the all days in the calendar except those that fall on Wednesday 1 Click Rules in the Week Days area 2 In the Week Days tab click Wednesday and then click n 3 Click OK The job will be scheduled on all dates in the calendar unless the date falls on a Wednesday EXAMPLE Schedule the job on the 5th and 10th days of period A and ensure that the job will not run on the 5th and 10th days of period B 1 Click Rules in the Month Days area 2 In the Periodic Rules tab A In the field under the label Order the job on the n th day of period i from the beginning of the period enter 5A 10A B In the field under the label Don t order the job on the n th day of period i from the beginning of the period enter 5B 10B C Click OK 98 Control M User Guide Limiting scheduling to a particular date range Limiting scheduling to a particular date range You can specify a date range during which a job or SMART Table is eligible to be scheduled if other scheduling criteria are satisfied This range can be expressed in either of two formats m An active period during which a job can be scheduled sandwiched between two inactive periods inact
275. inactive date range during which the job cannot be scheduled 1 In the Active field select Until 2 For the Until value select the last date of the first active period active period1 during which the job can be scheduled The inactive period begins the day after this date 3 For the And From value select the first date of the second active period active period2 The inactive period ends the day before this date This date must be later than the Until value NOTE When specifying a date range using the Until And From format you must specify both values EXAMPLE Do not allow the job to be ordered on August 6th 7th 8th 9th 10th and 11th 1 In the Active field select Until 2 For the Until value select August 5 on the calendar 3 For the And From value select August 12 on the calendar Control M User Guide Defining cyclic jobs Defining cyclic jobs A cyclic job can be defined using one of the following methods m fixed interval job runs are separated by the specified interval m variable interval sequence job runs are separated according to the specified sequence of intervals m specific job rerun times job runs are according to the specified job start times To define a cyclic job 1 In the Rerun Information area of the Execution tab select Cyclic Job and click Set 2 In the Cyclic Job Run Times dialog box do one of the following m Specify the rerun intervals between job runs either by sel
276. indow click New which opens the Periodic Statistics Definition dialog box 2 Fill in the details for the new periodic statistics definition as follows Chapter 11 Setting up definitions for periodic statistics collection 187 Managing periodic statistics definitions 188 A Specify a name and enter a description for the periodic statistics definition B Choose an appropriate Periodic Calendar by specifying the name of the Control M where the calendar is defined and the name of the Periodic Calendar NOTE ABA Although the Periodic Calendar might be defined for a particular Control M server the Periodic Statistics Manager ensures that the new periodic statistics definition is applied globally to all jobs included in the definition regardless of which Control M server runs the job C Fill in the job filter criteria The fields of the job filter support regular expressions Statistics are collected for jobs matching these criteria according to the periods of the Periodic Calendar specified in the previous section 3 Click OK The Periodic Statistics Definition dialog box closes putting the new periodic statistics definition into the temporary Periodic Statistics Manager buffer You can now repeat the procedure from Step 1 creating additional periodic statistics definitions 4 Click OK or Apply in the Periodic Statistics Manager window to save the newly created periodic statistics definitions NOTE Before s
277. ined as all selected dates in the list between the hours defined 5 Click OK The defined period will be displayed in the Period column of the Resources or Running Jobs tabs Defining prioritization of Workload Policy node mapping enforcement 292 You can define an internal order to Workload Entities Workload Policy Nodes Mapping rules are evaluated in this order and may therefore directly affect the execution of jobs Resource and running jobs limitations are not affected by this order If a job is associated with more than one Workload and those Workload Entities have conflicting Nodes Mapping rules the Nodes Mapping rule of the first Workload to affect the job is the one enforced Once this rule is enforced on a job subsequent mapping rules of other Workload Entities will not affect the job s execution definition Control M User Guide 23 To define the priority order the workload list 1 In the Workload Manager window sort the list of workloads by the Order No column 2 Select a Workload in the list by clicking on its row The row is highlighted NOTE Only active workloads can be given a priority order in the list Inactive workloads do not have a priority status 3 Click the up or down arrows on the Workload Manager toolbar to move the workload to the desired order on the list 4 Click OK or Apply 5 Confirm by clicking OK when prompted Monitoring workloads The Workload Monitor enables th
278. ing automatically reconnecting 229 CONTROL M Desktop to a different GUI Server 27 modes of 352 Control actions Jobs panel 55 control resources overview of 205 Control Resources panel Authorizations window 65 Control M field Calendars panel 67 Control Resources panel 65 Prerequisite Conditions panel 63 Quantitative Resources panel 65 Table panel 61 CONTROL M IOABLCAL utility 164 Control M level Rule Based Calendars 129 CONTROL M New Day indicators 359 CONTROL M Desktop adjusting the display 35 arranging the flow diagram display 39 connecting to a different GUI Server 27 402 Control M User Guide customizing 347 filtering jobs 38 loading jobs 40 starting 26 CONTROL M EM adjusting the display 35 customizing 347 starting 27 CONTROL M Server time 358 conventions documentation 18 Copy Tags option disabled 138 copying existing user or group 49 copying scheduling tags 138 Critical Path 358 Crystal Reports application use of 319 CSV file exporting 43 CTMRPLN utility 164 customer support 3 customizing the GUIs 347 cyclic jobs defining 101 D date range for job ordering 99 Default access level communication 59 defining new user or group 49 definition mode 40 deleting calendars 169 global condition 215 job dependencies 140 prerequisite conditions 271 quantitative resource 210 tables 147 templates 176 user or group 49 dependencies See job dependencies dependency names displaying 36 Description field Autho
279. ing the comma represents a Boolean OR Example host01 host02 host03 Note is evaluated literally in collection and filter definition fields character Character Any character other than one of the above denotes the specific character Note In case sensitive fields Control M Desktop differentiates between uppercase and lowercase characters for example a and A are regarded as two different characters specialchar Escape character Denotes the literal value of the special character The special characters are the symbols described in this table Examples m To specify type m If you specify then has the meaning of period and not the same meaning as m Use to escape only where is the first character To save the definitions or modifications proceed to step 4 on page 284 To continue defining or modifying a workload select a tab and continue Chapter 23 Managing Workloads 285 23 286 Resources In the Resources tab the user can define the quantitative resource units available to the jobs associated with the Workload EXAMPLE AA For example if a quantitative resource is defined as having 10 units the Workload Policy can limit the resources units available to the jobs associated with the Workload to 5 In this example the Workload s jobs can continue to consume up to 5 resource units and then the remaining jobs will be in Wait No
280. ing 48 Groups panel 48 how to access 48 Jobs panel 53 Prerequisite Conditions panel 63 Privileges panel 59 Quantitative Resources panel 65 Users panel 48 AutoEdit variables 112 automatically reconnecting to server 229 automating daily job order 203 backups daily transactions example 86 sample scenario 377 BIMStopped job 384 BMC Batch Impact Manager stopping server 384 BMC Batch Impact Manager BIM reports 323 BMC Software contacting 2 Browse access level Calendars panel 67 communication 59 control resources 65 Global Conditions panel 66 Prerequisite Conditions panel 63 Quantitative Resources panel 66 Tables panel 62 Browse actions Jobs panel 55 Business Service Critical Path 358 401 ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ C Calendar field Calendars panel 67 calendars creating and editing 165 167 managing 168 170 overview of 163 Calendars panel Authorizations window 67 changing passwords 347 workspaces 40 changing password 44 Clear All buttons Jobs panel 56 CMSStopped job 384 collapsing the display 37 Collections Include In or Exclude From criteria 58 selection operators 57 colors of high level nodes 33 of title bar 32 Communication Status dialog box 231 communication between components 229 Condition field Prerequisite Conditions panel 63 conditions changing default format 141 defining prerequisite jobs 109 conditions See also global conditions Confirm Password field User Authorizations window 51 connect
281. ing out Performing other display adjustments o e wiiadecs Veoe cette seta vines Filtering the jobs displayed in a Control M Desktop draft Arranging the Control M Desktop flow diagram display Changing click and drag in Control M Desktop to define dependencies Creating workspaces and loading jobs into Control M Desktop Navigating in the flow diagram Identifying predecessor and successor jobs 2 v5 ieiee tbeleneiee coeya nrnna Printing the flow diagram Changing your password Assigning authorizations Authorization facility for limiting access to entities 000005 Authorizations window Tabs in the User and Group Authorizations windows 000 eee Chapter 3 Defining the production environment Understanding workspaces 17 18 18 23 23 6 Chapter 4 Defining how jobs should run 77 Defining job processing definitions and SMART Tables basic procedure 79 Creating and editing jobs lt a cpa oxere ci chead cya tenn eye ee eta eee epee ees 83 Assigning a name tO ME JOD i445 s2k swede edhe ede rruna nrun nrnna nnana 84 Identifying the task type and related information 000 000 84 Defining the job hierarchy sacs2 cceniws cha dds event eee este ere ease sire 87 Defining the job Ss owner and author 4456 iicasdeiseVexetjasersi advan es 87 Defining job doctinentatiOns i104 c0 ieee behets
282. ing the Service Monitor window is one minute This default can be modified by changing the Automatic Refresh parameter in the Service Monitor Window panel under Tools gt Options Control M User Guide Monitoring services Open all the jobs of the service in a new flow diagram by selecting Service gt Open Business Service ViewPoint View all problematic jobs in a service that have failed or ended late by selecting Service gt View Problematic jobs BMC Batch Impact Manger only View the log of the service by selecting Service gt Service Log The log provides information about changes in the service s status and the reasons for the respective changes You can select an entry and view the details for the entry using the Service Details window Add free text information about the service by selecting Service gt Service Notes For example you can mark the service that it is handled by operator A Jump to the BMC Batch Impact Manager job that defines the service in the currently open flow diagram by selecting the service and selecting Service gt Find Job BMC Batch Impact Manger only Update the deadline for a service by selecting the service and selecting Service gt Update Deadline BMC Batch Impact Manger only Open one of the following in read only mode by selecting Service gt Properties m Job editing form of the BMC Batch Impact Manager job m Service definition If the service was created from a Live rule
283. ing the set of jobs to load to memory collections 1 In Control M Enterprise Manager choose Tools gt ViewPoint Manager 2 In the ViewPoint Manager dialog box do one of the following a To create anew ViewPoint definition select the ViewPoints node and click New Then in the ViewPoint dialog box that opens enter a name for the ViewPoint To edit an existing ViewPoint definition select the definition under the ViewPoints node and click Edit 3 In the ViewPoint Properties dialog box do the following A Enter a description for the ViewPoint optional B Select a collection for the ViewPoint To edit the selected collection click Edit and follow the relevant steps in the procedure Defining the set of jobs to load to memory collections on page 244 C Select a global filter for the ViewPoint To edit the selected filter click Edit and follow the relevant steps in the procedure To define a global filter on page 242 D Select a Hierarchy definition for the ViewPoint To edit the selected Hierarchy click Edit and follow the relevant steps in the procedure To define a hierarchy on page 246 E After selecting the hierarchy select the Initial Level of the Hierarchy to display when the ViewPoint is opened By default the highest hierarchy level nodes are displayed in when the ViewPoint is opened F Click OK Defining the set of jobs to load to memory collections 244 A collection defines criteri
284. ion s original value was GLOBALaccount45 the update is set to 45accountGLOBAL If the field contains several values a list field such as the AFT File Path on Host 1 field the assign operator allows you to modify the whole list at once using comma separated values However you can set all cell values with the same test value like this Update AFT File Path on Host 1 replace expression test Chapter 10 Creating and updating many jobs at once 183 Managing updated jobs Managing updated jobs 184 When processing update expressions if the conditions of a particular expression is not met the expression is skipped and the next expression is evaluated However if a particular update expression fails for example if the specified change is not supported the job will not be updated for any of the other expressions and the update process will skip to the next job In the list of results the job is marked as skipped To correct a job with a validation error 1 In the Results grid area click Validate 2 In the Validity Checks dialog box double click a validation error The job editing form opens and the invalid field value is highlighted 3 Enter the correct value and click Save and Close To rollback updates 1 Select the jobs in the Results grid area that you want to rollback 2 Click Rollback Updates To highlight a job in the Desktop 1 Ensure that the Select in View toggle
285. is capability is especially useful after you have used the Mass Create feature to create multiple jobs Control M Desktop uses a default condition format to automatically define the In and Out conditions needed to create the dependency You can modify the default condition format For details see Defining a condition format on page 141 NOTE m To use this feature you must be working in your local workspace m This feature cannot be used to create Do conditions To create a job dependency 1 If you are not yet in Definition mode in Control M Desktop click E to enter Definition mode 2 In the flow diagram click the predecessor job node and drag the mouse to the successor job node Control M Desktop automatically adds the required Out prerequisite condition to the predecessor job scheduling definition and In prerequisite conditions to the successor job scheduling definition and uses In and Out connectors and dependency lines to indicate the dependencies in the flow diagram TIP You can customize Control M Desktop such that when you create dependencies using this procedure Control M Desktop will automatically create the Out condition needed by the successor job to delete the condition from the Conditions file after the job has successfully run For details see the Flowdiagram Links panel for Control M Desktop in Appendix A Customizing the interfaces To delete a dependency between jobs 1 Right click the depend
286. is section before writing uploading or ordering the jobs or tables or you might corrupt your database And when you are ready ensure that you set the default back to automatic validity checking Appendix D 393 Checking the validity of job and table processing definitions To check the validity of the jobs and tables in a draft In Control M Desktop open the draft and choose Tools gt Validity Checks Control M Desktop checks the validity of all job processing definitions in the draft and displays the errors in the Validity Checks Error Messages dialog box To correct the errors found during a validity check Use one of the following methods to correct errors found during a validity check m Double click the job or table name in the Validity Checks Error Messages dialog box to open the job or table editing form for the job or table Make the necessary corrections and then click OK to save the changes to the job or table processing definition m If many jobs or tables have the same error s use the Find and Update facility to make the corrections For more information see Finding and updating many entities at once on page 178 394 Control M User Guide she Troubleshooting This appendix presents the following topics Connectivity DIODIEN Gs 2iiseid ed eirkaii a ede ap ey ees 395 Reporting Facility connectivity Glf0ls c 2000 sinerebvree teed een eeeeness 398 Connectivity problems This section provides informatio
287. is soon due to expire Fill in your new password and then confirm it TIP If the GUI Server to be selected is not listed contact your Control M administrator 3 To display jobs that are in the production environment A Choose File gt Open ViewPoint B In the Open ViewPoint dialog box select the ViewPoint to be used for displaying jobs C To filter jobs that will be displayed in the selected ViewPoint click Dynamic Filter in the Open ViewPoint dialog box Then do the following actions in the Dynamic Filter dialog box m Optionally select your previously defined Filter Preset a Fill in the fields for filtering For details see Defining dynamic filters on page 240 m Click OK in the Dynamic Filter dialog box D Click OK in the Open ViewPoints dialog box to open the ViewPoint in the Control M EM window and display the selected jobs NOTE To resolve connectivity problems between the Control M EM Control M EM server and Control M Desktop see Connectivity problems on page 395 of the Troubleshooting appendix 28 Control M User Guide Understanding the Control M Desktop and Control M EM layout Understanding the Control M Desktop and Control M EM layout Control M Desktop Figure 1 and Control M EM Figure 2 have very similar layouts Figure 1 Control M Desktop displaying a draft Pa CONTR Mifeskiop TLYD0053_ 7 femeser Lon Workspace CONTROL BM Job Definition Examples stm bet teem d
288. isplay that row in a Prerequisite Conditions dialog box 2 Make the changes to the data in the text boxes of that dialog box 3 Click OK to save the result of the update 4 Click OK to save the result of the update To delete a row in an Authorizations window Prerequisite Conditions panel 1 Select a row and click Delete to delete that row from the list 2 Click OK to save the result of the deletion NOTE The steps for setting authorization levels for control resources quantitative resources and calendars are similar to the preceding steps for setting authorization levels for prerequisite conditions Example To authorize a user to modify prerequisite conditions that start with the letter C or D 1 Click Add in the Prerequisite Conditions panel 2 In the New Prerequisite Condition dialog box specify CTM1 in the Control M text box type C in the Conditions text box and choose Update in the Access Level list box Click OK 3 Click Add again in the Prerequisite Conditions panel Control M User Guide Tabs in the User and Group Authorizations windows 4 In the New Prerequisite Condition dialog box specify CTM2 in the Control M text box type D in the Conditions text box and choose Update in the Access Level list box Click OK 5 Click OK in the User Authorizations window Authorizations window Control Resources tab The Control Resources tab specifies the control resources a user can access For information abou
289. isplayed at one time using the View gt View Selection and Neighborhood gt Open ViewPoint options m SYSOUT and Log functions are available only if there is communication between Control M EM and the respective Control M Servers For z OS the functions are only available for jobs running under Control M for z OS version 6 2 00 or later SYSOUT will be available for other Control M jobs in Control M 6 2 00 or later 342 Control M User Guide Playing back archived events Playing back archived events The Playback feature provides a toolbar for playing back production events in the displayed archived ViewPoint It enables you to review events from a specific time second by second or from event to event at the speed you require To use the Playback feature 1 If the archived ViewPoint is not displayed select and display it For instructions see To Select and display archived ViewPoints on page 342 2 In the Control M EM GUL click aa or choose Tools gt Playback which adds the playback toolbar to the Control M7 EM GUI window 3 Select the playback speed by selecting the number of units and the unit type number of units step in the Speed combo box fields 4 Click Play To intervene in the playback you can use the other buttons and the slide control You can also enter a specific time in the Time Display and click Go NOTE m Ifthe Alerts window opens during Playback it displays alerts from the current
290. issues see Reporting Facility connectivity errors on page 398 7 Generating a report To generate a report 1 In the Reporting Facility Start Page click Run in the row of the report you wish to generate 2 If the report was defined with variables that require input values at the time of report generation the Enter Parameter dialog box opens In this case specify the parameter for each parameter listed in the Parameter Fields area 326 Control M User Guide Displaying and working with reports A new report is generated from the template and displayed in the Report Preview Window NOTE An asterisk following the report name in the tab in the task bar indicates that the data has not been saved that is the report is new or has been refreshed Displaying and working with reports When you generate a report it is automatically displayed in the Report Preview window You can also display any previously run report that has been saved To open a previously run report Choose File gt Open from the toolbar and select a report The selected report is displayed in the Report Preview window one page at a time The Group Tree pane at the left displays the list of groups in the report In the Report Preview window you can do the following Task refresh the data displayed in the report How to Click the Refresh button i or choose Edit gt Refresh Report Data toggle between showing and hiding
291. ist Summaries panel The Summaries panel is used to define if a group defined in the Grouping panel will display a summary of all records in that group in the report The summary will appear in the summary field and a graph can also be displayed in the report If a group has not been selected all fields in the Summaries panel will be disabled 1 In the Summary by field Summary for group and Summaries Function fields select a value from the drop down menu 2 To display the summaries in a chart click the Show Chart box and select the type of chart you want displayed in the report 3 Define a title for the chart optional 4 Click Next to continue to the next panel or Finish to display report Sorting panel The Sort panel is used to define by which columns the report will be sorted You can specify up to three sort fields in ascending or descending order 1 In the Sort By field select the field to sort on and click whether the sort should be in ascending or descending order 2 Optionally repeat the process for the second and third sort fields Style panel Predefined report styles are provided with the product The Style panel is used to select in which style the report will be displayed When you select a style it appears in a preview area in the panel enabling you to determine whether you want to keep your selection or select a different style Select the style and check the results in the Preview area Change the selecti
292. ive period1 gt active period gt inactive period2 m An inactive period during which a job cannot be scheduled sandwiched between two active periods active period1 gt inactive period gt active period2 NOTE The Active parameter appears as a single parameter with several subparameters in the job editing form and the table editing form In all other Control M components the Active parameter appears as two separate parameters that function together the Active From Date parameter and the Active To Date parameter Despite this difference in appearance which is only a user interface issue the processing functionality remains the same in all Control M components To define an active date range during which the job can be scheduled 1 In the Active field select From 2 In the field immediately after From select the earliest date the job can be scheduled 3 In the To field select the latest date the job can be scheduled NOTE Optionally you can leave either the From value blank for no lower limit or the To value blank for no upper limit EXAMPLE Limit the dates that the job can be scheduled to August 6th 7th 8th 9th 10th and 11th 1 In the Active field select From 2 For the From value select August 6 on the calendar 3 For the To value select August 11 on the calendar Chapter 4 Defining how jobs should run 99 Limiting scheduling to a particular date range 100 To define an
293. l M components are communicating To select or filter the jobs that you want to monitor see Chapter 20 Selecting jobs to monitor To check or handle alerts see Chapter 21 Monitoring and handling alerts An alert is a message indicating that a problem or exception has occurred for a job Alerts are sent to the Alerts window To check job status summaries and job status details and perform other monitoring function see Monitoring on page 255 in Chapter 22 Monitoring and intervening in production To perform bypasses or immediate fixes see Intervening on page 262 in Chapter 22 Monitoring and intervening in production To handle batch service management problems see Chapter 25 Service monitoring To perform root cause analysis or other analyses in the production environment see the introductory chapter to Part 5 of this book Chapter 26 Introduction to analyzing and optimizing production Control M User Guide meso 1 8 Ensuring Control M components are communicating This chapter presents the following topics Communicating with the GUI Servers cceiwe preene bein eure elvebw bed ves 229 Automatically reconnecting to the GUI Server 0 000 e eee eee eee 229 Manually intervening in the reconnection process 000 cee eee 230 Communicating with Control M Servers 6 0cc cece cece eee e eee enees 230 This chapter describes how to view the com
294. l M level RBCs by selecting either And or Or NOTE When All is selected in the Select Rule Based Calendar window for a Sub table the RBCs that affect the Sub table are determined by the Control M when the Sub table is submitted The asterisk wild card will be evaluated only then as well Determining whether jobs in a SMART Table will be scheduled Before jobs in a SMART Table can be scheduled at least one RBC in the SMART Table must be satisfied or the job cannot be scheduled If at least one RBC in the SMART Table is satisfied job scheduling depends on the following logic where the relationship between the job scheduling criteria and the selected Control M level RBCs is determined by selecting either And or Or m If the job s basic scheduling criteria are satisfied and Or is selected the job is scheduled m If the job s basic scheduling criteria are satisfied And is selected and any of its RBC criteria are satisfied the job is scheduled m If the job s basic scheduling criteria are satisfied And is selected and none of its RBC criteria are satisfied the job is not scheduled Control M User Guide Defining scheduling criteria for a job in a SMART Table m If the job s basic scheduling criteria are not satisfied Or is selected and any of its RBC criteria are satisfied the job is scheduled m If the job s basic scheduling criteria are not satisfied Or is selected and none of its RBC crit
295. l node status colors Defaults Color Description White At least one job has a status of Unknown Red At least one job has a status of Ended Not OK Pink At least one job has a status of Wait User Blue At least one job has a status of Wait Resources Wait Nodes or Wait Workload Yellow At least one job currently has a status of Executing Green All jobs have the status Ended OK Chapter 2 Working with Control M Desktop and Control M EM 33 Recognizing job dependencies NOTE Emergency jobs are not considered when determining the basic color of a node The node color of aSMART Table is determined by both the status of the jobs in the table and the SMART Table itself The status is indicated by the color of the clock image in the SMART Table icon ff The title bar display color is the color representing the greatest degree of urgency Examples Table 5 presents examples of nodes Table 5 Sample node types Node type Sample node Application lpWinApl SMART Table Regular job T tvs 0035 Cyclic job currently executing Note Cyclic indicators are also displayed in job1 bat forecasts generated by Control M Forecast ih tlysO035 Recognizing job dependencies Job dependencies are established through prerequisite conditions In prerequisite conditions and Out prerequisite conditions in job processing definitions see the Contr
296. late editor and condition formats including the assign function in Find and Update Table 83 Valid functions Template editor and condition formats Function Description Field Name Name of a field in the job or group processing definition Use the name of the field exactly as it appears in the From source list in the Insert Function dialog box For example the Mem Name of this job is Mem Name Note for conditions and condition formats Where you specify both a FromJob predecessor job field name and a ToJob successor job field name the format is m For the FromJob fieldname m For the ToJob ToJob fieldname For example to indicate the Mem Name of the FromJob and ToJob specify Mem Name ToJob Mem Namel Counter Incremental number to be inserted in the value for example This job is Job Counter numerical field function quantity to add or subtract Indicates an amount to increment or decrement a number in the condition name format This function can be used to reference a previous or subsequent job for example Job Counter 1 ENDED Substr position length fieldname function Substring from a specified field or function position Offset of the substring within the field function zero based length Number of characters fieldname Name of the field function Name of the function For example to indicate the first two characters of Mem Nam
297. ld be clicked to display recently forced or ordered jobs Checking job status details To help you analyze jobs and manage job flows you can display and modify the processing details of jobs in the active environment You can also modify certain details for that job run For instructions and additional information see Viewing and editing the details of a job in the active environment on page 262 256 Control M User Guide Performing job monitoring actions Performing job monitoring actions You can perform various job monitoring actions on jobs displayed in the Control M EM ViewPoint Regardless of the action the process for performing the action is basically the same NOTE To perform job actions you must have appropriate authorizations in Control M EM and the relevant Control M To perform a job monitoring action Right click the job node in Control M EM and in the pop up menu choose the action option The pop up menu lists both monitoring and intervention actions Table 52 on page 257 summarizes the monitoring actions you can perform on jobs in the active jobs file Control M EM accesses and updates the relevant Control M server database NOTE Actions are disabled when communication is not synchronized Table 52 Job monitoring actions Part 1 of 2 Action Option identify the maximum runtime for a series of jobs and list the dependent Critical Path job nodes in the longest path For details s
298. lete listed applications When you click OK or Apply changes made to all definitions in the current session not just the changes made to the currently selected definition are accepted 4 Click OK 5 To rename an Application Activation definition double click it edit the name and press Enter Figure 17 displays an example of a filled in Activate Applications Editor dialog box Figure 17 Filled in Activate Applications Editor dialog box jactivate Applications Editor Aprica Ex Sarda Program E Proper Pies iC Soire CONTROLA ENERO MANE EE ef Initial Bo DP Fi Solhan Eg Panamratare FEOS HAME fi FIHEHRANE 5 4FPLICATIORSS CE e eee To run an application using an Application Activation definition 1 In Control M EM right click a job or SMART Table node in the flow diagram or navigation tree and in the pop up menu choose Activate Application 2 In the displayed list select the appropriate Application Activation definition The program runs using the command line and table parameters specified in your definition Control M User Guide Activating third party applications NOTE B The Control M on which the selected job was run does not need to be operational Chapter 22 Monitoring and intervening in production 277 Activating third party applications 278 Control M User Guide cme 3 Managing Workloads This chapter presents the following topics Introduction to Workload Management
299. list box in the ViewPoint toolbar select the global filter name The selected filter replaces the assigned filter in the current session only the ViewPoint s permanent filter assignment remains unchanged To filter with a dynamic filter 1 Depending on your current location perform one of the following m Ifthe Open ViewPoint dialog box is currently displayed that is you are in the process of opening a ViewPoint after you select the ViewPoint click Dynamic Filter m Ifthe ViewPoint is currently displayed choose lt Dynamic Filter gt in the Filter list box The Dynamic Filter Definition dialog box displays the last used dynamic filtering criteria 2 To use a different dynamic filter select the name of the filter in the Filter Presets field and click OK To create a new dynamic filter or edit the displayed filter definition follow the instructions in Defining dynamic filters on page 240 Chapter 20 Selecting jobs to monitor 239 Defining dynamic filters TIP After you have defined a dynamic filter for a ViewPoint if you click Dynamic Filter when opening the Open ViewPoint dialog box this dynamic filter definition is redisplayed until you clear this filter definition even if you subsequently selected a different filter from the filter selection list To clear the dynamic filter definition click Clear in the Dynamic Filter dialog box Defining dynamic filters A dynamic filter is a filter that you define lo
300. ludes wip Note must be the first character of the string for example in the expression first one the exclamation is part of the string first but is used to exclude the string one m is evaluated literally in collection and filter definition fields Brackets Denotes different possibilities for a single character The brackets enclose a string of possible values In addition the following symbols can be used within the brackets m denotes a range of characters m used as the first character in the brackets to denote n not or Comma or pipe Used to separate pattern matching strings enabling the user to specify more than one string the comma represents a Boolean OR Example host01 host02 host03 Note is evaluated literally in collection and filter definition fields character Character Any character other than one of the above denotes the specific character Note In case sensitive fields Control M Desktop differentiates between uppercase and lowercase characters for example a and A are regarded as two different characters Control M User Guide Pattern matching strings Table 81 Symbols used to compose pattern matching strings Part 2 of 2 Symbol Name Usage A Anchor start m Denotes not when used as the first character in brackets m Denotes the start of a word when not specified in b
301. m which tables can be accessed Table Tables that can be accessed Access Level Level of access as described in Table access levels Chapter 2 Working with Control M Desktop and Control M EM 61 Tabs in the User and Group Authorizations windows 62 B To add a row to the Tables tab 1 Click Add to display the Tables dialog box NOTE In previous versions of Control M EM authorization was not granted if a Table Library or Control M field was blank Values in these fields were treated as prefixes In this version these values are regular expressions that can be used for pattern matching A Specify names or name patterns of Control M installations in the Control M text box Use to denote all Control M installations For information about pattern matching strings see Appendix C Formats values and functions B Control M for z OS only Specify names or name patterns for libraries of Tables in the Library text box Use to denote all libraries C Specify names or name patterns for tables in the Table text box Use to denote all tables D Select the Access Level for these tables from the list box Table 20 Table access levels Permitted action Browse _ Viewing tables in Control M Desktop Default Cannot order or force jobs Can be modified to allow ordering and forcing jobs Update Modifying and adding tables Ordering and forcing jobs Full Modifying adding and deleting tables
302. many entities at once 178 The Control M Desktop Find and Update feature can find jobs and update fields and values in jobs and tables Using the Find and Update feature you can m search for job processing definitions tables with various values in any field including application form fields and list fields such as On Do statements m update add or remove any of the job processing definition and table fields NOTE The Update button is only enabled when working in a Local workspace and can not be used for Online workspaces and Forecast workspaces In Forecast workspaces conducting a search is limited to certain fields because only part of the job is loaded from the Forecast Server Control M User Guide Finding and updating jobs and tables Finding and updating jobs and tables To find and update jobs and tables 1 In Control M Desktop choose Edit gt Find and Update Figure 12 Find and Update window b Cyclic di Find and priate Job Mere i Gast ba free Rajnu j ct a Parme dyert combat Aia Eht Fithie Ei Conti Aunts Eel varibie 2 In the Find grid area of the Find and Update window choose or fill in the following information m field in the job or table processing definition to be searched and possibly updated m an operator m asearch value Chapter 10 Creating and updating many jobs at once 179 Finding and updating jobs and tables 180 NOTE When supported application f
303. mentation and perform Confirm actions m Users and Groups migrated from Control M EM version 6 2 01 Users can see all jobs permitted by the User Authorizations and can perform on those job any authorization permitted by either the User Authorization or the Group Authorization to which the user belongs EXAMPLE User Bob has permission to see jobs starting with a and is authorized to perform Free and Hold actions with regard to those jobs User Bob also belongs to the DBA group Members of this group are authorized to use the Log and Documentation browse features When user Bob logs on to Control M EM he will see all jobs starting with the letter a and will be able to Free Hold and view the Log and Documentation m Users and Groups migrated from Control M EM version 6 2 01 Users can see all jobs permitted by the User Authorizations and can perform on those job any authorization permitted by either the User Authorization or the Group Authorization to which the user belongs Control M User Guide Tabs in the User and Group Authorizations windows EXAMPLE User Bob has permission to see jobs starting with a and is authorized to perform Free and Hold actions with regard to those jobs User Bob also belongs to the DBA group Members of this group are authorized to use the Log and Documentation browse features When user Bob logs on to Control M EM he will see all jobs starting with the letter a and will be able to Fr
304. milar and they are described together Control M User Guide Defining job processing definitions and SMART Tables basic procedure Defining job processing definitions and SMART Tables basic procedure In Control M Desktop you create and modify m jobs processing definitions using the job editing form m SMART Tables using the table editing form To define a job or SMART Table 1 In Control M Desktop do one of the following actions To modify an existing job or table double click the job or table in the flow diagram navigation tree or list display TIP An easy way to find a job is to choose Edit gt Find Jobs To create a new job processing definition choose Edit gt New Job To create anew table choose Edit gt New Table NOTE You must be working in a local workspace to create a SMART table and you must create the SMART table before you create any job processing definitions in the SMART Table Newly created jobs can be associated with an existing SMART Tables and the SMART Table will be loaded from the database If the job is associated with a Sub table then all of the Sub table s parent table entities without their content will also be loaded to the draft or XML file The job editing form or table editing form opens Chapter 4 Defining how jobs should run 79 Defining job processing definitions and SMART Tables basic procedure Figure4 Job editing form SAAR Table Distributed
305. msan oora a aa e a Casa a a eter aes 156 Version Manager management tasks 0 0 159 Job version management tasks nannunnnunnrnnn nrun rrun rrna n rnn 160 FIND and Update actions nunnan uursunn rrun r runn r rnnr n nrnna 181 FIND Operators on estas iian Pee PEE E PET A ces ee EEE TIE seek as 182 Update Operators sr egoitia aaie ee eee Ot a ee ea ee eg 182 Periodic statistics management tasks 06 ccc cee eee eee 187 Communication Status dialog box fields and symbols 0005 231 Where to look for integrated features in Control M Desktop 235 JOD monitorin ACUONS 45152540 ied wis yaadest ede eset Hane eee 257 Fields of the Active tab 2 4 ccs vewtecieeusetas eeeetde ewe ele eee reeidewenedes 263 Job intervention actions 0 0 eect eee teen teenies 266 Bypass OPUONS 2x2 cons citvee sede vor briet ne TE aa aE eee eee a neenees 267 Workload Manager Widow wcsrtiss cee ich sia taednes Gs ieepeeeeaseereeds 281 Workload Manager toolbar 2i 2c2505seeebeie ris idncdedeels ers eeetvewnes x 281 Symbols used to compose pattern matching strings for workloads 285 Date ang Time Type c it oti eee rierien th belated bab eee kee EEE 290 Workload Monitor window columns 2 4 05 s046csstteerssbeeecsebeeeeeeben 293 Additional Workload Monitor columns 0 0 c cece cece eee 294 Service OPUONE 420d s ithe te Gel sheee E Peeper eect Gaede we la deus 299 New service Parameter di
306. munication status between Control M EM components and Control M installations It also includes instructions for maintaining this communication Communicating with the GUI Server Control M EM must be constantly connected to the GUI Server The GUI Server handles communication between each Control M EM GUI and other Control M EM components Automatically reconnecting to the GUI Server As part of Control M EM customization using Tools gt Options you normally designate alternative GUI servers in case of GUI Server failure If the connection to the GUI Server fails Control M EM displays the Control M Enterprise Manager Reconnect dialog box and attempts to reestablish connection with an alternate server beginning with the first designated alternate server Depending on site defaults you might first be prompted to click Connect Chapter 18 Ensuring Control M components are communicating 229 Manually intervening in the reconnection process The Control M EM Reconnect dialog box indicates reconnection progress a If reconnect with an alternate server is successful the Control M EM GUI continues to function restoring ViewPoints as desired The Control M EM GUI Reconnect dialog box closes and a message in the status bar indicates that a communication problem was resolved m If Control M EM cannot establish a connection with any of the alternate servers it attempts reconnection with the servers at regular user defined
307. n Control M Desktop Figure 7 Table Manager E Table Planar EB a a ates ode X A A SCORTRUGL os He etre enri zi Tae COHTAOLAI Lismp 144 Control M User Guide Managing tables The following table describes the filtering fields of the Table Manager Table 36 Filter fields Table Manager Field Description Filter When selected this check box indicates that the filter criteria should be applied Control M List tables only for the specified Control M installation Table List the specified tables only Library For z OS users List tables for the specified library only Modified Toggles between display of only Modified tables tables that have not been modified blank or both gray The following table describes the columns of the Table Manager Table 37 Column descriptions Table Manager Column Description Table Name of the table 1 20 characters case sensitive Control M Name of the Control M Library For z OS users Name of the library in which the table is located Platform Type of Control M platform Version Version of Control M Locked by Name of the Control M EM user currently modifying the table A table can be modified by only one user at a time User Daily Identifier used to assign the table to a specific User Daily Job 1 10 characters case sensitive If SYSTEM uppercase only is specifi
308. n see the Control M Business Service Management Solution User Guide You can only view alerts for those jobs that you are authorized to view Chapter 21 Monitoring and handling alerts 249 Connecting to the Global Alerts Server NOTE You can customize default settings for the alerts feature in the Alerts panel of the Control M EM GUI Options dialog box For details see Appendix A Customizing the interfaces Connecting to the Global Alerts Server 1 In the Alerts window choose File gt Connect 2 In the Connect to Global Alerts Server dialog box select a GAS server 3 Click Connect 4 Optionally to disconnect from the Global Alerts Server in the Alerts window choose File gt Disconnect Displaying alerts 1 In the Control M Enterprise Manager window choose View gt Alerts The Alerts window opens and displays the alert data Figure 15 Alerts Window alerts eee connected bo Ebe eee 0411 Tm ford ites cmner lic E Sort Ascending iaza T Sort eesoanating TETE I aoe E Der Sent E i i 7 ja jiarauinor 00095 LOO hr iere oe La oa lara F croup ey Box EESLI ERA ei JGR Lazo e Jerus EE eD a i Fikar Edter fenus DEE LELETO Dest FR ell columns F 2 Optionally to filter information in the Alerts window perform one of the following 250 Control M User Guide Working with alerts m Click on
309. n access Services Authorizes a user to view services perform job actions order hold and release services Select the panels complete them and click OK to add update or delete user or group authorizations in the Security database Each panel is described below Control M User Guide Tabs in the User and Group Authorizations windows User Authorizations window General tab Table 10 User Authorizations window General tab fields Field Description User name Name of user to whom authorization refers Required Note Blanks are not permitted in this field Emergency User To provide a user with the ability to circumvent external authentication enable the Emergency User checkbox When this checkbox is enabled you must enter a value in the Password and Confirm Password fields Note The Emergency User checkbox is only displayed when external authentication is enabled For more information see the Control M Administrator Guide Full Name Full name of the user Description Description of the user Password Password of the user The value is not displayed Note The Password field is disabled when Active Directory authentication is used For more information see the Control M Administrator Guide Confirm Password Password confirmation field The value is not displayed Password never expires If selected the password does not expire automatically Default Selected Note When m
310. n consist of any combination of literals constants AutoEdit system variables user defined variables functions operators and relationship indicators For more information see the Control M Parameter Guide and for mainframe Control M users see the Control M for z OS User Guide EXAMPLE The job script must access a file called BranchTrans with the current date as a suffix for example BranchTrans_061025 Specify in the job script the file name BranchTrans_ Odate Chapter 4 Defining how jobs should run 113 Defining postprocessing actions that depend on job processing results EXAMPLE A user defined variable for the day before yesterday is needed in the job script In the Set tab define the user defined variable as follows 1 In the Var name field specify TwoDaysAgo 2 In the Value field specify Day Minus 2 Note Day is a system variable Minus is an operator EXAMPLE If the job ends Not OK shout an appropriate message containing the completion code In the Step tab define the following m On Statement stmt code NOTOK m Do Shout To EM Urgn Very Urgent Msg Job JOBID ended NOTOK Completion code COMPSTAT EXAMPLE 1 uu _ l To distinguish between SYSOUT iterations of a cyclic job rename the SYSOUT file with a counter 1 To track the number of iterations in a cyclic job define the following user defined variable in the Set tab m Var name counter m Value counter
311. n on how to troubleshoot problems connecting the Control M EM server to Control M EM and Control M Desktop The Control M EM GUI and Control M Desktop use a callback connection method for several actions such as Upload Table and Open ViewPoint Control M EM uses a single XML CORBA configuration file called config xml that defines CORBA configuration data for all CORBA components clients and servers included During installation the file is configured with default values for the components Sometimes when the client machine has more than one IP address the default configuration does not provide optimum performance resulting in a failure If the callback connection fails during login the Connectivity Failure window is displayed warning the user about the connectivity failure Ignoring this warning message may result in a failure to open a ViewPoint or upload or order a table from the Control M EM server The Connectivity Failure window indicates that the Control M EM server is not connected to Control M EM GUI client and Control M Desktop The Connectivity Failure window enables the user to resolve the problem either automatically or manually During the automatic resolution all available IP addresses are scanned the best IP address with the shortest response time is identified and the CORBA configuration file is modified accordingly Appendix E 395 Connectivity problems 396 Alternately the user can manually resolv
312. n several places in the job editing form including m Shout and Do Shout statements m Sysout and Do Sysout statements a Do Mail statements For detailed instructions regarding the AutoEdit facility components and usage see the Control M Parameter Guide and for mainframe Control M users see the Control M for z OS User Guide Control M User Guide Defining and using variables that are dynamically resolved at runtime NOTE Application specific job parameters may not be specified in AutoEdit variables The names of application specific job parameters are prefixed by two percent signs the application s abbreviation and a hyphen for example SAPR3 for SAP OAP for Oracle E Business Suite To define and assign values to user defined AutoEdit variables for use in job scripts 1 Do one of the following m To define and assign a value to an AutoEdit variable unconditionally display the Set tab m To define an assign a value to an AutoEdit variable if conditional criteria are satisfied display the Steps tab define the condition criteria in an On statement click Do and select Set var as the Do statement 2 In the Var Name field or the name field of a Do Set var statement specify the name to be assigned to the variable Ensure that you prefix the name with a valid AutoEdit prefix 3 In the Value field specify the expression or formula to be used to assign the value to the variable This formula ca
313. n the corresponding condition in the other Control M Chapter 16 Establishing job dependencies across Control Ms 217 Best practices Best practices This section provides recommendations for implementing global conditions between different Control M installations Frequent updates to a global condition toggles If the status of a global condition frequently changes is added and deleted within a short period of time the Global Conditions server might become overloaded and the global conditions might not be distributed correctly To prevent this problem find a balance for Global Conditions server processing by setting appropriate values using Global Conditions Server Parameters options from the root menu These parameters define how the Global Conditions server should handle frequent updates to global conditions For details see the following menu options in the Control M Administrator Guide m Delete Time For Sent Conditions m Method for Handling Conflicting Conditions m The Mode for Handling Conflicting Conditions Bi directional global conditions Global conditions can be bi directional meaning that if a global condition is added or deleted in one of several Control M installations it is automatically added to or deleted from the others However the definition of bi directional global conditions generates additional overhead and puts additional stress on system processing particularly in the Global Conditions serv
314. n you define the production environment is defining appropriate job processing definitions which Control M uses to control job processing and handling This book describes how to define job processing definitions by using Control M Desktop you can also define job processing definitions by using batch job creation utilities To define job processing definitions you should be familiar with the concept of workspaces Understanding workspaces When you define job processing definitions in Control M Desktop you can work in one of the following workspaces Local workspace enables you to work locally You can load jobs from the Control M EM database into your local workspace in which case you are granted exclusive access over the jobs When you save your work the definitions are saved in XML file format or an internal draft file that you can later reopen in the local workspace XML format is the default file type For changes to be used in production they must be written to the Control M EM database and uploaded to the Control M database m Online workspace enables you to work on the Control M EM database When you load jobs from Control M EM into an online workspace you are granted shared access over the jobs When you perform a save the work is saved directly in the Control M EM database To be used in production changes must be uploaded to the Control M database Chapter 3 Defining the production environment 73 Understandi
315. nd Field Information to be displayed in the second field of the node body Default Control M Name Wrap field text in node Information in the job node should wrap to the next line If not selected the fields are truncated if necessary Node shape Shape for nodes in the Flow Diagram Select one of the following m Rounded displays nodes with rounded corners m Rectangle displays nodes with square corners Double Click on item to Function to be performed if a node is double clicked in the Flow Diagram Select one of the following m Expand item Expand or Collapse function Expands the selected node to display levels lower than the current selected node or collapses the selected node to hide all lower levels Note This option is not available when condition nodes are displayed m StepInto Item Step In function Changes the Flow Diagram to display nodes one level lower than the current selected node For more information see Focusing on different level nodes stepping in and stepping out on page 37 Flowdiagram Links panel Table 71 Flow diagram condition settings Flowdiagram Links panel Part 1 of 2 Field option Display Condition nodes Default to be set Condition nodes should be displayed in the Flow Diagram Display Do Conditions as dotted links Conditions created using the Do Condition parameter should be displayed The link is indicated with dotted lines
316. nd the jobs that process the information calculate the day s revenues CalcRevenue job calculate the day s expenses CalcExpenses job calculate the day s profits CalcProfits job determine which customer invoices should be billed that day Duelnvoices job Control M User Guide Handling invoicing needs This appendix examines the job processing definitions that automate the processing of these jobs Because of the dependency relationship that exists among the first three job those jobs are explained together Defining jobs to calculate revenue expenses and profits The CalcRevenue CalcExpenses and CalcProfit jobs run daily The CalcProfit job requires the revenue and expense information generated by the CalcRevenue and CalcExpenses jobs and therefore can run only after these jobs end All three jobs generate a printout of the processing results and therefore require an available printer Defining the job type and other general information about the jobs For each of these batch jobs the General tab defines the following information m The Tasktype is Job a The File Name and Path fields identify the file name and location of the batch job These are required fields for the Job tasktype Defining the jobs so that they are scheduled daily The jobs are scheduled every day In the Scheduling tab the following values are selected m all values of the Month Days area done by clicking ALL m all values of the We
317. new Workload See Filter on page 284 m Limiting the Workload s quantitative resource consumption See Resources on page 286 Limiting the number of jobs associated with the Workload which can be concurrently running on a specific Control M See Running jobs on page 287 m Routing a group of jobs associated with the Workload to a new node See Nodes Mapping on page 287 m Defining specific time periods when a Workload Policy s resource limitations and concurrently running jobs limitations are applied to the Workload s jobs See Defining time periods for Workload Policies on page 289 m Monitoring the status of jobs within a Workload See Monitoring workloads on page 293 Workload Manager 280 The Workload Manager window displays a list of Workloads their internal order and their details Workloads can also be defined modified or copied using the Workload Manager See Defining or modifying a Workload on page 283 Control M User Guide 23 In the Control M Enterprise Manager GUI or Control M Desktop click Tools gt Workload Management gt Workload Manager to display the Workload Manager window See the following table for the column names and definitions Table 56 Workload Manager window Column Name Description State This indicates the state of the workload Select either m Active m Inactive Order No This indicates the order in which Worklo
318. ng emergency situations Handling emergency situations 380 In the event of an emergency procedure several tasks must be performed as a prelude to complete shutdown of the entire system m All users must log out and leave the office The AllUsersLogOut job runs a program that instructs all employees to do this immediately m All data centers must be informed that this data center can no longer function The SetUpEmergencyGlobalCondition job performs this task by running a program that sends out a global condition to this effect m An emergency backup of all systems must be performed This is performed by the BackupAllSystems job in the Ex Backup group Only after these tasks are completed can systems be stopped The jobs that stop the systems belong to a different group in this application To simplify defining dependencies for these predecessor and successor jobs and to simplify dependency definition changes that might be needed in the future such as adding an additional predecessor job an intermediate job ShutDownAllSystems is defined in the Ex EmergencyProcs group ShutDownAllSystems is defined as the successor job to the above jobs and the predecessor job to the jobs in the Ex ComponentStopping group that shut down Control M EM components Defining jobs to initiate user logout and notify other data centers that this data center has an emergency shutdown The AllUsersLogOut and SetUpEmergencyGlobalCondition batch jobs are no
319. ng to the selected category For a brief description of available report types see Available report types on page 320 In the left pane of the New Ad Hoc dialog box select the appropriate category select All Reports to display all report types in the right pane Then in the right pane select the report type Fill in the fields of the Report Wizard panels Most fields on most panels are self explanatory For information on using the Report Wizard see Creating templates using the Report Wizard on page 330 When you have finished defining the report if you decide you want to save it as a template click the appropriate field in the Report Details panel and specify a name for the template To create a report template 1 2 3 Do one of the following Click File gt New gt Template Click the New Template icon on the toolbar Click the Add 4 icon next to one of the report types Go to step 3 The New Template dialog box opens The left pane displays several report categories representing different types of data environments for example Active or Definition environment The right pane displays the report types available for a particular category The report type display varies according to the selected category For a brief description of available report types see Available report types on page 320 In the left pane of the New Template dialog box select the appropriate category select
320. ng workspaces 74 NOT __ m In Control M Desktop you can also use an interface called the Table Manager to directly access and modify jobs in the Control M EM database In this case you are not working in a workspace m Ifthe Forecast add on is installed you can work in a special purpose workspace called the Forecast workspace Regardless of which workspace you are working in when you start Control M Desktop you can change workspaces or activate the Table Manager at any time Where to go from here NOTE These guidelines assume that you are already familiar with the information in Part 1 of this book If you are not review the instructions for starting and navigating in Control M Desktop in Chapter 2 before continuing with this part of the book Review the following list and proceed to the appropriate To define or update jobs and place them into the appropriate databases proceed to Chapter 4 Defining how jobs should run Chapter 4 Defining how jobs should run is the most important chapter in this part of the book It provides the instructions and examples for defining job processing definitions online in the job editing form and for defining SMART Tables online in the table editing form Regardless of whether you are defining jobs online or in batch or defining individual jobs or large numbers of jobs at once this chapter is very useful Decide whether the job or jobs b
321. no intervention should be required but if intervention becomes necessary you want to know about it Because of the sheer number of jobs running in your production environment you will want to manage the environment by exception that is focus on and monitor special critical processes and potentially problematic situations indicated by user complaints or error messages The information provided in this part of the book enables you to perform critical user tasks monitoring the processing of the jobs in your production environment and intervening and handling problems and issues as necessary Where to go from here B NOTE These guidelines assume that you are already familiar with the information in Part 1 of this book If you are not review the instructions for starting and navigating in Control M EM in Chapter 2 Working with Control M Desktop and Control M EM before continuing with this part of the book Chapter 17 Introduction to monitoring and intervention 227 Where to go from here 228 Monitoring the production environment and handling or intervening in problems is the subject of the chapters in this part of the book After familiarizing yourself with the preceding material in this introductory chapter review the following list and after you have reviewed this list proceed to the appropriate chapters To check if Control M is up and that communication exists between components see Chapter 18 Ensuring Contro
322. ns that occurred on a single day on a single Control M Server during that period and their breakdown by task type node ID and application type the average number of tasks and executions to occur during that period and their breakdown by task type node ID and application type User Guide BMC Batch Impact Manager report types The report also includes summaries for the whole environment for the period including the number of tasks and executions by Control M Server m Managed Servers report for a specified time period the report lists all computers that are either hosting the various Control M products software or are being used as computers for executing Control M jobs For each host the report provides details of the computer s number of CPUs CPU type OS type and version Additionally a summary is included in the report which counts the number of hosts for each combination of number of CPUs plus CPU type NOTE The summary in the Managed Servers report shows all hosts that are relevant to the specified time frame so multiple details per host may be shown for multiple reports each one having a time frame that is part of a whole period BMC Batch Impact Manager report types m SLA Analysis report for a specified service for a specified period of time this report displays the number of executions that ended as follows ended on time ended late or did not complete execution m History report for a
323. nship with the SMART table or Sub table it belongs to The RBCs of a Sub table are calculated and if the scheduling criteria is met a row is added in the Active Jobs file for the Sub table and its contents is ordered The Scheduling tab must contain at least one set of scheduling criteria that can be associated to the job processing definitions in the SMART Table you can define multiple sets of scheduling criteria To each set of scheduling criteria that you define in a SMART Table you assign a unique name in the RBC name list You can then associate any of these sets of scheduling criteria to a job or nested Sub table in the SMART Table by m selecting the RBC name in the job processing definition s Scheduling tab Chapter 4 Defining how jobs should run 129 Defining scheduling criteria for a SMART Table 130 m selecting the RBC name in the Scheduling tab of the Sub table editing form NOTE RBCs from one SMART Table to another on page 138 Figure6 Scheduling tab in the SMART Table editing form AE SMAR Table Diskribubed S440 0 Table Gatal enter Version lt MHI Ej sawe Gj Savedece E cose i0 Save b Order E Saves Template Template E05 SHART Dotituted When the same or similar RBCs are used in different SMART Tables you can copy them from one SMART Table to another rather than defining them manually For details see Copying CONTMOLH loca fF SMART Table Eh General 3 Schedslng
324. ntime 112 By specifying AutoEdit variables in job scripts and job processing definitions you can eliminate the need to change the scripts and job processing definitions before job submission For example if a job ID run date must appear in a file name you can use an AutoEdit variable to represent the ID or date AutoEdit variables are resolved at time of job submission during job execution or immediately following job execution depending on the variable NOTE MMM When AutoEdit variables are used in post processing as part of On or Do statements they are re evaluated AutoEdit terms are prefixed by the symbol Predefined AutoEdit terms include system variables functions and operators You can also define user defined AutoEdit variables using the Set tab or or Do Set Var statements in the Steps tab in the job editing form Definition of user defined variables requires that you specify the following elements m variable name this is a user assigned name that must have a valid AutoEdit prefix The most common prefixes are for local variables for global variables m value this is an expression or formula used for determining the value to be assigned during job processing This expression or formula can be made up any combination of literals constants and AutoEdit system variables functions operators and user defined variables Besides using AutoEdit terms in the job script you can use them i
325. nto applications and groups they represent only a small sample of the jobs one might expect to find in such applications and the only purpose of these jobs is to highlight certain job definition tasks Documentation txt files located in the same subdirectory as the draft file describe the jobs in the draft The name and path of a job s documentation file appear in the Doc File and Doc Path fields in the General tab of the job editing form To open the EXAMPLES draft In Control M Desktop click File gt Open browse to BMC Software Control M EM 7 0 00 Default Samples User Guide Examples and select EXAMPLES drf BMC Software recommends that you choose the View gt Hierarchy gt Application Group Job hierarchy when working with these examples Organizing the company s accounting jobs the Ex Accounting application The accounting requirements of the company collectively fall into an application called Ex Accounting These accounting requirements in turn fall into the following functional groups Invoicing Ex Invoicing and Payroll Ex Payroll m Ex Invoicing contains invoice jobs a Ex Payroll contains payroll jobs Handling invoicing needs 370 To handle its invoicing needs the company must process several types of information on a daily basis The company runs a set of batch jobs each day each job responsible for a particular type of information The following list indicates the types of information a
326. ntrol M User Guide Assigning authorizations Assigning authorizations Control M EM contains a security mechanism called the Authorization facility Using the Authorization facility the Control M EM administrator can limit the entities that a user is authorized to view or change For example a user can be limited to modifying resources and jobs that relate to a specific Control M installation Authorization facility for limiting access to entities Access to the following entities and actions can be limited Jobs that the user can view or modify This affects usage of all windows that rely on access to information originating in the active environment For example limiting the view to jobs from a single Control M installation limits the view in the Control M EM ViewPoint window Control resources quantitative resources global conditions and prerequisite conditions that the user can view or change This does not relate to resources and conditions displayed in the Job Details window For example a user may see that a job is waiting for a prerequisite condition in the Job Details window but not be authorized to create this condition using the Prerequisite Condition window Calendars and tables that the user can view or modify Limiting access to tables also determines which tables and jobs the user can order or force View Point components that the user can use or modify Administrative responsibilities such as Control M definitions
327. ntrol M and the Control M EM database type the names in the appropriate job or table text box Figure 16 Order Force dialog box with advanced fields in Control M EM ems J aa fa ae oe Hare Men H Parad Mare Lib appka Grup Deacii Task T Tots Dems Chapter 22 Monitoring and intervening in production 273 Manually rescheduling jobs in the active environment 274 4 To provide additional optional order force instructions click Advanced and then select the options to be used as follows m By default SMART Tables and jobs are ordered or forced using the current ordering date ODAT To specify a different date select the date in the ODATE area To ensure that the jobs are not submitted before the Odate select Wait for Odate to run Otherwise Control M will submit the jobs as soon as their execution criteria are satisfied Wait for Odate to run applies to jobs or tables submitted under Control M for z OS version 6 2 00 or later or under Control M Server version 6 3 00 or later To have the ordered or forced jobs or Sub tables automatically placed in Hold status as soon as they start to run click Order Force with Hold If you are ordering jobs and or Sub tables without ordering the table itself click Order Force into Table and select the appropriate table pointer To place jobs and or Sub tables into a table in the active jobs file click New To add jobs and or Sub tables to the
328. o a User Group Authorizations Prerequisite Conditions panel 1 Click Add to display the New Prerequisite Condition dialog box A Specify names or name patterns of Control M installations in the Control M text box Use to denote all Control M installations See the information about specifying pattern matching strings in Appendix C Formats values and functions B Specify names or name patterns for prerequisite conditions in the Condition text box Use to denote all prerequisite conditions C Select the Access Level for these prerequisite conditions from the list box Table 22 Prerequisite Conditions access levels Browse Viewing the prerequisite conditions only Update Modifying the prerequisite conditions and adding new ones Full Modifying and deleting prerequisite conditions and adding new ones Chapter 2 Working with Control M Desktop and Control M EM 63 Tabs in the User and Group Authorizations windows 64 D Click OK to add the defined prerequisite conditions to the list in the Prerequisite Conditions panel of the User or Group Authorizations window NOTE Use to denote all Control M installations or prerequisite conditions E Repeat step 1 for other access levels if any and other prerequisite conditions 2 Click OK to save the result of the Add procedure To update a row in a User Group Authorizations Prerequisite Conditions panel 1 Select a row Click Update to d
329. o perform it to display the details of a job Select a job version in the list and click Properties version The job or table editing form opens Note The details cannot be edited from this view compare two versions of ajob In the Job History dialog box select two job versions and click Compare The differences between the versions are marked with an icon and rows are highlighted Tip While the Version Comparison window is open you can select any of the available versions for comparison without closing and reopening the Version Comparison window Click either one of Down Arrow icons located at the right top corners of the Value in Version X columns and select a version from the menu to replace a current job witha Select required previous version in the list and click previous version of the job Restore Note If you are working in the Online workspace or in the Table Content dialog box from the Table Manager the job is restored in the Control M EM database If you are working in the Local workspace the job is only restored locally in the Control M Desktop You must then write the table containing the job to the Control M EM database in order to restore it in the database Control M User Guide Viewing a job s history Table 45 Job version management tasks Part 2 of 2 Task to perform to edit a previous version of the job and replace the current job with the edited version How to perform it
330. o release a service which frees it from being held and is available to run again To enable this permission and other job actions you need to select the required permissions for this user from the Active tab as described in Authorizations window Active tab on page 53 View orderable services that were started by other users Enables the user to view services that were ordered by other users NOTE When you add a service user authorization the user automatically receives permission to view non orderable services and orderable services that the user ordered 5 In the Definition area select one of the following access levels for each service in the Service Definition Manager m None Disables the user from viewing adding editing and deleting services in the Self Service Definition Manager m Browse Enables the user to view services in the Self Service Definition Manager 68 Control M User Guide Tabs in the User and Group Authorizations windows Update Enables the user to add and edit services in the Self Service Definition Manager a Full Enables the user to add edit and delete services in the Self Service Definition Manager 6 Click OK The new service permission appears in the Authorizations window 7 Click OK To edit a service permission 1 Double click a user The User Authorizations lt user gt window appears 2 Click the Services tab 3 Select the service permission that
331. ob can only be submitted between the hours of 1 00 and 3 00 AM This ensures that the pay check printing job which follows will have plenty of time to print the pay checks before they are needed Ensuring that the job is not submitted until all time sheets have been submitted To ensure that the job is not submitted until all time sheets have been submitted the Conditions tab contains the EX_TimeSheetSubmitted In prerequisite condition This condition is actually a manual condition that is it is not added by another job but is instead added manually by the authorized manager from accounting only after all time sheets have been submitted The manager adds the condition using the Why dialog box in Control M EM Control M User Guide Organizing the airline company s flight jobs the Ex Flights application Ensuring that the jobs that depend on successful completion of this job can run after the jobs ends ok In case other jobs depend on this job after the job ends successfully it adds the Ex_CalcSalariesOK Out prerequisite condition The date definition for this conditions is the keyword ODAT which ensures that the condition is added to the system with the original scheduling date of the job The symbol in the Effect column instructs Control M to add rather than delete the condition In addition this job shouts a message to the appropriate location indicating that the pay checks can now be printed This action is defined in t
332. oc report To create an Ad hoc report on page 329 m If you expect to generate the report more than once you can define a report template See To create a report template on page 329 m If you plan to use different source data criteria for example a different source Control M or different filtering criteria whenever you regenerate the report you can define dynamic parameters that enable you to specify the desired sources at runtime or define a different report template for each data source so that runtime input is not required TIP The Reporting Facility Start Page has several icons aligned in the rows of the various report types You can perform the following tasks by selecting a reports row using the icons Run a report using the Run icon Edit a template using the Edit icon Delete a template using the Delete icon Copy a template using the Copy icon Indicate a template as a favorite by clicking the star icon in the Favorite column Control M User Guide Defining templates and Ad Hoc reports To create an Ad hoc report 1 4 In the Reporting Facility Start Page choose File gt New gt Ad Hoc The New Ad Hoc dialog box opens The left pane displays several report categories representing different types of data environments for example Active or Definition environment The right pane displays the report types available for a particular category The report type display varies accordi
333. ode definition is manually changed after it has been affected by the Workload Policy the Nodes Mapping rules will no longer affect the job s execution node ID Group Once a job s execution node ID Group has been affected by a Workload s Nodes Mapping rules it cannot be affected subsequently by another Workload This means that if a job belongs to more than one Workload then the nodes mapping of the first Workload to affect the job will be enforced You can define the order in which Workload Entities rules are given prioritization in the Workload Manager window See Defining prioritization of Workload Policy node mapping enforcement on page 292 To map node groups or node IDs 1 Click the Add button for a new Node Groups Node IDs mapping definition 2 Enter the name of the Control M or select one from the drop down menu in the Control M column Control M User Guide Defining 23 3 Enter the name of the node group or ID or select one from the drop down menu of the Node Groups Node IDs field 4 Enter the name of the node group or ID or select one from the drop down menu of the Map To field The node group or ID defined in the Node Groups Node IDs column will be mapped to node group or ID defined in the Map To column NOTE The Node Groups Node IDs field lists all node groups and IDs defined by the selected Control M in the drop down menu If a Control M has not been selected or nodes groups have not been d
334. ol M Concepts Guide 34 Control M User Guide Adjusting the display Job dependencies in the flow diagram are represented by lines and arrows connecting job nodes for example i These lines can even indicate dependencies between jobs in different Control Ms The direction of arrows at the ends of the lines indicates the flow direction predecessor and successor relationship of the connected nodes Dotted lines between two jobs indicates a conditional link between the two jobs for example optional In conditions defined using OR logic An arrow without a connecting line at the top or bottom of a node indicates one of the following condition types m Arrow at the top a manual In prerequisite condition This condition does not get added automatically by another job but rather must be added manually see Manually indicating satisfied conditions on page 270 m Arrow at the bottom The Out prerequisite condition has no corresponding In condition or job dependent upon the condition In Control M EM the connecting lines between conditions are m green condition exists active m black condition does not exist yet inactive Adjusting the display You can adjust the Control M Desktop and Control M EM display Returning panes to their original positions You can adjust and move panes in the window by clicking and dragging To return panes to their original positions Choose View gt Dockable Windows gt
335. ollowing as needed To quickly filter choose View gt Filter Row and enter the filter criteria m To filter the displayed data click on the right top corner of a column header and select the appropriate filtering option a To create an advanced filter right click on any column header and choose Filter Editor Use the Filter Builder to enter the appropriate filtering criteria and the relationships between them The following information is useful for understanding the filtering criteria Type type of quantitative resource entries to display Defined displays all defined resources General information about the resource Only one definition entity exists per resource This entity is added by the user to define a new quantitative resource a In Use displays only resources being used by a job an In Use flag exists for each Control M job that is currently using the resource 210 Control M User Guide Defining quantitative resources m Required displays only resources requested by a critical job a Required flag exists for each critical job that requests the resource Resource note that quantitative resources used for load balancing have the resource_name node_ID name format In this format node_ID specifies the Agent platform on which the resource is located If a critical job to be submitted by the load balancing mechanism is waiting for available resources the required resources are displayed in this
336. ompt the user for confirmation before changing authorship Default For more information see the Security chapter in the Control M Administrator Guide 352 Control M User Guide Table 67 Setting options for Control M Desktop General settings General panel Part 3 of 3 Field option Keep table locked in local workspace Default to be set Keeps the table locked after writing the table to Control M EM Server in the local workspace This prevents other users from editing the table between the write actions of the original user The default is unchecked meaning the table is unlocked once a write action is performed Default Start Day of the Week First day of the week for use in the Week Days field in the job editing form Note This is the default value used for all data centers A Start Day of the Week can also be specified for each Control M using the Control M Definition window The value in the Control M definition window overrides the default value specified in the Options dialog box Write before upload in local workspace Automatically updates the Control M EM database before updating the Control M database when you perform an upload Help Language Click Use local language Workspace defaults Table 68 Workspace settings General Workspace panel Field option Open Load Jobs dialog when opening a new workspace Default to be set Open the Load Jobs dialog b
337. on facility 45 privileges panel 59 resources 63 65 Resources and Calendars panel 63 65 Select All buttons Jobs panel 56 selection mode 40 shout messages at end of job 123 shutting down all systems sample scenario 382 SMART Tables copying tags between groups 138 creating and editing 127 defining variables in 132 finding 179 managing 150 153 special characters in filtering and pattern matching 387 Prefix text box warning 215 SQL wildcards for filtering 390 starting CONTROL M Desktop 26 CONTROL M EM 27 stepping in and out in flow diagram 37 stopping BIM 384 Configuration Management Server 384 cyclic jobs 118 gateway 385 Global Alerts Server 384 Global Conditions Server 384 GUI server 384 successor jobs 42 support customer 3 symbols in filtering and pattern matching 387 syntax statement conventions 18 SYSDATA archiving 126 SYSOUT handling 125 T Table field Table panel 61 Table level Rule Based Calendars 129 tables automation criteria 204 creating and editing 138 managing 144 149 security 63 406 Control M User Guide technical support 3 Template editor functions 391 templates for job definition 171 176 for reports 328 functions in Template editor 391 temporarily filtering ViewPoint display 240 title bar color indicators 32 tree icons 31 Trend Analysis report 324 troubleshooting Copy Tags option disabled 138 job order changes ignored 200 locked calendars 170 locked tables 147 locked tables during uplo
338. on if you do not like the results Control M User Guide Creating templates using the Report Wizard Report Details panel The Report Details panel provides a summary of your report definition The Report Details panel has different fields at the bottom if you are defining a report definition instead of a report template 1 Torun the report immediately upon exiting the Report Wizard click the Yes selection button near the bottom of the panel NOTE The Yes or No value you choose is saved and used as a default the next time you edit a template in the Report Wizard 2 Click Finish The template is defined and saved You can use it whenever you want to run the report Data Source panel for the Active Links report The Data Source panel for the Active Links report has a check box called Produce Global Links Report If this box is checked the Control M list areas appear twice otherwise they appear once 1 To produce a Global Links report A Ensure this check box is checked B In the top list indicate the source Control Ms C In the bottom list indicate the target Control Ms In this case the output is generated according to the Global Links definition 2 If you do not want to produce a Global Links report ensure that this check box is not checked 3 Fill in the rest of this panel Filter panel for the Links Definition report The Filter panel for the Links Definition report has a Produce Global Links Report
339. onds Sets the time interval for refreshing the Flowdiagram display Default 5 Display status colors in Tree View Display the colors indicating job status in the Navigation Tree Hide empty tables Do not display a table or Sub table in the flow diagram if no jobs in the table are scheduled Display SMART Tables count in Status Bar Display the SMART Table count after the job count in the status bar Display Time Synonym Normally time parameters examples Time from Time until Shout Late time allow you to specify times ranging from 00 00 through 23 59 hours However if you check this option you can specify time periods ranging from New Day time until New Day plus 23 59 Example If New Day time is 7 00 AM this option allows you to specify a range from 07 00 until 30 59 Note The Time Synonym option exists in Control M Desktop Control M EM and the Control M Reporting facility Anytime you change this option in one of these windows the option is automatically changed in the other windows Display n last Jobs Actions in Report Maximum number of job and table actions to be displayed in the Action Report window If more than the specified number of messages are issued the oldest messages are removed from the window n can be any number from 10 to 999 Default 200 Appendix A 361 Setting options for Control M EM Flow diagram defaults Flowdiagram General panel Field option Sm
340. ons For details see the Control M Administrator Guide m You can use the Service Monitor window to monitor the overall processing flow of jobs that constitute critical batch services If you have the BMC Business Impact Manager add on installed you can monitor critical jobs for mission critical operations For details see Chapter 25 Service monitoring This section describes various methods for monitoring job processing from the Control M Enterprise Manager window Checking job status summaries by Control M application and group For selected high level nodes such as Control M application or group you can display status summaries for the jobs in that node To see a summary of job statuses in a high level node In the Control M EM window right click the node in the flow diagram or navigation tree and in the pop up menu choose Status Summary The General tab of the Status Summary dialog box displays color coded by status the number and percentage of jobs in the node with the status It also displays totals and the number of tables and Sub tables included in the totals If you selected a Control M Server node an additional panel Control M provides basic details about the Control M and the following communication information m Sync indicates if the current display is synchronized with the Control M Active Jobs file m Refresh needed indicates if the Refresh Needed button in the Control M EM window shou
341. ons see Adding functions to template fields on page 174 4 When you have finished defining the template save it by clicking Save Save As or Save and Close at the top of the template Chapter9 Setting up templates for standardized job and table definition 173 Adding functions to template fields Adding functions to template fields 174 When defining values in template fields you can add functions that get resolved when the template is used to create job processing definitions For example when using a template to create many jobs beginning with the same name you can add a counter function after the name prefix in the template s Job Name field to ensure that each job is created with a unique name To insert functions into a field 1 Place the cursor in the field and click Insert Function on the toolbar at the top of the template 2 In the Insert Function dialog box click Insert Function 3 In the displayed list perform one of the following actions to perform several of the following actions select just one and perform it and then continue with the remaining steps which will have you cycle through this step again m To use the value from another field select Field Name in the displayed From source list select the field whose value should be used in the field m To insert a counter select Counter To insert a substring select Substr in the displayed From source list select the
342. ons will probably have poor response time Appendix A 363 Setting options for Control M EM Reconnection defaults The Reconnection panel contains several default settings for reconnecting to an alternative server if the connection to the Control M EM GUI server is lost Control M EM attempts to re connect to the first server in a user defined list of alternate servers If this fails Control M EM attempts to reconnect to the next server in the list and this process continues until there is a successful reconnection or until there are no more servers in the list After there is a successful reconnection Control M EM continues to function using that alternate server as its GUI server even restoring ViewPoints if desired If Control M EM cannot connect to any server a message is displayed indicating that Control M EM will shut down In addition to enabling specification of alternative servers this panel enables specification of a number of other defaults including the intervals at which reconnection should be attempted and the maximum number of retries allowed NOTE TA Servers whose icons display in red have been manually added to the Alternate Servers list Table 78 Reconnection panel default settings Field option Default to be set Alternative Servers Select List the alternative servers Click the Select Servers button to add delete Servers and change the order of alternate servers For details see
343. ons work area No job other than CalcProfits has CalcRevenue and CalcExpenses as predecessor jobs To increase system efficiency after CalcProfits ends successfully it deletes the ExCalcRevenuOK and ExCalcExpensesOK prerequisite conditions from the system by defining them as Out prerequisite conditions with a symbol in the Effect column to instruct Control M to delete rather than add the conditions To ensure that only the conditions from that date are deleted the Out prerequisite conditions are defined with an ODAT date value m Incase another job has CalcProfits as a predecessor job after CalcProfits ends successfully it adds ExCalcProfitsOK as an Out prerequisite condition with ODAT as the date reference and a symbol in the Effect column Ensuring that the printer required by each of the jobs is available before the job is submitted Each of these jobs prints out a report of the data it processes revenues expenses or profits To ensure that the printer required for printing the reports is available the Resources tab in each of the jobs indicates that the job requires exclusive control of the printer in this case Printer1 The job is not submitted unless the printer is available Defining a job that prints invoices that become due The DuelInvoices batch job prints out the list of customers whose invoices have become due Defining the job type and other general information about the job The General tab defines th
344. ontrol Resources which displays the Control Resources window 2 In the Control Resources window do the following as needed m To quickly filter choose View gt Filter Row and enter the filter criteria m To filter the displayed data click on the right top corner of a column header and select the appropriate filtering option Chapter15 Identifying data center resources available for Control M use 207 Allocating control resources 208 To create an advanced filter right click on any column header and choose Filter Editor Use the Filter Builder to enter the appropriate filtering criteria and the relationships between them The following information is useful for understanding the filtering criteria Type Types of control m Exclusive resources owned exclusively by one job m Shared resources shared by a number of jobs m Requested resources requested by a critical job a Requested entry exists for each job that requests the resource needed by a critical job RBA For z OS only Relative Byte Address a unique identifier Priority it contains the priority indicated by one character 0 9 A Z of the critical path job waiting for exclusive control of the resource The field only appears in entries of critical path jobs waiting for a resource In all other entries the field is blank Counter indicates the number of jobs currently using the resource This value is not relevant
345. ooth display Default to be set When selected prevents flickering of the display during navigation in the flow diagram Note Selecting this option slows navigation Enable tooltip in low zoom When selected enables the node title to be displayed as a tool tip when the mouse pointer remains on the node Note This option is relevant only for zoom of 40 or lower With a zoom 50 or higher node titles are visible in the node Graph Placement Placement of parent job node in the flow diagram right middle left Default Parent in the Middle Click Maximize Downward Flow Flow diagram should be displayed as much as possible in vertical alignment rather than in horizontal alignment Click Minimize Graph Width Flow diagram should accommodate the available screen space Display n nodes in pack Indicates the number of nodes to display in each stack in the Net Overview Default 10 This is also the minimum value for this field Display n nodes in separator In high level nodes the number of jobs in the node are displayed in a Histogram in the bottom of the node This option defines the number of jobs to count as a unit for each level of the Histogram The default and minimum value is 10 Start Zoom Level Default magnification percentage of nodes displayed in Flow Diagram view when viewing a new network Valid values are 10 through 400 Flowdiagram Nodes panel The options of the
346. op to define dependencies B Normally you click and drag the mouse to select items In Control M Desktop however you can also click and drag between nodes in the flow diagram to establish dependencies Therefore before performing a click and drag you must let Control M Desktop know your purpose by selecting the appropriate node To set the mode of click and drag so that it performs node selection or dependency definition Do one of the following actions To set the flow diagram to Selection mode so you can select multiple nodes click To set the flow diagram to Definition mode so you can create dependencies click R NOTE Definition mode is the default mode when Control M Desktop is started Creating workspaces and loading jobs into Control M Desktop 40 In Control M Desktop you need to create a workspace or draft in order to load jobs and tables You can create and open multiple workspaces on the Control M Desktop in online local or forecast modes For more information see Connecting to a different GUI Server on page 27 To create workspaces or drafts Do one of the following To create an Online workspace choose File gt New gt Online Workspace To create a local workspace choose File gt New gt Local Workspace m To open an existing draft in the local workspace choose File gt Open Control M User Guide Navigating in the flow diagram To load jobs into your workspace
347. options that you used m messages received and the time and date that you received them product error messages messages from the operating system suchas file system full messages from related software License key and password information If you have questions about your license key or password use one of the following methods to get assistance m Send an e mail message to customer_support bmc com m Use the Customer Support website at http www bmc com support 4 Control M User Guide Contents About this book Conventions toed seeeegia ee Syntax statements Chapter 1 Introduction to Control M Enterprise Manager Automating your production jobs with Control M EM 0000005 Chapter 2 Working with Control M Desktop and Control M EM Starting Control M Desktop Connecting to a different GUI Server ayn ck eas heer eee ead ee ee Starting Control M EM Understanding the Control M Desktop and Control M EM layout Understanding the flow diagram eee eka ceeded eet saya badges Recognizing job dependencies icici vedediweie Pinew ee edu s Chad eee ewes Adjusting the display Returning panes to their original positions 0 e cece eee eee eee Changing the data display format anise tees co iabe eee emer nea Displaying dependency names in anode 0 600 c cece eee Focusing on different level nodes stepping in and stepp
348. or browse This action is enabled when one and only one workload in the list is selected This action is available to all users including those with only browse authorization Delete Deletes existing workloads This action is enabled when at least one workload in the list is selected Multiple Workloads can be selected and deleted at the same time Full authorization is required to perform this action Move Up Workload Defines a higher priority for the selected workload over other workloads on the list Full authorization is required to perform this action Note Workload list must be sorted by Order No for this option to be available Move Down Defines a lower priority for the selected workload below other Workload workloads on the list Full authorization is required to perform this action Note Workload list must be sorted by Order No for this option to be available Open into Viewpoint In the Control M Enterprise Manager GUI opens a viewpoint with the default hierarchy Control M gt Application gt Group gt Jobs and the filter according to the workload attributes Control M User Guide 23 Table 57 Workload Manager toolbar Toolbar button Synchronization status Action Opens the Synchronization Status window This window displays a list of all Control Ms version 7 0 00 and higher and their synchronization status If a Control M is not synchronized then the
349. orkload by clicking on the workload s row 2 Select Actions gt Workload Properties The Workload window appears in Read Only format To view the jobs in a specific workload 1 Select the workload in the Workload Monitor window in The Control M EM GUI The list of jobs cannot be viewed from the Control M Desktop 2 Click File gt Open into viewpoint The workload is displayed in the Tree view and flow diagram Chapter 23 Managing Workloads 295 23 296 Control M User Guide Control M Self Service management Control M Self Service management OvervieW 0 6 eee eee 298 Service euMsNONe s ciagr yey ee yah eae ues on oot Sea ee evade uae ree as oes 298 Dervice PUES 02 4234 ue eek eee athe eens oes ENS eee ne eeu s Bode eyes yas 303 Chapter 24 Control M Self Service management 297 Control M Self Service management overview Control M Self Service management overview Control M Self Service is a web based application that enables you to view your services which are containers of jobs and analyze those services and jobs that are problematic After you have determined what the problems are you can resolve them by performing various service and job actions Before you can view services in Control M Self Service you need to create services in the Service Definition Manager which enables you to model the production environment for your end users The Service Definition Manager enables you to create edit and delete the
350. orkspace and does not affect the database until a write action is performed To display a list of item versions on a specific date and time using a filter criteria 1 Select Tools gt Version Manager in Control M Desktop 2 In the top of the window specify the date and time changes were made to the version since the specified date and time you want listed Jobs and tables which meet the specified criteria will be displayed with any indication of change compared to the entity s present status 3 To limit the scope of the job and tables listed by using a filter criteria define values for the following definitions m Control M all tables and jobs for this Control M m Table the table and its list of jobs m additional information click Additional to define additional filter criteria NOTE In addition to the filter criteria defined in Step 3 you can use the Change Type buttons to further limit the scope of the filter All items which match the filter criteria and the selected change type are listed Change Type buttons include m Unchanged items items which have not changed since the specified date Modified items items which have been modified since the specified date including modifications which would affect the items inclusion or removal from the filtered list m New items items which have been created since the specified date including items which may have been created after the specified date and later modified
351. orms are installed applications fields can be selected from the Forms submenu You must restart Control M Desktop after installing an application panel 3 To add additional search criteria expressions click or Insert and repeat step 2 for each expression An AND relationship applies to multiple criteria expressions a job must satisfy all specified criteria to match To delete search criteria expressions select the expression and click sg or Delete 4 To save the specified Find and Update criteria for future use choose Presets gt Save and specify a name in the Save Preset dialog box and click OK 5 Click Find Jobs that match the criteria in the Find grid are displayed in the Results grid area 6 In the Update grid area choose or fill in the following information m one of the following update actions Update value of field is changed regardless of the previous value Update where value of field is changed depending on the previous value Add a new item is added to a list field such as In conditions Remove an item is removed from a list field such as In conditions m field in the job or group processing definition to be updated m an operator m asearch value m an assign function or replacement value if the search value is found NOTE MMMM When updating a table to become a SMART Table a Rule Based Calendar must be defined or the table entity will be marked as invalid See Defining scheduling criteria for a
352. owing A Click under the On Do header and select On B Click under the Type header and select Sysout C In the Sysout field specify a string or pattern to check for in the SYSOUT blanks are invalid characters D Specify the From column and To columns of the SYSOUT to be checked for the string or pattern 4 To define additional On Statements in the block specify an And or Or relationship between the current statement and the new statement to be defined A new On statement for you to fill in will be automatically opened 5 When the On block is as it should be fill in the Do actions as follows A Click under the On Do heading and select Do B Click under the Type header and select the Do statement C Fill in the displayed fields For a complete explanation of the Do statement parameters see the Control M Parameter Guide D Repeat as necessary EXAMPLE If Step1 ends with a condition code of C0004 and Step 5 ends with system abend code S0C4 perform the indicated Shout On Statement PGMST Step1 PROCST Codes C0004 AND On Statement PGMST Step5 PROCST Codes S0C4 Do Shout To emuser Urgn Regular Msg Backup operations Control M User Guide Defining messages to be shouted at the end of job processing Defining messages to be shouted at the end of job processing NOTE Shout statements in Control M for z OS allows additional values beyond those described below For details see the Control M for z OS User Guid
353. ox when you start Control M Desktop Default Workspace Default workspace when you start Control M Desktop Local or Online Local Workspace Background Color settings Online Workspace Background Forecast Workspace Background Flow diagram defaults Flowdiagram General panel Table 69 General flow diagram settings Flowdiagram General panel Field option Default to be set Graph Placement Placement of parent job node in the flow diagram right middle left Default Parent in the Middle Click Maximize Downward Flow Flow diagram should be displayed as much as possible in vertical alignment rather than in horizontal alignment Click Minimize Graph Width Flow diagram should accommodate the available screen space Start Zoom Level Default magnification percentage of nodes displayed in Flow Diagram view when viewing a new network Valid values are 10 through 400 Appendix A 353 Setting options for Control M Desktop Flowdiagram Nodes panel Table 70 Flow diagram node settings Flowdiagram Nodes panel Field option Node Title Default to be set Information to be displayed in the title bar of the node Default MemName Note If JOB_NAME MEMNAME is selected for m z OS jobs Mem Name is displayed m other jobs Job Name is displayed First Field Information to be displayed in the first field of the node body Default Control M Name Seco
354. p the title bar identifies the type of workspace in which you are working and in the local workspace the name of the draft The background color customizable of the panes also indicates the type of workspace NOTE SF You can customize the display for both Control M Desktop and Control M EM For details see Appendix A Customizing the interfaces Understanding the flow diagram The flow diagram shows you at a glance information such as entity type relationships and statuses NOTE Control M EM displays a refresh needed icon 3 f ts in the toolbar if the flow diagram needs a refresh due to production changes Click the icon to perform the refresh In the flow diagram components of the environment definition environment or active environment are represented by node boxes The information that is displayed in a node varies depending on the type of node and on customization options Table 1 Node and tree icons Symbol Information Symbol Information E Desktop root node Cid o o g Manager service g Control M a Control M is disconnected Cb Application Condition node Group ES SMART Table EzE Table Eb Job in a SMART Table J Job ER Locked SMART Table a Locked table F Cyclic job Note Cyclic E indicators are also displayed in forecasts generated by Control M Forecast Chapter2 Working with Control M Desktop and
355. plate and use the template to place those values into the job processing definitions Templates can be useful whether you are creating job processing definitions one at a time or creating large numbers of job processing definitions all at the same time You can also define SMART Table templates SMART Table templates can be used not only for creating SMART Tables but for defining jobs within the SMART Table as well by applying the SMART Table template on a specific job or table You can also define Rule Based Calendars for templates Templates are platform specific The product comes with sample job and SMART Table templates for supported platforms which you can use as a basis for developing your own templates Chapter9 Setting up templates for standardized job and table definition 171 Defining templates Defining templates 1 In the Control M Desktop window choose Tools gt Template Manager which displays the Template Manager Figure 10 Template Manager lemplat e Hanar Eie ia aera Hep alal 0x Layn 3235 PH Daip 03 Carmani 2270 375 PH Eanbedkded Scriph Jot LEE 35 PH Pi Troidli F Laii 3 34 H T Jot m LER E PH SAT Cetributed LAADA 39 PH 2 In the Template Manager do one of the following to display the template editing form which is similar to a job or table editing form m Select the template in the list of templates and click g Update Template to modify an existing template or create a new template from an
356. production environment and not from the archive that is currently being played back This ensures that the user is always notified when an alert occurs even while the user is using the Playback Facility m Hold Free Delete Undelete and Zoom and Save changes are not displayed in playback because they are not saved in the playback recording m During playback jobs not yet ordered to the Active Jobs file have the status Not in AJF This status is relevant to archived jobs in Playback only Chapter 28 Viewing and playing back archived data 343 Playing back archived events 344 Control M User Guide Appendixes This part presents the following topics Appendix A Customizing the interfaces 20s05 ects tee ertewcde ewe tee tees nrnna 347 Appendix B Examples for defining 00S 25cais ie deiseeadeiseretensaresdes eee aeia 369 Appendix C Formats values and functions 0 0 0 0 00 ccc ccc cece eee ee eene 387 Appendix D Checking job and table processing definition validity 393 Appendix E Troublesheo ne sie sss pian eres ated dy sees a eee S Eaa AE es 395 Part 6 345 346 Control M User Guide hme Customizing the interfaces This appendix presents the following topics Changing your Pass WVOls ci0c tia donee sea eee ae eke hee PEN eee Eee 347 Adj sting list Uisplaye lt shver sebstesseeeleeia reese reer Takei Ea kai e 347 Moditying list displays resecestensicsesteiiea ra tetteti nni irn nn ri
357. pty calendar with the same name and save it then download the calendar normally The downloaded version will overwrite the empty version 168 Control M User Guide Copying calendars Copying calendars Deleting Instead of creating new calendars from beginning to end you can copy and modify existing calendars Although calendars are defined on a particular Control M you can copy them to other Control Ms NOTE When copying a calendar if you specify a different target Control M it must be the same platform and version as the source calendar s Control M To copy a calendar 1 In the Calendar Manager dialog box select the calendar and click 4 Copy 2 In the displayed Copy Calendar dialog box select the Control M to which the calendar will be copied and enter a name for the new copy of the calendar 3 Click OK which saves the copy of the calendar in the Control M EM database and displays the new calendar name in the Calendar Manager calendars In the Calendar Manager dialog box select the calendars and click the appropriate button option as follows 52 Delete p nf 3 Delete Remote Local Force Delete Remote Local Local Delete Remote Delete m To delete the calendars from both the Control M EM database and the Control M Server database click the Delete button or click Delete R L This is the default if you click Delete without selecting a Delete option m If the delete fails cl
358. r selected Yes or No when ordering the service Default Value Shows the default value of the AutoEdit as defined in the job or SMART table definition 7 Click the Filter tab 8 Select the jobs that you want to attach to this service by doing one of the following 300 Control M User Guide Editing a service definition m If you selected Service based on filter or Service per ODAT based on filter type or select the required values as described in the Control M Parameters Guide or click Advanced Filtering and go to step 9 m If you selected Service per SMART Table or Service per job type or select the required values as described in the Control M Parameters Guide and go to step 10 9 To add a filter which includes or excludes jobs do the following in the Including Filters or Excluding Filters area A In the Field column select a job attribute B In the Operator column select the operator that you want to use C In the Value column type a value for the job attribute D Repeat step A through step C as necessary E If you want to add another group of fields which when met can include more fields even if the other group of fields do not meet the conditions click g 4 j NOTE Jobs that match the excluding filter are not included in the service even if they match the including filter The service only includes jobs that match the including filter but don t match the excluding filter 10
359. r 23 Managing Workloads 279 Introduction to Workload Management 66 eee ee 279 Workload Manager vas wey eees pe dues dp trek s Pan kineta EW Hed EEG EN 280 Defining or modifying a Workload 2 cc0c 6ecli ecb s heehee Os 283 Definition tabs of the Workload window 00 ccc cece eee eens 284 Defining time periods for Workload Policies 0 000 e eee eee 289 Defining prioritization of Workload Policy node mapping enforcement 292 Monitoring workloads sessa peresse apain RA aR EEA etree wee eds 293 Chapter 24 Control M Self Service management 297 Control M Self Service management Overview s ssi ssns eee 298 Service definitions p rissrasrris tarana yKa ce ee ee eee eee tent ES RNS 298 Creating a service definition 4 6252 cies veh cewa cen ee ie rdaeedh ape nethasees 299 Editing a Service definiti 52 0204 cramined ik acta nee iine naia ER R a Ri 301 Copying a service definition 24 oinived eee ein eine edhe en eedeevenedu ceded 302 Deleting a service definition giwswcsv eee hea epee ee CRG Re eee eee eee eA 303 Serice TUNES ore rA ee ote Slee Soe oh hee lie ace en ae eid 303 Creating a service tule rerepi dynen a eee eee ees 304 Editing a service rules avital avant EEEE EE hae EEEE EEEE A EEA 307 Copying a service rule ss esre iann ne Koa eE A EREEREER ERAPR 308 Deleting a Servite TUl6 5 aycy eevee s heera ene ee hee eee y 308 Generating Services from a TUlC 1c 6 cds0 resent eekei ae cies dew eeendae
360. r Guide Deleting a service definition Deleting a service definition This procedure describes how to delete a service definition from the Service Definition Manager Before You Begin Successful completion of Starting Control M Desktop on page 26 To delete a service definition 1 From the Tools menu select Service Definition Manager The Service Definition Manager window appears 2 Select the service definition that you want to delete 3 Click A confirmation message appears 4 Click Yes The service definition is deleted Service rules A service rule is a service definition that enables you to manually or automatically generate services based on filtering and grouping criteria There are two types of service rules m Active rule Inspects the jobs in the AJF automatically and generates service definitions that will appear in Control M Self Service This reduces the maintenance of creating multiple service definitions individually For example you can define an active rule that creates a service for all jobs that belong to APP_Sales and GRP_Eur Every time a new job enters the AJF and matches the rule a new service instance automatically appears in Control M Self Service This relieves you from creating a new service definition every time new application or groups that match the rule appear in the AJF such as APP_Sales1 APP_Sales2 or GRP_Eur_North GRP_Eur_South Chapter 24 Control M Self Service management
361. r the Job tasktype Defining the job so that it is scheduled daily The job is scheduled every day In the Scheduling tab the following values are selected m all values of the Month Days area done by clicking ALL m all values of the Week Days area done by clicking ALL a the relational connector is Or but And would also work Ensuring that the job cycles through every minute from the start of the previous iteration In the Execution tab click Cyclic job and define the cycle interval as every one minute from the start of the job Defining special handling if the job does not cycle through successfully It is critical that the job run every minute and if there is a problem it is critical that notification be sent to the main monitor The Steps tab contains the following definitions m If the job status is NOTOK On stmt Codes NOTOK do the following Stop the job Do StopCyclic Shout a very urgent message Flight Updates to the main monitor Providing notification that the job processed successfully Whenever the job ends successfully a success message with the job s runtime is shouted to the main monitor The Shout message Flights updated and distributed at TIME is defined with a regular urgency in the PostProc tab The TIME AutoEdit variable resolves to the jobs runtime Control M User Guide Organizing the IT department maintenance jobs the Ex ITMaintenance application Organizin
362. rackets Anchor end Denotes the end of a word specialchar Escape character Denotes the literal value of the special character The special characters are the symbols described in this table Examples m To specify type m If you specify then has the meaning of period and not the same meaning as m Use to escape only where is the first character Plus Used with described above to denote the literal value of the special character For example lt CYCLIC_INTERVAL_SEQUENCE FROM 60M 3H TO 30M 6H gt NOTE XML term files support the use of to separate values and myn to exclude values TIP If you use special characters such as asterisk as a literal part of the object name for example glo job1_started and when you filter you want to include only these objects for example you do not want to include glo job1_started specify before the special character in the filter prefix for example glo Otherwise objects without the special character for example glo job1_started will also be included Wherever possible try to avoid defining object names with special characters as literals Table 82 lists examples of expressions used to select data centers Specifying any one of them would include data center DALLAS Table 82 Examples of expressions Part 1 of 2 Pattern Includes DALLAS NY LA_ The three data centers DA
363. re displayed in the Troubleshoot Connectivity window accidently deleting them prevents the mask from being evaluated at runtime m Use Virtual Hostname or IP Address set a virtual hostname for example on a cluster machine a known hostname or a fixed IP address Default the current default hostname or IP address is specified in brackets In the CORBA configuration file the value of the ORBDottedDecimalAddresses parameter determines whether the default is an IP address value 1 or a hostname address value 0 Click Test The configuration specified for the client is tested for its connectivity with the Control M EM server A check mark indicates connectivity 5 Select the Use bidirectional communication check box Appendix E 397 Reporting Facility connectivity errors 6 Click OK to change the CORBA configuration file according to the specified configuration Note The configuration file is changed even if the configuration failed the connectivity test NOTE m The configuration changes affect the entire installation including client and server processes that were running while the changes were made You should restart every running Control M EM application such as the Control M EM GUI client Control M EM GUI server Control M Desktop GAS server Control M Forecast server BMC Batch Impact Manager server and CMS server m Accessing Troubleshoot Connectivity window using Tools gt Connection gt Trouble
364. re manually resetting the hostname and port using the Control M Configuration Manager Appendix E 399 Reporting Facility connectivity errors 400 Control M User Guide KIMEI ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ Index Symbols pattern matching symbol 388 pattern matching symbol 389 SQL wildcard 390 for local variables 112 for global variables 112 pattern matching symbol 285 388 pattern matching symbol 285 388 pattern matching symbol 388 rpt report files 319 pattern matching symbol 285 388 pattern matching symbol 389 _ SQL wildcard 390 pattern matching symbol 388 A Access Level field Calendars panel 67 Control Resources panel 65 Global Conditions panel 66 Prerequisite Conditions panel 63 Quantitative Resources panel 65 Table panel 61 ad hoc reports 328 adding user to a group 53 user to multiple groups 53 adjusting the display 35 alarms See alerts alerts displaying 250 filtering 56 job to stop Global Alerts Server 384 managing 251 overview of 249 setting defaults for 363 AND OR logic tables conditions resources calendars 61 archiving data displaying archived ViewPoints 342 job SYSDATA 126 overview of 341 playing back archived events 343 using New Day procedure 203 arranging the flow diagram display 39 assigning authorizations 49 Authorization facility 45 authorization rules 46 authorizations modifying 49 Authorizations window Calendars panel 67 Control Resources panel 65 filter
365. ready being used as the sort column each click of the column header toggles between ascending and descending sort An alphabetic sort is performed except the Last Update column is sorted by date The date format is determined by the locale setting of the computer For information about how to change the date format see the manual of your operating system To add a field to the display 1 Right click the column header Select the Field Chooser option The Field Chooser menu is displayed with the appropriate fields Ficki Cheese al Appendix A 349 Modifying list displays 350 2 Click and drag the field from the Field Chooser menu to the wanted location in the column header of the list To remove a field from the display Perform one of the following m Right click the column header and select Remove This Column m Right click the column header and select the Field Chooser menu Then drag the header from the list to the Field Chooser To rearrange the fields in the display Click and drag right or left the column header of the field to be moved To resize a column in the display according to its best fit Perform one of the following m Right click the column header of the column to be adjusted and select Best Fit m Double click the header s right border The column width is adjusted to fit the longest value in the column Performing other tasks in the list display You can perform the following tasks from the
366. rectory These LDAP groups must be associated with Control M EM authorization groups through the Control M EM Authorization Facility Control M Forecast security Control M Forecast conforms to all Control M EM security rules and definitions so you can view only the scheduling components for which you are authorized Forecast reports can be run only by the Control M EM administrator Tables Calendars Resources Conditions and Owners A user has an authorization if that authorization is granted to any group of which the user is a member Authorizations specified for a user in the panels of the User Authorizations window are in addition to or supersede the authorizations specified for that user in the panels of the Group Authorizations window EXAMPLE User JimA belongs to group Acct Group Acct has Browse authority for all tables JimA has Update authority for Control M Figaro and Marius tables In addition JimA has Update authority for jobs on Control M Figaro and Marius in which Bob is the Owner and the NodeID or Group is Finance JimA can update tables for Figaro and Marius that have jobs whose Owner is Bob and Node ID or Group field is Finance but can only view tables for other Control M installations Control M User Guide Authorizations window Privileges Privilege authorizations include m access to the Control M Configuration Manager and its features Alerts and Archived ViewPoints data m usage of th
367. rent tables will be loaded as well The Load Table Results dialog box displays the results of the load operation B Close the Load Table Results dialog box NOTE If tables you select are locked notify the user named in the Locked by column or wait until the tables are unlocked Connecting to a different GUI Server Control M Desktop enables you to connect to a different GUI Server at any time To check to which GUI Server you are currently connected choose Tools gt Connection gt Connection Properties To change connection to a different GUI Server 1 In Control M Desktop choose Tools gt Connection gt Connect with Different Properties 2 Enter your user name and password and select the GUI Server to which you want to connect 3 To specify values other than the defaults for host name port number and Secured Socket Layer usage click Advanced and fill in the details 4 Click Login Starting Control M EM 1 Do one of the following a From Control M EM GUI select Tools gt Control M Enterprise Manager and go to step 2 m From the Start menu navigate to BMC Control M gt Control M Enterprise Manager gt Control M Enterprise Manager GUI Chapter 2 Working with Control M Desktop and Control M EM 27 Starting Control M EM 2 Enter your user name and password select the Control M EM GUI Server to which you want to connect and click Login If change password fields are displayed your password
368. ritical path that has the most direct impact on the completion time is indicated 358 Control M User Guide Setting options for Control M EM Table 74 Forecast settings Forecast panel Part 2 of 2 Field option De fault to be Show Control M New Day Display red vertical lines in the Gantt chart that indicate the beginning of indicators in Gantt view the New Day for each Control M Automatic Run Forecast on Automatically run a forecast when the What If scenario is changed scenario update Show What If Scenario Automatically open the What If Scenario window when a new What If Window on new What If event is created Setting options for Control M EM This section presents tables with setting options for the following defaults Environment defaults Flow diagram defaults Alerts defaults Reconnection defaults Diagnostics defaults Confirmation defaults Service Monitor Window Appendix A 359 Setting options for Control M EM Environment defaults Environment General panel Table 75 General environment settings Environment General panel Field option Auto Open Viewpoint Default to be set m To display an empty Control M Enterprise Manager window when you start a Control M EM session leave the field unchecked Default m To automatically display a viewpoint when you start your Control M EM session click the check box and select one of the following options m To have t
369. rivileges and features Part 2 of 2 Control M EM privilege Feature Description Monitoring and Archived Actions that can be performed on archived viewpoints Administration tools viewpoints CLI The ability to use the CLI utility For more information see the Control M Utility Guide Alerts Specifies whether Alerts can be monitored and the actions that can be performed on them Note Relevant parameters of the Jobs filter are also used to filter the Alert messages that are displayed BIM The ability to access BMC Batch Impact Manager and its features ViewPoint Manager Collections The ability to perform actions on Collection definitions Hierarchies The ability to perform actions on Hierarchy definitions Filters The ability to perform actions on Filter definitions Viewpoints The ability to perform actions on ViewPoint definitions AND OR logic for tables conditions resources and calendars In the Tables Prerequisite Conditions Control Resources Quantitative Resources Global Conditions and Calendars panels m The relationship between multiple values on a line is AND m The relationship between multiple lines is OR Authorizations window Tables tab This tab authorizes Tables and a level of access for a user or group Table 19 Table tab fields Field Definition Control M Control M installations whose tables can be accessed Library Control M for z OS Libraries fro
370. rizations window 48 Group Authorizations window 52 User Authorizations window 51 Diagnostics panel 356 Display execution time 358 displaying dependency names in a node 36 job processing definition 37 nodes 37 DO action parameters 118 documentation information 17 18 downloading calendars 168 tables 200 ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ dynamically filtering ViewPoint display 240 E electronic documentation 17 emergency backup sample scenario 378 notification job 380 situations handling 380 emreportcli report utility 336 emreportcli dtd file 338 end of job shout messages 123 errors displaying during job intervention 270 NOTOK job status 132 setting diagnostic defaults 356 events playing back archived 343 exceptions See also alerts monitoring 237 Exclude From Jobs Filter criteria 57 Exclude from Jobs Filter pane Jobs Filter Definition window 57 excluding See filtering expanding the display 37 exporting alerts list to CSV file 252 batch reports 336 job list to CSV file 43 reports in Report Preview window 327 F files rpt report and template 319 CSV file exporting 43 emreportcli dtd 338 log file 356 template XML files 176 Filter field Authorizations window 48 Jobs panel 55 filtering alerts 56 Authorizations window 48 jobs 56 57 jobs and alerts 56 jobs in CONTROL M Desktop 38 pattern matching symbols available for 387 SQL wildcards available for 390 ViewPoint display 239 finding jobs 41 flow d
371. row of the connecting line between nodes to flash the dependency names Focusing on different level nodes stepping in and stepping out You can choose to view only one particular hierarchy node level in the definition environment for example you might want to view only Control M nodes Changing to a higher level for example from Job level to Group level is called stepping out changing to a lower level for example from Group level to Job level is called stepping in To change the display to different node level in the flow diagram In the pop up menu for the entity choose m Step In to display a lower node level m Step Out to display a higher node level Performing other display adjustments Table 6 describes a number of other display adjustments you can perform Table 6 Additional display adjustments Part 1 of 2 p to display or hide sub nodes Choose Collapse or Expand from the selected node s pop up expand or collapse the menu You can select multiple nodes and then perform a display single Expand or Collapse operation Tip This operation is not available when condition nodes are displayed In this case use the Step In or Step Out operation to display different hierarchy levels to display a node s job Double click the node in the navigation tree or the flow processing definition or diagram SMART Table Chapter 2 Working with Control M Desktop and Control M EM 37
372. rrent Active network m Latest Archived Network m Archived Network from the selected date Filter panel The Filter panel is used to specify the filtering criteria for which data are retrieved NOTE SFE The Filter panel for the Links Definition report has special features For details see Filter panel for the Links Definition report The Filter panel for the Audit report also has special features For details see Filter panel for the Audit report Chapter 27 Defining and generating reports 331 Creating templates using the Report Wizard 332 To fill in the Filter panel 1 In the Field Name field select the field that you want to use for filtering You can specify the same field name on more than one line 2 In the Operator field select the operator for example or gt to be used with the value specified in the next substep NOTE The LIKE and operators work the same except that m the operator treats and characters specified in the value as literals m the LIKE operator treats and characters specified in the value as wildcards 3 If the value to be used for filtering on the field should be dynamically specified when the report is run click Param In this case the Value Param Name field defines the parameter name to be used to prompt you for a value at run time And by default that is if no previous Value Param Name was set as the default the Value Param Name field value will automat
373. run the following commands which it does pwd this is request to run a Dir command on the specified directory Is this is a request to list the files in found in the Dir request The job s SYSOUT contains the following results from these requests pwd data wrkfle ls file1 file2 dir1 dir2 To define the On criteria you must know the format of the SYSOUT data as formatted and returned by the Control Module The data is formatted as follows data returned by the Control Module statement pwd code data wrkfle statement ls code file1 statement ls code file2 statement ls code dir1 statement ls code dir2 Assume that the On statement is satisfied if the ls request returns a value beginning with the prefix dir Define the following On and Do statements in the Steps tab On statement stmt ls code dir Do 3 Press Enter 4 To add more On statements repeat the process The relationship between multiple On statements in the same On Do block is And they must all be satisfied 5 After defining the On statement s in the On Do block define the Do actions as follows A Click the arrow below the On Do heading and select Do B Select the Do action and then fill in the values for the displayed fields Table 34 lists possible Do actions and where useful the parameters that can activate those actions For a brief explanation of Do actions and where useful the parameters that can activate those actions see Table 34
374. rvice users to order this service This feature is enabled only if you select Service per SMART Table or Service per job For these service types a specific SMART table or job is ordered when the service is ordered If you select this option the Orderable Parameters tab appears If you want to define parameters for this service go to step 5 otherwise continue with step 7 5 Click the Orderable Parameters tab and then click The New Service Parameter dialog box appears 6 Type or select the required values as described in Table 63 and then click OK Orderable parameters can be used to send AutoEdit parameters to the SMART table or job of the service when a service is ordered by a Control M Self Service user Table 63 New Service Parameter dialog box Field Name Description Defines the AutoEdit name of the service parameter Display Name Defines the display name of the AutoEdit that appears for the Control M Self Service end user when ordering a service Type Determines whether the AutoEdit is a string integer Yes No or is a enumerated value Required Determines whether a Control M Self Service user must enter a value for this service parameter Validation Determines the possible values based on the selected parameter type Note For enumerated fields possible values must be separated by a comma For Yes No fields the value determines the AutoEdit value that is used when the use
375. s esrtis siek Gre dos Pee been Ree AEE a eee tees 169 Refreshing and unlocking calendars 2 lt i lt tis scsi eesti eeintedwenedeias 170 ae ses apts E das feral EE E IE EEE EE de A andes hah testa wh E EEEE EE E EEES 170 Introduction You can define and use calendars to simplify how you define job scheduling criteria Calendars enable you to define a set of scheduling criteria once in a calendar definition and then apply those criteria to job schedules by specifying the calendar name in the job processing definitions This feature saves you from having to define those sets of criteria individually in each job You create modify and manage calendars by using the Calendar Manager dialog box which you access from Control M Desktop This dialog box accesses the Control M EM database Before a calendar can be used for scheduling it must also be uploaded to the appropriate Control M Server database Chapter 8 Using predefined calendars to schedule jobs 163 Introduction The Calendar definition facility supports the following types of calendars Regular calendars which use dates as they appear in regular calendars Periodic calendars which divide the year into working periods instead of the standard twelve months Periods can be nonconsecutive of varying length and overlapping No single period can exceed 255 days Relative calendars Control M for z OS only which provide alternate scheduling dates for situations where the specified
376. s the Execution tab defines these jobs as critical and assigns them the highest priority 99 Ensuring that these jobs are not accidentally run Because of the potential for harm from these jobs if inappropriately run these jobs require manual confirmation before they can execute Manual confirmation is defined by checking the Wait for Confirmation box in the Execution tab Ensuring that successor jobs can run These jobs are predecessor jobs to at least one other job To establish the dependency between these jobs and their successor jobs the following prerequisite conditions are defined for each job either condition can be used by the successor jobs m An appropriate Out prerequisite condition is defined in the Conditions tab of each of the jobs The date defined for this Out prerequisite condition is the keyword ODAT to ensure that the condition is added to the system with the working date the job was forced The symbol in the Effect column instructs Control M to add the condition m An additional prerequisite condition is defined in the Steps tab as follows An On statement stmt codes OK is defined to instruct Control M that the accompanying Do statement is performed if the job ends OK A Do statement adds a condition with a date value of ODAT indicating that the job s task has been completed The symbol in the parameter column indicates that the condition is added rather than deleted Appendix B 381
377. s condition defines this jobs as a predecessor job for the remaining jobs in this table this Out prerequisite condition is defined as an In prerequisite condition for those jobs m EX_ShutDownAll this condition serves as an indicator that this job ended for any other jobs that might need to know Handling component shutdown needs The Ex ComponentStopping group contains jobs that are used to shut down stop Control M components Normally shut down of components is not required However situations can arise that require component shutdown These situations can range from extreme emergencies as handled in this sample draft to minor malfunctions repairs or maintenance Each job in this group shuts down a single component With the exception of the job that shuts down the gateway which must run last the jobs in this group can run in any order or sequence Appendix B 383 Handling component shutdown needs 384 Defining jobs that stop the GAS GCS and GUI servers and CMS and BIM These jobs should run only after ShutDownAllSystems in the Ex EmergencyProcs group has ended successfully As their names indicate m GASStopped stops the Global Alerts Server GCSStopped stops the Global Conditions Server a GUIServerStopped stops the GUI Server CMSStopped stops the Configuration Management Server a BIMStopped stops the Batch Impact Manager Server Defining jobs that implement operating system commands and oth
378. s described above 3 Click anywhere outside the last editable field in the table row or press the Tab key until a new Edit line is displayed To add or modify criteria in the Include in or Exclude from Jobs Filter list 1 Select a line from the Include in Exclude from Jobs Filter list The criteria are displayed in the Edit pane 2 Add to or modify the criteria To delete criteria from a line in the Include In or Exclude From Jobs Filter list 1 Select the line to be changed The criteria are displayed in the Edit pane 2 Select the criterion you want to delete by clicking its number in the Edit pane 3 Press the Delete key 4 Press the Tab key twice To delete a line in the Include in or Exclude from Jobs Filter list 1 Select the line to delete 2 Click Delete Authorizations window Owner tab The Owner tab is an additional filter to the table that enables you to grant the user authorization to create and update job definitions for specific jobs in Control M Desktop and using the XML utilities NOTE SSS The definitions in the Owner tab only apply to users who have at least the Update access level in the Tables tab Control M User Guide We Tabs in the User and Group Authorizations windows NOTE The definitions in the Owner tab do not apply to SMART Tables rather to the jobs in the SMART Table Table 16 Owners tab fields Field Description Control M The Control Mserver on which the job
379. s file description Element Attribute Description SourceFile The template used to generate the report templateName specifies the name of the template templatePath specifies the folder where the template file is located Optional OutputFile The report output file type specifies the type of the output file such as EXCEL EXCEL_DO for data only PDF DOC HTML TXT or XML filePath specifies the full filename of the output file which will be overwritten if it previously existed Note The following dynamically resolved keys can be included when specifying the filepath attribute date time and counter For example m For filepath D Test doc that is no key the output file is D Test doc m For filepath D Test date doc the output file is D Test May22 2008 doc m For filepath D Test counter doc the first output file is D Test1 doc and the next output file is D Test2 doc Parameters The parameter list Parameter An individual parameter whose name and value is specified name name of the parameter as defined in the report template filter panel value value of the report parameter wildcard characters can be used for text fields when the field operator in the filter panel is set to LIKE for the fields EXAMPLE lt DOCTYPE ReportDefinitions SYSTE lt ReportDefinitions gt lt ReportDefinition gt lt SourceFile templat lt OutputFile type P lt Parameters gt
380. s is not done a user whose permissions have been changed or revoked can continue to use the BMC Batch Impact Manager Web Client to perform actions he was previously authorized to perform until the BMC Batch Impact Manager Server is restarted Tabs in the User and Group Authorizations windows 50 Table 9 Tab descriptions Tab Purpose General Provides logon data about users or lists members of a group Member Of User Authorizations window Matches users with groups Active Jobs a user or member can access and actions he can perform Privileges m Whether the Control M Configuration Manager can be accessed and used Alerts and Archived Viewpoints can be viewed and the user or member can use the Command Line Interface cli m Actions that can be performed on Collections Hierarchies Filters ViewPoints and Authorization screens Tables Tables a user or member can access in Control M Desktop authorization levels for the tables and whether jobs or tables can be ordered or forced Prerequisite Prerequisite conditions that a user or member can access Conditions Control Resources Control resources that a user or member can access Quantitative Quantitative resources that a user or member can access Resources Global Conditions Global conditions that a user or member can access Calendars Calendars that a user or member can access Owners Jobs in tables that a user ca
381. s work as intended see Part 4 Monitoring and intervening in production m To analyze and optimize production see Part 5 Analyzing and optimizing the production environment Chapter 3 Defining the production environment 75 Understanding workspaces 76 Control M User Guide Defining how jobs should run This chapter presents the following topics Defining job processing definitions and SMART Tables basic procedure 79 Creating and editing JODS gt ivei ccr ed eke stale ee hekia eiie tipt pina eE eian 83 Assigning a name to the job oi 4 secs ew dedieee dew lxeeeiaaa ee deat eases 84 Assigning a name tO the job is cek pet eeke eee eeiw runan Ee EET Sae Pewee os eR S 84 Assigning a name te the jODs1 32 52 sox seeaese tthe diet o bee Rea nrnna 84 Identifying the task type and related information 000 0 0005 84 Defining the jon hierarehy ssir ccagee eka eaten teem nii n i Aaa h 87 Defining the job s owner and author 660 0s0i00n cceeer be edan seen duncan 87 Defining job documentation t 0s54 bes Heddon Phe eee ee Rie eee eee een 87 Defining scheduling criteria for a job basics 00 88 Defining scheduling criteria for a job basics oo s2s oes iia e ene ees 88 Defining scheduling criteria for a job basieS lt 2 4 evict eye 4 deh eis eee ds es 88 Defining scheduling criteria for a job basics os 0scuse neh eee ieee eh er eseens 88 Defining scheduling criteria for a job ba
382. se View gt Hierarchy gt Data Center Table Job B In the flow diagram or navigation tree select the tables by right clicking the table icon and in the pop up menu choose Order 198 Control M User Guide Manually scheduling jobs and tables C If you are prompted for confirmation confirm m To order or force tables from the Table manager do the following A Select the tables B Click Order C If you are prompted for confirmation confirm The Order Force Parameters dialog box is displayed Figure 13 Order Force Parameters dialog box in Control M Desktop Order Force Parameters Order Foms Coste OLAT p EJ T Wat For Ofte to run M pbsd Tabie before ordena I Forca ignes Shading Criteria grier Fone sih edd CE _cont_ 2 Fill in the Order Force Parameters dialog box as follows m If you are ordering rather than forcing to specify a different date than ODAT the default click the button by the date selection field and select the date NOTE If you are ordering a table under Control M for z OS version 6 2 00 or later to ensure that the jobs do not run before the Odate check the Wait for Odate to run check box If this box is not checked the job runs as soon as its execution criteria are satisfied m To place the table into the Control M database before ordering click Upload Table before ordering TIP m If you are working in the Control M EM database that is in Online mode or
383. see Filtering prerequisite conditions on startup on page 272 To create or delete a prerequisite condition 1 In the Control M EM GUI choose Tools gt Prerequisite Conditions which displays the Prerequisite Conditions window 2 In the Prerequisite Conditions window do the following as needed m To quickly filter choose View gt Filter Row and enter the filter criteria m To filter the displayed data click on the right top corner of a column header and select the appropriate filtering option a To create an advanced filter right click on any column header and choose Filter Editor Use the Filter Builder to enter the appropriate filtering criteria and the relationships between them The following information is useful for understanding the filtering criteria a Name the condition name m Order Date specify the date for the condition Valid values specific date in mm dd format or STAT any date Control M 3 To create a prerequisite condition do the following A In the Prerequisite Conditions window choose Actions gt Add B In the displayed Prerequisite Condition dialog box fill in the data that defines the prerequisite condition and click OK 4 To delete a prerequisite condition select it and choose Actions gt Delete NOTE Addition and deletion of prerequisite conditions in one Control M might affect prerequisite conditions in other Control M installations if the conditions are global For d
384. select the relevant job or SMART Table node Ensure that the selected job or SMART Table has In conditions and is in Wait status that is it has not yet run 2 In the Analysis menu select Enhanced Why 3 In the Enhanced Why dialog box click the appropriate button m To display all predecessor jobs and SMART Tables that did not end or did not end OK click With path m To display the oldest predecessor job or SMART Table that did not end or did not end OK click the Without path button The predecessor jobs that failed to run OK are highlighted in the flow diagram 4 Click Find The number of predecessor jobs that failed to run OK is listed in the dialog box and those predecessor jobs are selected in the flow diagram A display area opens at the bottom of the dialog box and displays the Details list which is a list of those jobs and their details for example current status order ID RBA For a summary of actions you can perform in the dependency Details list see Working with predecessor and successor job details Details list on page 261 TIP If the details display area does not open click Details which alternately displays or hides this display area 260 Control M User Guide Checking predecessor and successor job flows Working with predecessor and successor job details Details list While the Details list is displayed in a Critical Path or Enhanced Why dialog box you can perform the following tasks on
385. ser To add a service permission 1 Double click a user The User Authorizations lt user gt window appears 2 Click the Services tab and then click The User Authorizations Services dialog box appears 3 In the Service field type the names or name patterns for services You can use to denote all services Chapter 2 Working with Control M Desktop and Control M EM 67 Tabs in the User and Group Authorizations windows 4 In the Active area select all the permissions that apply to this user as described in Table 31 Table 31 Services permissions Permission Drill Down to view jobs Description Enables the user to view jobs in Control M Self Service and Control M EM GUI To enable this permission you need to select at least a Browse access level from the Active tab as described in Authorizations window Active tab on page 53 Run orderable services Enables the user to order a service in Control M Self Service To enable this permission you need to associate this user to the owner of the service in the Owner tab as described in Authorizations window Owner tab on page 58 Hold Enables the user to hold a service which stops the service from running To enable this permission and other job actions you need to select the required permissions for this user from the Active tab as described in Authorizations window Active tab on page 53 Release Enables the user t
386. ser daily jobs calendars job dependencies in and out conditions time execution windows Control M time zone settings resources and priorities in the Control M EM database and based on existing statistics estimates how jobs will run on specific days For detailed information about Control M Forecast see the Control M Business Service Management Solution User Guide Chapter 19 Planning production with Control M Forecast 233 Control M Forecast integration Control M Forecast integration 234 Control M Forecast features are available directly within Control M Desktop Additional options buttons dialog boxes and menu commands appear after Control M Forecast is installed Table 51 lists these options and their locations Additional capabilities and tools provided with Control M Forecast include m Schedule forecast from the job editing form table editing form and Table Manager in Control M Desktop The graphical display of the dates on which scheduling definitions are predicted to be submitted can be used as a tool for validating new and existing scheduling definitions Forecasts are available for jobs SMART Tables and Rule Based Calendars a Identify late critical batch services in the forecast when used with BMC Batch Impact Manager m Use What If scenarios to forecast the effects of potential changes to the scheduling environment m Additional reports in Control M EM Historical reports can help you identify trends of
387. shoot Connectivity and changing the configuration requires restarting the Control M EM GUI client or reconnecting to the Control M EM GUI server Reporting Facility connectivity errors 398 You can manually set the hostname and port using the Control M Configuration Manager To manually resolve Reporting Facility connectivity errors 1 In Control M Configuration Manager select Database gt Location 2 In the Database Hostname amp Port dialog box specify the database host and port values 3 Click OK Connectivity issues The Reporting Facility cannot connect to the Control M EM database under the following circumstances Control M EM fails to retrieve the database hostname and port when trying to connect This failure occurs more often for Sybase users The following error message is displayed EM 75002E Failed to retrieve database host and port Control M EM retrieves the incorrect database hostname and port This most often occurs when working with a failover database server in Oracle The following error message is displayed Control M User Guide Reporting Facility connectivity errors EM 75003E The Reporting Facility is unable to connect to the database Either the database is not running OLEDB driver is not installed or registered Check the log file for more information The hostname and port used to try to connect to the database are provided following the error message Both scenarios requi
388. si 348 Customizing default options 6 ii25 dw iesiceceee es eer ede eck ete e ba nren 351 Setting options for Control M Desktop 0c ccc eee eee e eee nnna 351 Setting options for Control M EM o 2cis occieentek ei ener seinen a euns 359 Setting options for the Control M Reporting facility 005 366 Changing your password To change your password for the Control M EM GUI Control M Desktop or Control M Reporting facility window While displaying the window choose Tools gt Change Password and in the Change Password dialog box fill in your current and new password details and click OK Password changes made in one application window for example Control M EM automatically apply to the other application windows Adjusting list displays Certain dialog boxes display lists of items for example lists of Control M definitions or lists of prerequisite conditions from which you can make a selection Many list displays contain an Item counter at the bottom that indicates the number of items appearing in the list Appendix A 347 Modifying list displays You can modify many list displays and perform other tasks in list displays Two pop up menus enable the various modification and other tasks Column header pop up menu a List display pop up menu To display the column header pop up menu Right click in the header of the column in the list display Figure 20 Column header pop up menu for list displays
389. sics 6 1 lt 2iis che itiweea cide tee see es 88 Defining scheduling criteria for a job basics 00 eee eee 88 Defining scheduling criteria using calendars 00 c eee eee eee 94 Defining complex scheduling criteria using rules 000 0005 95 Limiting scheduling to a particular date range unas 000 cee eee eee 99 Defining Cyclic jobs s ci0ddia rine ond rers riitin reas E EnEn EEs Ee rae ENAS 101 Defining cyclic jobs ssesenesinesiik aaan a A a a EAE SEAS 101 Defining cyclic jobs srr rete dicot E a E E E A ees Cet eee an 101 Defining automatic rerun for a job that ends NOT OK 45 102 Defining jobs that should run on specific nodes 0 000 e eee eee ee 103 Defining jobs that should run on nodes where load balancing has been implemented ses Se eh eee ee eee eee eee wee ea 104 Defining a time frame during which jobs can be submitted 104 Defining that manual confirmation is required before job submission 106 Assigning priorities to jobs and defining and critical jobs 106 Defining how many days a job can await submission 005 108 Defining dependencies for the current job 00 cc eee eee eee 108 Defining dependencies for the current job 000 c eee eee eee 108 Defining dependencies for the current job 0 cece eee 108 Allocating resources for AION bade aas cue ee yeaah 2 Rie kes ees
390. specified period of time this report details which services executed when they executed and the execution completion status m Detailed Business Service report for a specific service execution this report provides a summary that includes the service name date completion status and related job details m Service Jobs report for a selected BIM service this report lists its associated jobs in the Active environment This BIM report is an Active report type m Jobs Service report for a selected job this report lists its associated BIM services in the Active environment This BIM report is an Active report type Control M Forecast report types The following reports which are useful for evaluating trends are available in the Forecast Analysis section These reports are available to administrators only Workload report lists the total number and names of jobs that ran during a specific time frame The output is produced in both graphic and table formats Chapter 27 Defining and generating reports 323 Control M Forecast report types a Trend Analysis report lists the number of jobs that started during a specific time period in history such as the first week of every month or the last day of every week m Jobs Execution report lists the jobs with information such as start time end time and average run time You can group job execution information by time segment 324 Control M User Guide
391. ss levels 0 c cette teen e enn eee 65 Quantitative Resources panel fields 4 25 0200022420e0e keto arse ber ae tekak ees 65 Quantitative Resources access levels 0 00 ccc cece ent nee n eee 66 Global Conditions tab fields 1 0 0 0 000 ccc cee eee eee eas 66 Global Conditions access levels 0 cc ccc een e eens 66 Calendars fields 0 0c ce cee eee eee eee eee teen nes 67 ACCESS LEVEIS 0 26 55 csc anes a dedre bidet tw wow wre Red E weed we dey ald Deda EEEE Peet 67 Services PErmMISSiONS scien a paa e be tees e hewn eet o i p A beng eee bees y eas 68 Scheduling tab parameters 442202 2henii pedi i een ct Hegde wei seastusiast 90 Valid date values for In and Out conditions 0 00 cece eee eee eens 109 MO acHOns ces ee ee a ae a ee Lao ted ee els heat 118 Determining which jobs in a SMART Table get scheduled 137 Filter fields Table Manager 244244008 beta arle pian ed eto beset eds 145 Column descriptions Table Manager cia cacierciddadviwtve triwsiiicceesdas 145 Command buttons Table Manager 4120c0ci2eiereeadseeee vee eaye ee eens 145 Table management tasks iv cciseis ix ceeee sew ean bee tl scasewsedeebennces bees 147 Job management tasks issos esini Moers nininini cimi kanini ae eee 150 16 Filter fields Table Content dialog box ivissccesesseeeeneex sere anew nrnna 151 Command buttons Table Content dialog box 00 neren 152 JOD COMIPARBON t s KS s
392. ssing in your production jobs After your production jobs have been automated you can ensure that processing is maximized by using analysis tools to identify areas that can be improved such as resource allocation workload balancing and so on This book describes how to use the GUIs of Control M EM to automate the scheduling and processing of your production jobs Where to go from here Continue with Chapter 2 Working with Control M Desktop and Control M EM which explains how to start Control M Desktop and Control M EM and provides the details that you need to navigate understand and effectively use these interfaces m For details about defining the entities needed for automating the production environment especially job processing definitions see Part 2 Defining the production environment m For details about how to transition your definitions into production and automating your production environment see Part 3 Moving to production m For details about monitoring and when necessary intervening in your production environment after it is automated see Part 4 Monitoring and intervening in production m For details about helpful tools including reports for analyzing and optimizing your production environment see Part 5 Analyzing and optimizing the production environment Control M User Guide Working with Control M Desktop and Control M EM This chapter provides basic information
393. t Control M User Guide Creating a service rule The Selection window appears 5 Apply filters on jobs that are relevant for the service rule and then click Next For a detailed description of these fields see the Control M Parameters Guide If you want more job filters select More The Grouping window appears 6 Select one of the following m Group jobs to services according to Determines which jobs are part of a service based on the selected fields For a detailed description of these fields see the Control M Parameters Guide For each grouping field you can determine whether the grouping is according to the entire value of the field or according to the first or last letters of the field s value EXAMPLE If you group by the first 3 letters of the Application field jobs with Application BACKUP01 and BACKUP02 will be in the same service but jobs with Application BATCH_JOBS will be in a different service m Generate service per SMART Table Generates a separate service instance for every SMART table that enters the AJF that matches your filtering criteria m Generate service per job Generates a separate service instance for every job that enters the AJF that matches your filtering criteria 7 Click Next The Properties window appears 8 Define a format for service name and description of the generated service definitions The maximum character length for the service name is 200 and 400 for the description
394. t scheduled to run they are irregular emergency jobs To execute these jobs must be manually forced If misused these jobs can be exceedingly damaging to the company Therefore only the CEO or someone with similar permissions can actually force these jobs And to ensure that the CEO does not erroneously do so these jobs require confirmation before submission Once submitted these jobs are more critical than any other jobs They are therefore defined as critical jobs having the highest priority Defining the job type and other general information about the jobs The General tab defines the following m The Tasktype is Job m The File Name and Path fields identify the file name and location of the batch job These are required fields for the Job tasktype Control M User Guide Handling emergency situations Because of the potential for harm from these jobs if inappropriately run the Author fields identify the following authors only the person named in the Author field can automate these jobs by having the New Day Procedure run them For the AllUsersLogOut job the CEO For the SetUpEmergencyGlobalCondition job the CIO Defining the job scheduling As already noted these jobs are not scheduled Rather they are manually forced if needed Therefore they have no parameters defined in the Scheduling tab Ensuring that the jobs are treated with the highest priority Because of the critical and urgent nature of these job
395. t 6 00 AM in Rome new day processing runs m August 4th at 8 00 AM in Rome Global condition Glol RecReady is added with the date 0804 This global condition is then sent to San Francisco with a date of 0804 the date the condition was created However the current working date and time in San Francisco when it receives the global condition is August 3rd 23 00 m August 4th 6 00 AM in San Francisco New Day processing runs During maintenance it assumes that the Glol RecReady condition dated 0804 was added last year because jobs that might have added the condition today did not run yet and it deletes the condition m August 4th at 9 00 AM in San Francisco a job in San Francisco waiting for the condition Glol RecReady dated 0804 is not submitted because the condition is already deleted In the event of a temporary communication failure between Control M EM and a Control M installation global conditions are accumulated and transmitted when communication is resumed Examples The following examples illustrate how global conditions behave in a complex Control M network They are based on information the following table Control M User Guide Global condition logic and examples Prefix From Control Ms To Control Ms GL1 ROME NY LA SF GLALL PARIS SYDNEY GLNY NY GL2WAY _ HQ CENTER1 HQ CENTER1 If the GL1_JOB_END prerequisite condition is added in Control M ROME the same condition is automaticall
396. t BMC products search a database for issues similar to yours and possible solutions order or download product documentation download products and maintenance report an issue or ask a question subscribe to receive proactive e mail alerts when new product notices are released find worldwide BMC support center locations and contact information including e mail addresses fax numbers and telephone numbers Support by telephone or e mail In the United States and Canada if you need technical support and do not have access to the web call 800 537 1813 or send an e mail message to customer_support bmc com In the subject line enter SupID lt yourSupportContractID gt such as SupID 12345 Outside the United States and Canada contact your local support center for assistance Before contacting BMC Have the following information available so that Customer Support can begin working on your issue immediately m product information productname product version release number _ license number and password trial or permanent m operating system and environment information machine type operating system type version and service pack or other maintenance level such as PUT or PTF system hardware configuration serial numbers related software database application and communication including type version and service pack or maintenance level m sequence of events leading to the issue m commands and
397. t box or field should be applied to the global conditions Prefix text box or field Table 28 Global Conditions access levels Browse Viewing the global conditions only Update Modifying the global conditions and adding new ones Full Modifying and deleting global conditions and adding new ones Control M User Guide Tabs in the User and Group Authorizations windows Authorizations window Calendars tab Table 29 Calendars fields Control M Control M installations whose calendars can be accessed Calendar Calendars the user can access Access Level Access level described in Table 30 For information about Calendars see Chapter 8 Using predefined calendars to schedule jobs To set authorizations for calendars Follow the steps described under To add a row to a User Group Authorizations Prerequisite Conditions panel on page 63 Steps relating to the Condition text box or field should be applied to the Calendar text box or field Table 30 Access levels Browse Permits viewing specified Calendars in Control M Desktop only Update Permits modifying specified Calendars in Control M Desktop and adding new ones Full Permits modifying and deleting specified Calendars in Control M Desktop and adding new ones Authorizations window Services tab The services tab in the Authorizations window enables you to determine service permissions for each u
398. t control resources see Chapter 15 Identifying data center resources available for Control M use Table 23 Control Resources tab fields Control M Control M installations whose resources can be accessed Resource Control resources the user can access Access Level Access level for control resources as described in Table 24 To set authorization levels for control resources Follow the steps described under To add a row to a User Group Authorizations Prerequisite Conditions panel on page 63 Steps relating to the Condition text box or field should be applied to the control Resource text box or field Table 24 Control Resources access levels Browse T Viewing the specified control resources only Update Modifying the specified control resources and adding new ones Full Modifying and deleting the specified resources and adding new ones Authorizations window Quantitative Resources tab The Quantitative Resources panel specifies the quantitative resources a user can access For information about quantitative resources see Chapter 15 Identifying data center resources available for Control M use Table 25 Quantitative Resources panel fields Control M Control M installations whose resources can be accessed Resource Quantitative resources the user can access Access Level Authorization level for the resources as described in Table 26
399. t ended m Itshould run once a month on the first day of each month m The job should only run after all employees have submitted their time sheets m Because of the confidential nature of information being processed the job should only run on a Accounting Node node group m The job must run by a certain time to ensure that there is time for a different job not in the draft to print the pay checks Appendix B 373 Handling payroll processing needs 374 Defining the job type and other general information about the job The General tab defines the following information m The Tasktype is Job m The File Name and Path fields identify the file name and location of the batch job These are required fields for the Job tasktype Defining the job so that it is scheduled on the first day of each month The job is scheduled on the first day of every month In the Scheduling tab the following values are selected m day 1 in the Month Days area m all months in the Months area done by clicking ALL Ensuring confidentiality by running the job on a particular node ID Because of the confidential nature of data being processed the Execution tab specifies that the job should only run on the Accounting Node Node ID Group which identifies a computer that is reserved for Accounting processing and physically located in a restricted area Ensuring that the job runs in time for pay checks to be printed The Execution tab specifies that the j
400. t if you click Delete without selecting a Delete option m If the deletion fails click Force Delete R L which can often successfully perform a deletion in a non serious error situation m To delete the tables from the Control M EM database only click Local Delete m To delete the tables from the Control M database only click Remote Delete Chapter5 Organizing and managing jobs in tables 149 Managing jobs in tables Managing jobs in tables 150 You can perform many job management tasks in the job editing form Tree view Flow diagram and the Table Content dialog box Table 40 lists common job management tasks Table 40 Job management tasks Task to perform display the list of jobs and Sub tables in the Table Content dialog box How to perform it Double click the table name in the Table Manager For additional details see To display the list of jobs in a table on page 151 edit the details of a job or Sub table Select the job or Sub table from any view of the Table Content dialog and click Edit alternatively for jobs only not Sub tables in the flow diagram double click the job s node For additional details see To display the details of a job or SMART Table on page 152 move a job Either redefine the relevant parameter for example Control M in the job editing form or in the tree view drag the job to its new location in the navigation tree For additional details see
401. tablish job dependencies globally Where to go from here To move jobs into production see Chapter 13 Putting jobs into production m To automate job scheduling see Chapter 14 Automating job scheduling and maintenance m To define resources to Control Ms see Chapter 15 Identifying data center resources available for Control M use To define global conditions see Chapter 16 Establishing job dependencies across Control Ms Chapter 12 Introduction to moving to production 193 Moving to production 194 Control M User Guide hme 1 3 Putting jobs into production This chapter presents the following topics Writing tables to the Control M EM database 000s cece ence eee 195 Uploading tables to the Control M database 0 00 cece cee eee 196 Manually scheduling jobs and tables 4 252 skseecssesa es annarra arrana 198 Downloading tables from Control M to Control M EM 000005 200 After you have finished defining or modifying job processing definitions to use them you must ensure that the tables that contain them are written to the Control M EM database and loaded to the appropriate Control M database Writing tables to the Control M EM database If you are working in an online workspace or using the Table manager when you save your work the Control M EM database is directly updated so there is no need to perform a write operation A write operation is only r
402. tart Time Date and time the job began executing End Time Date and time the job finished executing Average Average time in hhmmss format for the job to run based on Run Time the last successful runs of the job Standard Standard deviation from the average runtime This statistic is Deviation compiled from the last successful runs of the job From Step z OS only with Control M Restart Step from which to rerun the job From Proc z OS only with Control M Restart Procedure step from which to rerun the job To Step z OS only with Control M Restart Step until which to rerun the job To Proc z OS only with Control M Restart Procedure step until which to rerun the job Highest RC z OS only The highest return code from among all the steps of the job in Cnnnn format This value includes both the steps ended NOTOK and the steps ended OK If any steps ended abnormally the first ABEND Code either in Sxxx or Uxxxx format is saved as the highest return code See the Control M Parameter Guide for further information about return codes for z OS jobs 264 Control M User Guide Performing manual job intervention Table 53 Fields of the Active tab Part 3 of 3 Section Field Description Highest RC z OS only The name of the job step that generated the highest Step return code Highest RC described above Highest RC z OS only The name of the job procedure step that generated Proc the highest return code Highest
403. that list Task display or hide an Item Count at the bottom of the Details list How to Click Item Count in the pop up menu for any job listing locate a listed job in the flow diagram Click Find in the pop up menu for the job listing open the job editing form for a listed job Double click the job listing export the details of the listed jobs to a comma delimited CSV file Click Export to File in the pop up menu for the job listing create and view a text report containing the details about the listed jobs Click Create Report to save this information as a file To open the saved report in your default text editor click Show Report display the listed jobs in their own ViewPoint Click Open ViewPoint For more information see Properties of ViewPoints based on dependent jobs Properties of ViewPoints based on dependent jobs When you display the jobs listed in the Detail list in their own ViewPoint the View Point has the following special properties For Neighborhood dependencies The job on which the Neighborhood action was You cannot change the filter on the new ViewPoint Changes made to the original ViewPoint are reflected in the new ViewPoint but in the case of Enhanced Why the Enhanced Why search is not recalculated Deletion of a job in the original ViewPoint is reflected in the new ViewPoint but for Neighborhood dependencies jobs are not added
404. the Table manager you should update the Control M EM database by performing a Save before you perform an upload m If you are working in local mode when you request an Upload Control M EM automatically writes the table to the Control M EM database before performing the upload default This makes it unnecessary for you to manually perform the Write Chapter 13 Putting jobs into production 199 Downloading tables from Control M to Control M EM A WARNING A If you modified the job or table but did not upload the changes the version of the tables and jobs currently residing in the Control M database will be ordered or forced In this case m the modifications are not reflected in the job order m if you saved the modifications in Online mode the Control M EM database and Control M database will not be synchronized an error message will be issued To force the table click Force Ignore scheduling criteria To order or force a job so that it is automatically put on hold as soon as it starts to run click Order Force with Hold This enables you to customize an individual run of a job using AutoEdit variables This feature is available only for versions 6 2 01 and later of Control M 3 Click Order which displays the progress of the order or force action in the Action Report 4 Click Close at any time to close the Action Report The table is first written to the Control M EM database and then uploaded to the Control
405. the Control M EM GUI enables you to view the following service types m Services Enables you to view service logs open services in a viewpoint and create service notes BMC Batch Impact Manager services Enables you to open Batch Impact Manager job editing forms open services in a viewpoint view problematic jobs view service logs create service notes update service deadlines find Batch Impact Manager jobs and create service assumptions For more information about BMC Batch Impact Manager see the Control M Business Service Management Solution User Guide To monitor a service see Monitoring services on page 312 Monitoring services 312 This procedure describes how to monitor services and Batch Impact Manager services in the Service Monitor NOTE Uw The word Disconnected in the title bar indicate when the BMC Batch Impact Manager Server or the Self Service Server is down When one of the servers are down you cannot use this window to track services To monitor services from Control M EM 1 Select Tools gt Service Monitor from Control M EM The Service Monitor window is displayed showing services their status and other relevant information such as their estimated completion times and the number of jobs in the service that have already completed 2 You can perform the following functions by right clicking on the selected service NOTE The default refresh interval for refresh
406. the condition is added to the system with the original scheduling date of the job The symbol in the Effect column instructs Control M to add rather than delete the condition The successor job GatewayStopped uses the name ENDED condition Defining a job that stops the gateway The GatewayStopped job stops the Gateway It should only be run after the other components have been stopped Defining the job to implement an operating system command and other general information about the job Like its predecessor jobs this job issues an operating system Stop command The General tab defines the following m The Tasktype is Command The Command field contains the following operating system Stop command to be executed ctl u emuser p empass C Gateway all cmd stop This is a required field for the Command tasktype m File Name is an optional field for Command type jobs Any value specified in this field appears as the job name in the job node in the flow diagram Instead of leaving this field blank BMC Software recommends that you specify the name of the job in this field as has been done in this sample job Ensuring that this job will not run until all its predecessor jobs have ended To ensure that it runs only after all its predecessor jobs have ended successfully GatewayStopped contains the following definitions m its Conditions tab contains In prerequisite conditions that match an Out prerequisite condition the name E
407. the job might be run more than once for example cyclic or rerun jobs It also helps eliminate clutter from the active environment even before New Day processing is run the following day To define prerequisite conditions 1 To define In prerequisite conditions do the following in the In condition area of the Conditions tab A Specify the name and date of each required condition The most common date value is ODAT which resolves to the job s original scheduling date Dates must be 4 characters Table 33 lists the complete set of valid dates that can be specified for an In and Out condition B If you are defining multiple In prerequisite conditions select the relationship between the conditions in the list box If the relationship is complex that is a combination of And and Or select Set relationship manually which adds columns that let you specify a relationship parameter and parentheses on each line fill in these columns as needed You cannot nest parentheses You can use the buttons above the area to add delete copy or move conditions 2 To define Out prerequisite conditions do the following in the Out condition area of the Conditions tab For each condition specify the condition name and date see Table 33 and in the Effect column indicate whether the job should add or delete the condition when the job ends You can use the buttons above the area to add delete copy or move conditions Table 33
408. the list of alerts In the Alerts window choose File gt Print Then in the Print dialog box provide the print details and click Print To open an alert into a Local ViewPoint In the Alerts window select the alert and choose Actions gt Properties gt Open into Viewpoint Control M User Guide Working with alerts A new ViewPoint is displayed in the GUI This ViewPoint contains the job node of the job that prompted the selected alert In addition job nodes of jobs that depend on or are predecessors for the job are also shown in this ViewPoint NOTE m You cannot use this function for an alert with an empty Order ID m Ifthe job that prompted the selected alert is no longer in the Control M EM environment an empty ViewPoint is displayed m Depending on the setting of the option Open into Local View area certain nodes might not be displayed in the ViewPoint For details and instructions on changing the setting see the description in Table 77 on page 363 Chapter 21 Monitoring and handling alerts 253 Working with alerts 254 Control M User Guide Monitoring and intervening in production This chapters presents the following topics MGHICHNE jc osulsteeseee ee a Seen tered ey seer eels eee sab oe ed yes 255 Checking job status summaries by Control M application and group 256 Checking job status details nnna anann eis eiseleune ithe venede sree 256 Performing job monitoring actions
409. the rule definition appears View or modify a service assumption by selecting Service gt Service Assumptions For more details about service assumptions see the Control M Business Service Management Solution User Guide BMC Batch Impact Manger only Chapter 25 Service monitoring 313 Monitoring services 314 Control M User Guide Analyzing and optimizing the production environment This part presents the following topics Chapter 26 Introduction to analyzing and optimizing production 317 Chapter 27 Defining and generating Teponts lt hxiees cove cide die ee a ea 319 Chapter 28 Viewing and playing back archived data a 0 344 oce 4 enheein bet eeegee yes 341 Part 5 315 316 Control M User Guide Introduction to analyzing and optimizing production This chapter presents the following topics Analyzing and optimizing the system oscp ies or urges ore yen dn TOES eee uk ed ees 317 Analyzing and optimizing the system After Control M job scheduling has been implemented you can analyze the system for problems such as bottlenecks tasks running over their deadlines resource shortages poor workload balancing and so on Through analysis you can identify the root causes of problems and determine the potential impact of implementing changes such as adding applications or changing resources Performing analyses can not only help you eliminate problems they can help you optimize the system
410. the server and click OK 3 Click OK The Alternative Server Selection dialog box closes Diagnostics defaults The Diagnostics panel sets defaults for printing diagnostics at the desired severity levels into a log file The log file can then be sent to BMC Software Technical Support to help you troubleshoot technical problems with Control M EM The options of the Control M EM Diagnostics panel are the same as for the same panel in Control M Desktop For details see Table 73 on page 356 NOTE Use this panel only when instructed by BMC Software Technical Support Your technical support representative will notify you which fields to change Confirmation defaults The Confirmations panel determines which confirmation requests and warnings should be displayed for various actions The process of setting Control M EM confirmations is the same as the process for Control M Desktop For details see Confirmation defaults on page 358 Service Monitor Window The Service Monitor Window panel determines whether notifications will be sent on new problematic services and how they will be displayed You can also define the frequency that the Service Monitor Window will be refreshed in seconds Appendix A 365 Setting options for the Control M Reporting facility Setting options for the Control M Reporting facility This section presents tables with setting options for the following defaults m Environment defaults a Viewer defa
411. ticular result from the SYSOUT fill in the fields as follows In the stmt field specify the job script statement as formatted by the control module In the code field specify the operating system response as formatted by the control module NOTE m On statements that depend on the job SYSOUT are checked against statements passed from the SYSOUT by the relevant Control Module and therefore must be in the same format as the statements passed by the Control Module For information on how control modules format the job script and operating system responses see the appropriate Control Module Administrator Guide For formatting instructions for job types designated as OS the default and for a description of the logic used to determine if On criteria are satisfied see the description of the On parameters in the Control M Parameter Guide Also see the following example m You can use and wildcards In Chinese Japanese and Korean character sets The and wildcards are not supported The wildcard is supported only as a standalone value or as a suffix to another value it cannot be embedded in or act as a prefix to another value m You cannot use AutoEdit variables 116 Control M User Guide Defining postprocessing actions that depend on job processing results EXAMPLE Defining On statements relating to the SYSOUT A job script requests among other things that the operating system
412. tion Control M EM enables you to monitor and intervene in job processing in the production environment The selection of jobs you view is called a ViewPoint ViewPoints are discussed in Chapter 20 Selecting jobs to monitor You should become familiar with the information in this chapter before using Control M Desktop to define job processing definitions and other entities and before using Control M EM to monitor and intervene in your production environment Starting Control M Desktop 26 1 Do one of the following m From Control M EM GUL select Tools gt Control M Desktop and go to step 3 From the Start menu navigate to BMC Control M gt Control M Enterprise Manager gt Control M Desktop 2 Enter your user name and password select the Control M EM GUI Server to which you want to connect and click Login If change password fields are displayed your password is soon due to expire Fill in your new password and then confirm it TIP If the GUI Server to be selected is not listed contact your Control M administrator The Control M Desktop window is displayed 3 If the Load Jobs dialog box is displayed which depends on configuration options to load jobs from Control M EM into Control M Desktop Control M User Guide Connecting to a different GUI Server A Select the jobs and tables to be loaded and click Load and confirm if necessary If you select a nested Sub table all of the associated pa
413. tions upload the table to the Control M database a From a workspace online or local do the following 1 If the Control M hierarchy is not displayed choose View gt Hierarchy gt Data Center Table Job 2 In the flow diagram or navigation tree right click the table node and in the pop up menu choose Upload 3 If you are prompted for confirmation confirm a From the Table manager do the following 1 Select the table s to be uploaded 2 Click L f Upload If you are prompted for confirmation confirm Control M Desktop uploads the table to the Control M database If you are working in a local workspace and you adjusted the Write before upload in local workspace option in the General panel of the Control M Desktop Options dialog box appropriately Control M Desktop automatically writes the table to the Control M EM database before uploading it to the Control M database TIP If the Control M database contains a more recent version of the table you are trying to upload an Already Updated error is issued and the upload is prevented To force the upload in this case click Force Upload Chapter 13 Putting jobs into production 197 Manually scheduling jobs and tables Manually scheduling jobs and tables Ideally the process of job and table ordering should be automated at your site for details see Chapter 14 Automating job scheduling and maintenance However you can manually order or force jobs or t
414. tions defined in Control M EM version 6 3 01 the authorizations work as follows Chapter 2 Working with Control M Desktop and Control M EM 53 Tabs in the User and Group Authorizations windows 54 Users can see jobs permitted by User Authorization filtering criteria and jobs permitted by Group Authorization criteria for any group to which the user belongs However the jobs actions permitted by any of those filters apply only to the jobs permitted by that filter Therefore the user might be able to perform certain actions on some jobs but not other jobs EXAMPLE User Bob has permission to see jobs starting with a and is authorized to perform Free and Hold actions with regard to those jobs User Bob belongs to the Tech Support group Members of this group have permission to see jobs starting with b and are authorized to perform Rerun and Confirm actions with regard to those jobs User Bob also belongs to the DBA group Members of this group have permission to see jobs starting with c and are authorized to use the Log and Documentation browse features and perform Confirm actions with regard to those jobs When Bob logs on to Control M EM he will see all jobs starting with the letter a b and c On the group of jobs starting with the letter a he will be able to perform Hold and Free actions On jobs starting with the letter b he can perform Rerun and Confirm actions On jobs starting with the letter c he can view the Log and Docu
415. to produce a report that indicates when jobs in a selected calendar are scheduled to run For more information see the Control M Administrator Guide and the Control M for z OS User Manual 164 Control M User Guide Creating and modifying calendars Creating and modifying calendars 1 In Control M Desktop display the Calendar Manager by choosing Tools gt Calendar Manager or by clicking A which opens the Calendar Manager dialog box to display the list of calendars that exist in the Control M EM database 2 To modify an existing calendar select the calendar in the Calendar Manager dialog box and click 2 Edit To create a new calendar do the following A In the Calendar Manager dialog box click i New B In the displayed Calendar dialog box select the Control M in which the calendar will be defined enter a name for the calendar and select the type of calendar Regular Relative Periodic or Rule based 3 Continue with one of the following procedures depending on your choice in step B m To define Regular and Relative calendars m To define Periodic calendars m To define Rule Based calendars To define Regular and Relative calendars 1 Optional Fill in a free text description that will appear in the Calendar Manager 2 Define the year for the calendar by doing one of the following m Use the year that is displayed m Select a different year m Define a different year that is not listed Click New and select a
416. to specify complex assign function values using the Insert Function dialog box Additionally the character is a special place holder of the previous field value or a part of it Examples m Set the job s MEMLIB FROM home user1 TO home2 user3 m Update where Out Condition Name like HHMMSS The condition name is evaluated and set by Control M at runtime enabling users for example to create unique condition names in cyclic jobs The character has a special meaning and can save the previous field value assign function m Update Application assign function to new Application clear Clears the field value Fields that are assigned with a predefined set of values reset to the default value replace substring Replace all occurrences of the substring specified in FROM field with the one specified in the TO field which may be empty For example If the field contains several values a list field such as the SAP R3 Variant Name field you can replace a substring like VAR1 with another string VAR in all cell values using the following statement Update SAP R3 Variant Name replace substring VAR1 VAR2 replace expression Regular expressions search and replace support can use references to numbered groups For example Update Application replaces expression account with 2account 1 In this example if the Applicat
417. to this ViewPoint for Enhanced Why dependencies jobs that are connected to the deleted job are a performed is highlighted m a M not deleted M Additional Neighborhood Enhanced Why and Critical Path functionality is enabled in the new ViewPoint Chapter 22 Monitoring and intervening in production 261 Intervening m The Refresh Needed button functions as in any ViewPoint but in the case of Neighborhood dependencies no jobs can be added to or deleted from the new ViewPoint m The hierarchy of the new ViewPoint is inherited from the original ViewPoint Intervening The Control M Enterprise Manager window provides you a number of ways to intervene in job processing if necessary Viewing and editing the details of a job in the active environment When a job processing definition is ordered or forced through New Day processing or manually a modified copy of the original definition is placed in the active jobs file To help you analyze jobs and manage job flows in Control M EM you can display and modify the processing details of the job in the active environment To display and update the details of a job in the active environment 1 In Control M EM place the job processing definition in Held status by right clicking the node and choosing Hold You can skip this step if you will only be viewing but not updating the details Smart Tables and Sub tables can also be placed in Held status and all jobs belonging to th
418. torical data See archiving data icons described 31 Include In Jobs Filter criteria 57 Include in Jobs Filter Jobs Filter Definition window 57 J JCL editing 266 viewing 257 job dependencies across CONTROL Ms 213 defining prerequisite conditions 270 defining with flow diagram 140 detecting loops in conditions 110 recognizing 34 Job History window 150 job list view 38 job node colors 32 job versions managing 157 jobs See also job dependencies See also scheduling jobs allocating resources for 110 comparing 155 defining postprocessing actions 114 defining predecessor 42 defining prerequisite conditions 109 defining successor 42 defining variables for 112 displaying action messages 270 filtering 56 issuing end of job messages 123 load balancing 104 manual intervention 265 restarting z OS 268 sample jobs 369 SYSOUT handling 125 404 Control M User Guide validating changed job definitions 393 z OS conditional processing 121 Jobs Execution report 324 Jobs filter 57 Jobs Filter Definition window 56 Jobs panel Authorizations window 53 buttons 56 L Library field Table panel 61 LIKE operator 57 list format 36 load balancing running jobs on specific nodes 104 loading jobs CONTROL M Desktop 40 local time 358 Lock account field User Authorizations window 51 locked calendars 170 tables 147 tables during upload 27 log file creating with Diagnostics panel 356 loopdetecttool utility 110 M main
419. ults Confirmation defaults Environment defaults The Environment panel contains several display default settings for the Control M Reporting facility Preview window Table 79 Environment panel Field option Display Report Tabs Default to be set Tabs for each open report and the Start Page are displayed in the task bar at the bottom of the screen default If not checked tabs are not displayed but you can toggle between open reports through the Window menu option Use flat buttons Tab appearance m when checked tabs appear as separate areas on a flat bar m when not checked default tabs are raised and distinct Display Report Icons Display report icons gj in the report tabs in the taskbar Close Report on Double Click Double clicking the report tab closes the report Depending on other options a confirmation prompt might be displayed Display full path in tooltips Full report path will be displayed in a tooltip when you pass the cursor over the tab Display Report Text to appear in the tab Valid values m Filename name of the report file m Title report title might be abbreviated Viewer defaults The Viewer panel contains several display default settings for the Control M Reporting facility Preview window Table 80 Viewer Panel Part 1 of 2 Field option Default to be set Display Border Display a border around the report Edge report
420. un for example unavailable required resources or missing conditions 2 Ifa prerequisite condition required by the job is missing to add it do the following A Click on the line that identifies the missing condition B If the Why dialog box shows a prerequisite condition with a date value of or you can change it to a specific date C Click Add Condition D If a confirmation is required confirm the addition NOTE If a NOT Condition exists that prevents a job from running click Remove Condition NOTE You must be authorized to add or remove conditions Chapter 22 Monitoring and intervening in production 269 Handling errors that occur when you intervene Handling errors that occur when you intervene When you perform job actions the Action Report window automatically opens and displays the status of the requested actions If errors occur these appear in the window You can also manually request display of the Action Report window To display job action messages 1 In the Control M Enterprise Manager window choose View gt Output Windows gt Action Report Messages remain in the window until you clear them or until the maximum number of messages allowed has been reached The maximum is customizable For details see Environment Display panel on page 361 2 After reviewing the errors click one of the following action choices m Hide closes the Action Report window but Control
421. ups the existing user belongs to are associated with the new user but the existing password is not copied The password for the new user can be specified by using the General panel of the User Authorizations window 2 Specify a name for the new user or group in the New Name dialog box and click OK A new user is displayed in the User panel A new group is displayed in the Group panel To modify authorizations for a specific user or group 1 Select the user name in the Users tab or the group name in the Groups tab 2 To modify authorizations click Update The User Authorizations or Group Authorizations window is displayed 3 To add a user to one or more groups or delete a user from one or more groups follow the steps described under Member Of tab actions on page 52 To delete a specific user or group 1 Select the user or group and click Delete 2 Aconfirmation window is displayed Click OK to confirm the deletion Chapter 2 Working with Control M Desktop and Control M EM 49 Tabs in the User and Group Authorizations windows Mi NOTE New modified copied and deleted authorizations of a user and groups the user is a member of do not take effect until the user logs off of all Control M EM sessions If user authorizations are changed in Control M EM at sites with BMC Batch Impact Manager you must restart the BMC Batch Impact Manager Server for the changes to take effect in the BMC Batch Impact Manager Web Client If thi
422. uring the defined hours for each of the days in the range Between specific date and time Selecting this option displays a From and To fields for date and time 1 In the From and To field edit the date or select a day from the calendar by clicking the button to the right of the field 2 Edit the hours and AM PM in the From and To fields The period is defined from the start date and time until the end date and time Chapter 23 Managing Workloads 291 23 Table 59 Date and Time Type Date Type Option Every Week Between day of the week and times Defining Date and Time Selecting this option displays a From and To fields for day of the week and time of day 1 Select a day of the week from the drop down menu 2 Edit or scroll the hour and AM PM The period is defined as a range starting from a day of the week and time to an end day of the week and time On specific days in calendar Selecting this option displays a date list and time type field 1 Click the drop down arrow in the Days field 2 Select a day from the calendar The selected day is displayed in the Days field 3 Click Add to list The date is added to the list on the right of the window To remove a date select the date and click the delete button 4 In the Time Type select either m All Hours 24 hours per selected day m Between From and To fields appear to define the range of hours The period is def
423. ut not glo job1_started m Even truncated strings of the global condition prefixes must be unique or unpredictable results might occur For example do not define both a DA prefix and a DAY prefix because DA is a substring of DAY and therefore not unique If your site is planning on adding a new Control M installation you can add that Control M to global condition definitions even though it is not yet functional and does not yet appear in the Control M selection lists C To add an anticipated Control M installation to a global condition definition do the following m Click Add New Control M in the From or To area m Inthe New Control M Name dialog box enter the name of the new Control M and click OK D Click OK NOTE m Changes made using the Global Conditions dialog box for example defining a new prefix only affect conditions that are created or deleted after the change was saved m Although you can create any combination of global condition prefixes BMC Software recommends that you limit the global condition prefixes to very specific less general prefixes that do not match large numbers of conditions refrain from defining prefixes that encompass a large number of Control Ms in the From and To fields The more general the prefix the more stress is added to the system This can slow down other requests and data transmissions For more information about implementing global conditions efficiently see Best
424. value as literals m For each field you can specify several criteria separated by commas for example CTM Name A B The implied relationship is OR NOTE m Do not select both Emergency and Critical or no jobs will be displayed m Task type for z OS jobs can correspond to the following fields of UNIX jobs Task Type Cyclic and Emergency To correctly filter on certain task types for z OS jobs specify the desired states for example Cyclic or Critical along with the desired task type For example to filter for Cyclic Jobs select Cyclic Only in the main dialog box and Job in the Task Type dialog box 4 To delete an entry select it and click Delete 5 When done click OK Defining the display hierarchy A hierarchy determines how selected jobs are displayed The default hierarchy is Control M Application Group Name You can define other hierarchies in the Hierarchy Definition dialog box Chapter 20 Selecting jobs to monitor 245 Alternative method for defining ViewPoints the ViewPoint wizard To define a hierarchy 1 In Control M Enterprise Manager choose Tools gt ViewPoint Manager 2 Perform one of the following m To edit an existing hierarchy definition select the filter name under the Hierarchies node and click Edit To create anew hierarchy definition select the Hierarchies node and click New Then in the Hierarchy dialog box enter a name for the hierarchy Hierarchy names are not case
425. ve ranges Then specify values for the following m from date earliest date of the active period m to date latest date of the active period The To date cannot precede the From date You can optionally leave the From date or the To date blank Until And From Select Until to define an inactive range between which the job is not eligible to be ordered sandwiched between two active ranges that is active period1 gt inactive period gt active period2 Then specify values for the following m until date last date of the first active period active period1 during which the job can be ordered The inactive period begins the day after this date m to date first date of the second active period active period2 The inactive period ends the day before this date The Until date must precede the And From date Using the Until And From format you must specify both dates you cannot leave either of them blank The following fields appear only for Control M for z OS jobs Statistics Name of the Control M periodic calendar in which statistics relating to the Calendar job are collected This parameter is relevant only for jobs running in Control M for z OS version 6 2 00 or later SAC Whether to adjust the logical date for a job converted from a scheduling product other than Control M This parameter is relevant only for jobs running in Control M for z OS version 6 2 00 or later Control M User
426. ve resources 0 0 6 cece eee 209 Defining quantitative resources yi cremiinddrieiede rd eeeiaee es ceenen eke es 209 Defining quantitative resources Cad Pee Kees eee Ree end ee ees 209 Defining quantitative resources 24 lt yn0s beret as eee eewee aeons eee eee RASS Re 209 atid hte S a De he Dees oe E E e a bee E doe eed Ss Sch 212 ena Ea beasts Sere toe wae pila en tise eke patie ty E ete gee eer 212 se ete als Baie eae Rae eA ed dal ee GING Wie Ghd ed E EES 212 Introduction To ensure Control M does not submit a job unless all resources that the job requires are available Control M provides a feature for specifying resource requirements Resources are logical constructs that can be of one of the following types m Control resources these are resource requirements generally characterized by the control that a job needs over them exclusive or shared Data information resources such as files tables and databases are frequently control resources m Quantitative resources these are resources requirements that are generally quantified Physical resources such an quantity of memory percentage of CPU megabytes of storage or number of tape drives are frequently quantitative resources Chapter 15 Identifying data center resources available for Control M use 205 Introduction The success of this feature requires that the following be specified for each resource m The resource must be associated with a specifi
427. w Groups tab fields Field Description Filter Select this check box to enable the Group Name filter Group Name _ Specify a group name or pattern for example adm Click Apply to apply text box the filter Click Clear to erase the contents of the text box Name Group name Groups listed satisfy the filter requirements if any Description Description of the group To filter data in the Users or Groups tab of the Authorizations window To limit the data displayed in the Users or Groups tab choose the Filter check box specify a name or pattern in the User or Group Name text box and click Apply For example choose Filter and specify adm in the User Name text box to limit the display to records containing user names that begin with adm Control M User Guide Authorizations window See the information about specifying pattern matching strings in Appendix C Formats values and functions Click Clear to remove the specified filter string and display user or group information without using any filter To define copy or assign authorizations to a user or group 1 In the Users or Groups tab of the Authorizations window click New or choose an existing user or group and click Copy The New Name dialog box is displayed NOTE When copying an existing group the users that belonged to the existing group are not associated with the new group When copying an existing user the gro
428. w accept pattern matching strings or expressions as input Using these strings the user can select many different entities by specifying a relatively simple combination of characters and symbols NOTE The use of complex expressions tends to reduce performance Table 81 describes the symbols used to compose pattern matching strings Appendix C 387 Pattern matching strings 388 Table 81 Symbols used to compose pattern matching strings Part 1 of 2 Symbol Name Asterisk wildcard Usage Denotes any number of characters including no characters This can be inserted in place of a string Note If one or more filter criteria fields are not needed it is more efficient to leave the field blank than to use the character However at least one filter criteria field must have a value or Question mark wildcard or period Denotes any single character This can be inserted in place of any number of characters Exclamation Denotes all possibilities that do not match the pattern that immediately follows the character This can be specified to exclude the pattern immediately following the from the result Where a pattern begins with the escape character backslash can be used to escape the and either include or exclude the pattern required only where is the first character For example to include occurrences of wip use the pattern wip whereas wip exc
429. will be unlocked m If you delete a job from the flow diagram to avoid cutting the connection between the deleted job s predecessor and successor jobs set the appropriate option in the Flowdiagram Links panel Important This option works only when you are deleting a job from the flow diagram ina Local workspace and only if you delete one job at a time For details see the description of the customization option Automatically inherit job s conditions if deleted on page 355 Chapter5 Organizing and managing jobs in tables 153 Managing jobs in tables 154 Control M User Guide hme Comparing jobs This chapter presents the following topics IMtrOdUCHON s ere 4 34 bods bi dehed a a E a Sete bed eed een ed slate 155 Comparing JODS epre paa ea te E ek pees E ee Eee eee ees 155 Introduction You can compare different jobs from the a Control M Desktop window that is the flow diagram or list display and the navigation tree m Table Content window available from the Table manager in Control M Desktop You can choose either method at any time Factors that might affect your choice are m where you are currently working m whether you want to work in your workspace use the Control M Desktop window or directly in the Control M EM database choose the Table Manager Comparing jobs The Job Comparison window enables you to compare jobs and generate comparison reports Table 43 lists common job comparison tasks Ch
430. window using the resource_name format Quantity for an entry whose type is Defined this column indicates the number of units of the resource that are currently available For In Use and Required entries this column indicates the number of units of the resource currently used by the job specified by its RBA Maximum for an entry whose type is Defined this column indicates the maximum quantity of the resource existing in the Control M installation For In Use and Required entries the value in this column is 0 Priority for an entry whose type is Defined this field is not applicable For entries with a type of In Use or Required Y or N indicates whether the job identified in RBA is critical RBA for z OS only this field displays the Relative Byte Address a unique identifier For an entry whose type is Defined or Required RBA is not applicable For In Use entries this column contains the RBA of the z OS job using the resource 3 To create a quantitative resource A Inthe Quantitative Resources window choose Actions gt Add B In the displayed Quantitative Resource dialog box fill in the data that defines the quantitative resource C Click OK 4 To delete a quantitative resource select it and choose Actions gt Delete NOTE You can delete a quantitative resource only if m nojobs own the resource that is the Counter field is 0 for all resource table entries for the resour
431. y added in Control M installations NY LA and SF The Prerequisite Conditions window displays four different conditions called GL1_JOB_END each belonging to a different Control M ROME NY LA and SF However if this condition is added in any Control M other than ROME it is not automatically duplicated in other Control M installations If Control M NY adds the condition GL1_JOB_END it will not be automatically added in ROME or anywhere else If the GL1_JOB_END prerequisite condition is deleted in Control M ROME Control M EM deletes the GL1_JOB_END prerequisite condition in Control M installations NY LA and SF if the condition exists there If the GL1_JOB_END prerequisite condition is created in Control M ROME but Control M SF is disconnected or downloading Control M EM creates this condition in NY and LA only and sends the change to SF when SF is able to receive updates If the GLALL_OK prerequisite condition is added or deleted in any Control M the condition is automatically added or deleted in Control M installations PARIS and SYDNEY The asterisk in the From Control M field indicates all Control M installations If the GLNY_OK prerequisite condition is added or deleted in Control M NY the condition is automatically added or deleted in all other Control M installations If a prerequisite condition beginning with the GL2WAY prefix is added or deleted in either Control M HQ or CENTER1 the same operation is performed o
432. y job bottom of the Details list listing locate a listed job in the flow diagram Click Find in the pop up menu for the job listing open the Job Editing form for a listed job Double click the job listing export the details of the listed jobs to a Click Export to File in the pop up menu for the comma delimited CSV file job listing create and view a text report containing Click Create Report to save this information as a the details about the listed jobs file To open the saved report in your default text editor click Show Report display the listed jobs in their own Click Open ViewPoint For information on ViewPoint these ViewPoints see Properties of ViewPoints based on dependent jobs on page 261 Printing the flow diagram BMC Software recommends that you perform a Print Preview before printing the flow diagram When previewing a printout the following hints might be useful m Marks on the rulers at the left and top areas of the Print Preview window which are designed to help you locate nodes indicate relative distance not inches or centimeters Chapter 2 Working with Control M Desktop and Control M EM 43 Changing your password Columns are labeled alphabetically from left to right beginning with A Rows are labeled numerically from top to bottom beginning with 0 m Pages are labeled as follows Alphabetic labels indicate the horizontal sequencing Numeric labels indi
433. ym option exists in Control M Desktop Control M EM and the Control M Reporting facility Anytime you change this option in one of these windows the option is automatically changed in the other windows List all templates Determine the type of templates displayed in the template list box in the job editing form m Leave the check box blank to display the list of job scheduling definition templates only default m Click the check box to display the list of both job scheduling definition templates in the job editing form and table templates in the table editing form Use compact Step Codes grid On Do lines will be displayed in a single row in the Step Codes grid Connection Mode How Control M Desktop should connect to Control M EM Select one of the following m Automatic Connection Control M Desktop opens and closes the connection as necessary depending on selected actions m Manual Connection Control M Desktop maintains an open connection with the Control M EM GUI Server until the user closes the connection Resolve job s Author field conflict How to handle situations where the name of the user performing a Write to Control M EM does not match the name of the Author Select one of the following m Change Automatically check this value if the author should automatically be reset without prompting the user for confirmation m Prompt Before Changing check this value to have Control M EM pr
434. ys the job can remain in the Active Jobs file after its ODAT has passed if the job has not yet been submitted EXAMPLE A job that updates flight times for an airline should cycle through every 3 minutes from the end of the previous run If for some reason it fails it should trigger an alternative flight update program shout a message to the administrator and stop running 1 In the Execution panel m Click Cyclic Job and Set m Select the following rerun cycle Rerun every 3 minutes from job s end m Select 99 as the maximum reruns value 2 In the Steps panel do the following A Define the following On Statement stmt code notok B Define the following Do statements m Do Force Job Table flight Job Name AltUpdate Date ODAT m Do Shout To Admin Urgn Very Urgent Msg Failure in flight update job m Do Stop cyclic Defining automatic rerun for a job that ends NOT OK Defining automatic rerun for a job that ends not OK requires that you specify the necessary rerun parameters in the Execution tab and the On Do conditional logic to trigger the automatic rerun in the Steps tab To automatically rerun a job that ends notok 1 In the Rerun area of the Execution tab select m the rerun interval the measurement unit and whether the rerun should be measured from the start end or target scheduling time of the current instance m the maximum number of reruns 0 99 102 Control M User Guide Defining jobs that should

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents

  Brocade FLS648 network switch  Guide de l`utilisateur SoundPoint® IP 500/501  Pourquoi les murs auraient-ils des oreilles ? : Vers un  EVGA 03G-P3-1597-ER NVIDIA GeForce GTX 580 3GB graphics card  Desa FVF30N User's Manual  ——GPS+OBD Tracker —— OBD For Vehicle User Manual  MANUAL DE INSTRUÇÕES TABLET QUAD CORE  

Copyright © All rights reserved. Failed to retrieve file